From 26f4947f509c2440ce28e625133a15f6a2446920 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>
Date: Thu, 13 Sep 2018 10:28:30 +0900
Subject: update acrotex

---
 texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex | 12349 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 12349 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex

(limited to 'texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex')

diff --git a/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8798115e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/doc/latex/acrotex/aeb_man.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,12349 @@
+\RequirePackage[!use=preview,!use=usebw]{spdef}
+\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{makeidx,showidx}
+\usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath}
+\usepackage[%
+    web={centertitlepage,designv,
+        forcolorpaper,latextoc,pro},
+    exerquiz={nocorrections},aebxmp,
+    dljslib={ImplMulti,limitArith,nodec,satisfyEq}
+]{aeb_pro}
+%\usepackage{myriadpro}
+\usepackage[altbullet]{lucidbry}
+\usepackage{aeb_mlink}
+\usepackage{longtable,colortbl}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{collectbox}
+
+\usepackage{xbmks}
+\DeclareInitView{layoutmag={navitab:UseOutlines}}
+\xbmksetup{colors={int=red},styles={intbf}}
+
+
+
+\newbox\aebbox
+
+\usepackage{acroman}
+\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}
+
+
+\def\AcroBlog{{Acro\!\TeX} Blog}
+
+\makeatletter
+\def\chgCurrLblName#1{\def\@currentlabelname{#1}}
+\let\gob\@gobble
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2em}{3.5em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{4}{5.5em}{1.5em}}
+\renewcommand\@pnumwidth{2.55em}
+\renewcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@
+    \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+    \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}%
+    \setlength\@tempdima{2em}%{1.5em}%
+    \begingroup
+      \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+      \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+      \leavevmode \bfseries
+      \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+      \hskip -\leftskip
+      #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+    \endgroup
+  \fi}
+\makeatother
+
+
+%\usepackage[usecmtt]{myriadpro}
+
+%\margins{.25in}{.25in}{24pt}{.25in} % left,right,top, bottom
+%\screensize{4.19in}{4.67in} % height, width
+
+%\margins{.5in}{.25in}{24pt}{.25in} % left,right,top, bottom
+%\screensize{4.19in}{4.92in} % height, width
+
+%\hoffset=20pt
+
+\setlongtables
+\LTpre=0pt %\medskipamount
+\LTpost=-2\medskipamount
+%\LTpost=0pt %\medskipamount
+\setlength{\mathindent}{20pt}
+
+\def\AEBBook{\textsl{{Acro\!\TeX} eDucation System Tools: {\LaTeX} for interactive PDF documents}}
+
+
+%\usepackage{makeidx}
+%\makeindex
+%\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+%\DeclareFontFamily{U}{wi}{}
+%\DeclareFontShape{U}{wi}{m}{n}{<-> wingding}{}
+%\DeclareFontFamily{U}{webd}{}
+%\DeclareFontShape{U}{webd}{m}{n}{<-> webdings}{}
+
+%\font\zqacr=zqacr at 8pt
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformatwp{{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+
+%\def\changelinkcolorto#1{\def\@linkcolor{#1}}
+%\useFullWidthForPaper
+\newdimen\totaltextwidth
+\totaltextwidth=\fullscreenwidth
+\advance\totaltextwidth\oddsidemargin
+\renewcommand{\webheadwrapper}[1]{%
+    \hspace{-\oddsidemargin}%
+    \makebox[\totaltextwidth][s]{#1}\hss
+}
+
+%\sectionLayout{indent=-62.5pt,fontsize=large}
+%\subsectionLayout{indent=-31.25pt}
+%\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt}
+
+\renewcommand\hproportionwebtitle{.75}
+\universityLayout{fontsize=Large,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\titleLayout{fontsize=LARGE,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\authorLayout{fontsize=Large,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\tocLayout{fontsize=Large,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\sectionLayout{indent=-62.5pt,fontsize=large,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsectionLayout{indent=-31.25pt,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt,color=aeb,fontfamily=sffamily}
+\subsubDefaultDing{\texorpdfstring{$\bullet$}{\textrm\textbullet}}
+%\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+%    {\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{12pt}{-3pt}{\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+    {\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{6pt}{-3pt}
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand{\subparagraph}
+    {\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\parindent}{6pt}{-3pt}%
+    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\newcommand{\aebCng}{\@ifstar{\def\aeb@checked{*}\@aebCng}{\def\aeb@checked{x}\@aebCng}}%
+\newcommand\@aebCng[1][]{}
+%\newcommand{\aebCng}{\@ifstar{\def\aeb@checked{*}\@aebCng}{\def\aeb@checked{x}\@aebCng}}%
+%\newcommand{\@aebCng}[1][]{%
+%    \if\aeb@checked*\def\aeb@marker{\textcolor{blue}{aeb}~\textcolor{red}{\ding{052}}\goodbreak}\else
+%    \def\aeb@marker{\textcolor{red}{aeb}}\fi
+%    \def\argi{#1}\ifx\argi\@empty
+%        \marginpar{\scriptsize\aeb@marker}%
+%    \else\marginpar{\scriptsize\aeb@marker\goodbreak\raggedright#1}\fi}
+
+%\makeindex
+
+%\widestNumber{00.00.}
+
+\hfuzz=1pt
+
+\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\!\empty}
+
+%\setlongtables
+
+\def\AcroT{Acro\!\TeX}\def\cAcroT{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroT}}
+\def\AcroEB{\AcroT{} eDucation Bundle}\def\cAcroEB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroEB}}
+\def\AcroB{\AcroT{} Bundle}\def\cAcroB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroB}}
+\def\AcroFLeX{%
+    AcroF\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{L}\kern-.3eme\kern-.125emX}
+\def\APB{\textsf{APB}}
+\def\cAPB{\textcolor{blue}{\APB}}
+\def\AEB{\textsf{AeB}}
+\def\cAEB{\textcolor{blue}{\AEB}}
+\def\Web{\textsf{web}}
+\def\PDF{\textsf{PDF}}
+\def\bUrl{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+\definePath{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{http://www.acrotex.net/blog}
+
+%\newlength{\aebdimen}
+\def\anglemeta#1{$\langle\textit{\texttt{#1}}\rangle$}
+\def\meta#1{\textit{\texttt{#1}}}
+\let\pkg\textsf
+\let\env\texttt
+\let\opt\texttt
+\let\app\textsf
+\def\AEB{\textsf{AeB}}
+\def\AcroTeX{Acro\!\TeX}
+\def\HTML{HTML}\def\FDF{FDF}
+\def\PDF{PDF}\def\URL{URL}
+\let\amtIndent\leftmargini
+\def\bNH{\begin{NoHyper}}\def\eNH{\end{NoHyper}}
+\def\nhnameref#1{\bNH\nameref{#1}\eNH}
+\def\nhNameref#1{\bNH\Nameref{#1}\eNH}
+\def\nhurl#1{\bNH\url{#1}\eNH}
+\def\grayV#1{\textcolor{gray}{#1}}
+\def\darg#1{\{#1\}}
+\def\parboxValign{t}
+\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{%
+    \ifcase #1\or
+       See page~#2.\else See pages~#2.\fi
+}
+\newenvironment{aebQuote}
+   {\list{}{\leftmargin\amtIndent}%
+    \item\relax}{\endlist}
+\newcommand{\FmtMP}[2][0pt]{\mbox{}\marginpar{%
+    \raisebox{.5\baselineskip+#1}{%
+    \expandafter\parbox\expandafter[\parboxValign]%
+        {\marginparwidth}{\aebbkFmtMp#2}}}}
+\def\aebbkFmtMp{\kern0pt\itshape\small
+    \ifusebw\color{gray}\else\color{blue}\fi
+    \raggedleft\hspace{0pt}}\newcommand{\BlogArticle}{%
+    \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-1pt}\color{blue}\Pisymbol{webd}{254}%
+    }\raisebox{.5pt}{\ifusebw\color{black}\else
+    \color{red}\fi\ding{045}}}
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+   \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+\def\FitItIn{\eq@fititin}
+\def\endredpoint{\FitItIn{{\large\ifusebw\color{black}\else\color{red}\fi$\blacktriangleleft$}}}
+
+
+\hypersetup{linktocpage}
+
+\def\AmS{{\protect\usefont{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}%
+  A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}
+
+\def\latex/{{\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\amslatex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\tex/{{\protect\TeX}}
+\def\amstex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\TeX}}
+
+\definecolor{aeb}{rgb}{0.24,0.38,0.68}%bleu
+\universityColor{aeb}
+\tocColor{aeb}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\def\Y&Y{Y\kern-.2em{\footnotesize\&}\kern-.2emY}
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+   \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+
+\title{\texorpdfstring{\LARGE
+%---------------------------------%
+            The \AcroEB\space(AeB)%
+}{%-------------------------------%
+        The AcroTeX eDucation Bundle for LaTeX,
+                  Manual of Usage%
+}}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{How to create on-line exercises and quizzes}
+%\keywords{LaTeX, hyperref, PDF, exercises, quizzes}
+\Keywords{LaTeX,hyperref,PDF,exercises,quizzes}
+\university{{\AcroT} Software Development Team}
+\email{dpstory@acrotex.net}
+\versionLabel{Dated:}
+\version{2018/08/16}
+\copyrightyears{1999-\the\year}
+\nocopyright
+\prepared{2018/08/16}
+\revisionLabel{Distribution Dated:}
+
+\copyrightStatus{True}
+\copyrightNotice{Copyright (C) 1999-\the\year, D. P. Story}
+\copyrightInfoURL{http://www.acrotex.net}
+\authorTitle{Head of AcroTeX Developer}
+\descriptionWriter{Senior Technical Writer of AcroTeX}
+
+%\noPartNumbers
+
+\DesignTitlePageTrailer
+{%
+    ul=Copyright \copyright\ \webcopyrightyears,
+    ur=\thewebemail,
+    lr=\url{http://www.acrotex.net},
+    raise=-25pt
+}
+\def\CMD#1{\textbackslash#1}
+%\newcommand{\exPDF}[2][\expath/]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+\newcommand{\exPDF}[2][\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+\vskip\medskipamount\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]
+    {\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}\href{#1#2}{{\zqacr
+    b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\makeExBox#1{\href{run:\tutpathi/apb_#1.tex}{\scriptsize\fbox{#1}}}
+\renewcommand\expoint[1]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+\vskip\medskipamount\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]{\makeExBox{#1}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\tutpath{doc/tutorial}
+\def\tutpathi{tutorial}
+\def\expath{../examples}
+
+\renewcommand{\theaebEx}{\arabic{aebEx}}
+\renewcommand{\theHaebEx}{\arabic{aebEx}}
+
+\def\insMargin{}
+\def\Ex{\par\medskip\noindent\refstepcounter{aebEx}\insMargin\gdef\insMargin{}\textbf{Example~\theaebEx:}}
+\def\CmdLoc{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Command Location: }}
+\def\EnvLoc{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Environment Location: }}
+\def\KVP{\par\goodbreak\medskip\noindent\textbf{Key-Value Pairs: }}
+\def\PD{\par\goodbreak\medskip\noindent\textbf{Parameter Description: }}
+\def\Important{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Important: }}
+\def\CmdDescription{\par\medskip\noindent\textbf{Command Description: }}
+
+\begin{insDLJS}[indefCompare]{compare}{Comparisons}
+function indefCompare(a,b,c,F,G) {
+    var C, eqx;
+    with(Math) {
+        eqx = a;
+        if(isNaN(C = eval(F)-eval(G))) return -1;
+        eqx = c;
+        F = eval(F);
+        if(isNaN(G = eval(G)));
+        return abs( F - G - C );
+    }
+}
+\end{insDLJS}
+
+\frenchspacing
+
+\definePath\bgPath{"C:/Users/Public/Documents/ManualBGs/Manual_BG_Print_AeB.pdf"}
+\begin{docassembly}
+\addWatermarkFromFile({
+    bOnTop: false,
+    cDIPath: \bgPath
+})
+\executeSave()
+\end{docassembly}
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{Title Page}[action={\Named{FirstPage}}]{TitlePage}
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{The eforms Manual}[action={\GoToR/F(eformman.pdf)/D[0 /Fit]},color=blue,style={bf}]{eForms}
+\pdfbookmarkx[1]{Links to AcroTeX.Net}[action={/S/GoTo/D(undefined)},%
+  color=magenta,style={bf}]{acrotex}
+\belowpdfbookmarkx{http://www.acrotex.net}[action={\URI{http://www.acrotex.net}},%
+  color=magenta,style={bf}]{home}
+\belowpdfbookmarkx{http://blog.acrotex.net}[action={\URI{http://blog.acrotex.net}},%
+  color=magenta,style={bf}]{blog}
+
+
+\newpage
+
+\changelinkcolorto{black}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\changelinkcolorto{webgreen}
+
+\part{Forward}
+
+\newtopic For the past several years (this year is \the\year), I've been writing a book
+titled,
+\begin{quote}
+\AEBBook.
+\end{quote}
+The book~\cite{book:AEBB} covers {\AEB} and {\AEBP} in \emph{great detail} and includes many
+examples to illustrate concepts and techniques. Numerous new examples are
+available on the CD-ROM that accompanies the book.
+
+During the time of the writing, each of the packages covered was examined,
+bugs were fixed, and many new and major features were created. Any new
+features developed in the course of writing the book are documented in the
+book; however, they are \emph{not included in this documentation}. You can
+either buy the yet-to-be-submitted book sometime in the future, or discover
+the features by studying the DTX documentation of the program files. Sorry,
+it took me three years to write the book, I don't want to spend another year
+on this documentation. \verb!:-{)!
+
+As noted in \textbf{\nhnameref{eq2db}} on page~\pageref{eq2db}, I've set up a
+website that highlights the server-side scripts developed for the book (and
+available on the accompanying CD-ROM). You are invited to visit them and
+comment on them, if the spirit moves.
+
+\begin{flushright}
+Dr. D. P. Story\\[3pt]
+\today
+\end{flushright}
+
+\part{Preface}
+
+%\section{Introduction}
+
+% ff, fi, fl, ffl
+
+The {\cAcroEB} (abbreviated {\cAEB} and read ``{\AcroT} Education
+Bundle'') is a collection of {\LaTeX} macro files (briefly described
+below) along with various support and sample files. The theme of {\cAEB}
+is \textit{ePublication} in the \textit{education} sector using {\LaTeX}
+as the authoring application and Adobe's Portable Document Format
+(\textsf{PDF}) as the file format of the output document. The \cAcroB{}
+should be useful to educators who want to post interactive materials for
+their students on the \textsf{WWW}.
+
+\newtopic Currently, there are seven components to the bundle:
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item The \hyperref[s:web]{\pkg{web} package} is used to create an
+    attractive, easy-on-the-eye page layout suitable for the \textsf{WWW}
+    (or classroom/conference presentations). There is support for
+    background graphics; a {\Web} document can be re-purposed for
+    paper.
+\item  The \hyperref[s:exerquiz]{\pkg{exerquiz} package} makes
+    it very easy to create interactive exercises and quizzes. There are
+    numerous options, solutions at the end of the document, solutions
+    following the question, no solutions; quizzes are self marking, the
+    student can get immediate feedback, or get a final assessment after
+    the student finishes the quiz.
+\item The \href{eformman.pdf#eformsPkg}{\pkg{eforms} package} provides support for
+    PDF form fields, and links with arbitrary actions.
+\item The \href{eformman.pdf#insdljsPkg}{\pkg{insdljs} package} allows for the automatic
+    insertion of document level JavaScript. Document authors can use
+    \textsf{insdljs} to customize the processing of the
+    \textsf{exerquiz} quizzes.  See the documentation that accompanies
+    the package (\texttt{insdljs.dtx}) and see also the sample file
+    \texttt{jqzspec.tex} for an extensive example of how to modify the
+    \textsf{exerquiz} macros. The \textsf{insdljs} package also has an
+    \texttt{execJS} environment which can be used to create executable
+    and ``discardable'' JavaScript; see the DTX file for
+    details.
+%    and the demo file \texttt{execJStst.tex}, which features
+%    an animation built completely from {\LaTeX} source lines.
+    Documentation for the \pkg{insdljs} package appears in the
+    \href{eformman.pdf#insdljsPkg}{\pkg{eforms}} reference manual
+    (on the Web, \href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf#insdljsPkg}{eformman.pdf}).
+\item The \href{eformman.pdf#taborderPkg}{\pkg{taborder} package} supports the creation of the order
+    of tabbing between Acrobat annotations (fields, links, and comments).
+    See the part \textbf{Setting the Tab Order} in \href{eformman.pdf#taborderPkg}{eforms}
+    reference manual (on the Web, \href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf#taborderPkg}{eformman.pdf}) for more details.
+\item The \hyperref[part:dljslib]{\pkg{dljslib} package} is used as a library of
+    JavaScript functions.  Some types of question require special
+    processing. A JavaScript function written to process a
+    particular function can be stored in the library, then
+    retrieved as needed.
+
+%    See the documentation contained in the
+%    file \texttt{\href{\bUrl/dljslib.dtx}{dljslib.dtx}}.% and try
+%    the test file for this package,
+%    \texttt{\href{\bUrl/jslib_ex.tex}{jslib\_ex.tex}}.
+\item The \href{\bUrl/eqexam.html}{\pkg{eqexam} package} is a stand
+    alone {\LaTeX} package for creating exams, quizzes, homework
+    assignments. There are several options to re-purpose the source
+    document to produce a document with no solutions, solutions at end,
+    solutions after the questions, and solutions only. It can also be used
+    to create surveys, questionnaires, teacher evaluations, etc. The
+    package has an \texttt{email} mode and comes with a server-side script
+    that is used to send the data entered into the form fields to the
+    instructor.
+
+%    See my \textsf{\href{\bUrl/eqexam/tex_survey.pdf}{\TeX/\LaTeX{} Survey}} for
+%    a demo of this feature.
+\end{questions}
+\handpoint The \pkg{web}, \textsf{exerquiz}, \textsf{eforms}, and \textsf{insdljs}
+packages are stand alone packages, though they were designed to work
+together. The \textsf{dljslib} package is a companion package to
+\textsf{insdljs}. The \textsf{eqexam} package is stand alone, but uses
+some code from the \textsf{exerquiz} package; \textsf{exerquiz} need not
+be installed on your system to use \textsf{eqexam}, however.
+
+\begin{comment}
+To play it safe, you should use the most recent version of
+\pkg{hyperref} by Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Oberdiek. The
+\textsf{exerquiz} package makes extensive use of forms; Adobe
+Reader 3.0 with Forms 3.5 at least is needed, Adobe Reader 4.0 or
+above is preferred.
+\end{comment}
+
+\handpoint Here is an important point that should be emphasized early in this
+manual. \cAcroT{} only supports three ways of producing a
+\textsf{PDF} file: (1) the \textcolor{blue}{Adobe Acrobat
+Distiller} (version~5.0 or higher \emph{required}); (2)
+\textsf{pdftex} (including \textsf{luatex}); or (3) \textsf{dvipdfm}
+(including \textsf{dvipdfmx} and \textsf{xetex}). In the case of (1), you
+probably use \texttt{dvips} to create a postscript file before
+distilling. Some users have tried to use
+\textcolor{blue}{Ghostscript} to produce a \textsf{PDF}
+from \cAcroT; this will not work! (You will get the \textsf{PDF}
+file, but not much functionality.)
+
+Please contact me at \url{dpstory@acrotex.net} should you encounter
+any problems, or have suggestions to make.
+
+\redpoint See Section~\ref{s:start} on `\nhnameref{s:start}' below for
+instructions on how to get up and running.
+
+\section{Getting Started}\label{s:start}
+
+The distribution for the {\cAcroB} comes in a single ZIP file
+  \texttt{acrotex.zip}. This ZIP file contains program files
+      (\pkg{web}, \pkg{exerquiz}, \pkg{eforms}, \pkg{insdljs},
+      \pkg{dljslib}, \pkg{taborder}, and \texttt{aeb.js}), this manual, and the
+        \href{eformman.pdf}{\pkg{eforms}} reference manual
+        (\texttt{\href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}}).
+
+\subsection{Installing the Distribution}
+
+The following are the instructions for installing the \cAEB.
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item \textbf{Placement.} The ZIP file installs in a folder called
+    \texttt{acrotex}, so place the ZIP file in a directory in the search path
+    of your \LaTeX{} system where you want the \texttt{acrotex} folder to
+    reside. If you already have an \texttt{acrotex} folder, place the ZIP
+    files so that they unzip into this \texttt{acrotex} folder, \emph{unless
+    you are using MiK\TeX~2.8{} or later}.
+
+\item[] \textbf{MiK\TeX~2.8/2.9 Users.} {Mik\TeX}~2.8 (or later) provides
+    problems for {Acro\!\TeX} installations in that it is more particular
+    about where you install packages by hand. {MiK\TeX}~2.8, or later,
+    requires that you install the distribution in a local root TDS tree.
+    Review the {MiK\TeX} help page on this topic
+\begin{quote}
+%
+    \url{http://docs.miktex.org/manual/localadditions.html}
+%
+\end{quote}
+Create a new {MiK\TeX} root folder, in my case, I created
+\begin{quote}
+%
+    \verb!C:\Users\Public\Documents\My TeX Files!
+%
+\end{quote}
+Within the \texttt{My TeX Files} folder (you can name this folder anyway
+you wish), create a \texttt{tex} folder, within the \texttt{tex} folder,
+create a \texttt{latex} folder. Now copy the ZIP file to the
+\texttt{latex} folder, for example, copy them into
+\\[3pt]\hspace*{20pt}
+%
+    \verb!C:\Users\Public\Documents\My TeX Files\tex\latex!\\[3pt]
+%
+Finally, you need to register your new root folder with MiK\TeX. Open the
+{MiK\TeX} Options dialog box (accessible through the WinEdt toolbar, or
+through\\[\topsep]\hspace*{20pt}
+%
+\texttt{Start > All Programs > MiKTeX 2.8 > Maintenance > Settings}\\[3pt]\hspace*{20pt}
+\texttt{Start > All Programs > MiKTeX 2.9 > Maintenance > Settings}\\[\topsep]
+%
+Within this dialog box, select the \textbf{Roots} tab, then press
+\textbf{Add}, and browse for your newly create \texttt{My TeX Files}. When
+finished, the dialog should look like my own dialog box, as shown
+in \hyperref[fig:rootstab]{Figure~\ref*{fig:rootstab}}, page~\pageref*{fig:rootstab}.
+
+\begin{figure}[hbt]\centering
+\includegraphics[scale=.6]{figures/miktex_roots}
+\caption{Roots tab of MiK{\TeX} Options}\label{fig:rootstab}
+\end{figure}
+
+\item \textbf{Unzipping the Distribution.} Once you have found the
+location to unzip the ZIP file, unzip it!
+
+% C:\Users\Public\Documents\My TeX Files\tex\latex
+
+%\item Unpack the \textsf{exerquiz} package by latexing \texttt{exerquiz.ins}.
+%However, see \nameref{s:unpack} for important comments.
+
+\item \textbf{Unpacking the distribution.} The whole distribution can be
+unpacked by latexing \texttt{acrotex.ins}. (The other \texttt{*.ins} files
+are the installation files for the individual packages,
+\texttt{acrotex.ins} is the combined installation file.)
+
+\item[] {MiK\TeX} users should not forget to refresh the file name database.
+
+% \item Unpack \texttt{insdljs.dtx} by latexing \texttt{insdljs.ins}.
+
+\end{questions}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Installing \texttt{aeb.js}}
+
+
+The JavaScript file \texttt{aeb.js} is only needed if you use \textbf{Acrobat
+Pro 8.1} or later and \textbf{Adobe Distiller} as the PDF creator. Increased
+security in that version has made it necessary to install a folder JavaScript
+file. The JavaScript within \texttt{aeb.js} raises the ``trust'' of certain
+JavaScript methods used to import document JavaScript into the document just
+after the distillation process and the newly created PDF is opened in
+\textbf{Acrobat} for the first time. The installation of this file is not
+needed if you use \textsf{pdftex}, or \textsf{dvipdfm} (or any of their
+variations), or use a version of \textbf{Acrobat} prior to 8.1.
+
+The instructions for installing \texttt{aeb.js} are in the
+\texttt{\href{install_jsfiles.pdf}{install\_jsfiles.pdf}}, which resides in
+the \texttt{doc} folder of the \texttt{acrotex} installation. If you use
+\textbf{Distiller} as your PDF creator, please refer to that document.
+
+After you've installed the JavaScript files, as directed by the
+\texttt{\href{install_jsfiles.pdf}{install\_jsfiles.pdf}}, validate the
+installation of the JavaScript files by navigating to the \texttt{examples}
+subfolder and opening the file \texttt{test\_install.pdf} in \app{Acrobat};
+follow the directions contained on that one page document.
+
+
+\begin{comment}
+\paragraph*{Acrobat Pro~8.1 or later.}
+Start \textbf{Acrobat Pro~8.1}\footnote{The file will cause no harm if you
+install it in an earlier version of Acrobat, as early as version 7.} or
+later, and open the console window \textsf{Advanced \texttt> JavaScript
+\texttt> Debugger} (\texttt{Ctrl+J} for Windows or \texttt{Cmd+J} for Mac
+OS). Copy and paste the following code into the window.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+app.getPath("user","javascript");
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, with the mouse cursor on the line containing this script, press
+the \texttt{Ctrl+Enter} key. This will execute this JavaScript. This
+JavaScript method returns the path to where \texttt{aeb.js} should
+be placed. For example, on my system, the return string is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+/C/Documents and Settings/story/
+    Application Data/Adobe/Acrobat/8.0/JavaScripts
+\end{Verbatim}
+Follow the path to this folder. If the \texttt{JavaScripts} folder
+does not exist, create it.  Finally, copy \texttt{aeb.js}
+into this folder. The file is read each time Acrobat starts.
+
+\paragraph*{Acrobat Pro 10.1.1 for Windows only.} For this version of \textbf{Acrobat},
+things have tightened up even more. The user JavaScripts folder has moved to
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+%AppData%\Adobe\Acrobat\Privileged\10.0\JavaScripts
+\end{Verbatim}
+\exAeBBlogArticle{p=737}where \verb!%AppData%! is an environment variable defined by Acrobat. For details
+of how to install the folder JavaScripts in the new location, see my blog
+article \mlhref{http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?p=737}{Acrobat Security Changes in 10.1.1 and
+Acro\!\TeX}.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{Language Localizations}
+
+Should you wish to customize {\cAEB} to a language other than the ones
+already supported, open the file \texttt{template.def} and add in your
+language customizations.
+
+%After reading the manual you are then ready to write your own set
+%of tutorials, exams, exercises and quizzes.\enspace\dps
+
+
+\subsection{Sample Files and Articles}\label{s:samplefiles}
+
+Test, example, and demo files have been moved to the \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html}{Example Files for
+AeB} web page.\footnote{\url{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html}} References seen in this manual reside on this page; each
+sample file is a PDF with the source file attached to the PDF. Files on
+the \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html}{Example Files for AeB} web page are
+referenced with the icon \raisebox{-1.5pt}{\color{red}\zqacr b\hspace{12pt}} is the margin.
+
+\paragraph*{{Acro\!\TeX} Blog.} The basic examples from the distribution are also available
+from the {Acro\!\TeX| Blog, accessible from the page
+\href{http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?cat=89}{AeB Demo Files}.\footnote{\url{http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?cat=89}}
+There is another more recent collection of examples on
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}, these will be referenced in the margin using the icon %\exAeBBlogPDF
+\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}%
+    \raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}{{\zqacr b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}}\,, whereas
+\mbox{\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-1pt}\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}%
+\raisebox{.5pt}{\color{red}{\ding{045}}}} refers to a written blog
+article. In all cases, the source file and any dependent resources are attached to the
+PDF.
+
+%
+
+%\newcommand{\exAeBBlogArticle}[2][\urlAcroTeXBlog/]{\par\ifdim\lastskip>0pt\relax\vskip-\lastskip\fi
+%\vskip\medskipamount\noindent\makebox[0pt][r]{%
+%    \makebox[0pt][l]{\textcolor{blue}{\Pisymbol{webd}{254}}}%
+%    \raisebox{.5pt}{\color{red}\href{#1?#2}{\ding{045}\hspace{8.5pt}}}\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+
+%\exPDF{indexofex} There are numerous sample/demo files that illustrate various
+%features of the {\cAcroB}. View the \textsf{PDF} file
+%\texttt{\href{indexofex.pdf}{indexofex.pdf}}, which is an ``Index of
+%{\AcroT} Examples''. This document contains a list of all
+%examples, a short description of each, and links to the \textsf{PDF}
+%file and source file.
+
+\subsection{Package Requirements}
+
+If you use the Acrobat Distiller, as I do, to create a PDF document, the {\cAcroB}
+now requires the use of version 5.0 or later. I've given up on trying to support
+prior version of Acrobat.
+
+\newtopic In terms of \LaTeX, the following is a listing of package requirements:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item The \pkg{web} Package
+        \begin{itemize}
+            \item \texttt{color}: \texttt{color} is distributed with \LaTeX, but {\Web}
+            will use \texttt{xcolor}, if available, unless the
+            \texttt{noxcolor} global option is used.
+            \item \texttt{amssymb}: standard with \amslatex/
+            \item \texttt{hyperref}: available from CTAN, get newer version
+            \item \texttt{eso-pic} and \texttt{everyshi}: available from CTAN
+        \end{itemize}
+    \item The \textsf{Exerquiz} Package
+        \begin{itemize}
+            \item \texttt{color}: distributed with \LaTeX
+            \item \texttt{verbatim}: distributed with \LaTeX
+            \item \texttt{hyperref}: available from CTAN, get newer version
+            \item \texttt{insdljs}: distributed with \AcroT
+        \end{itemize}
+    \item The \textsf{insdljs} Package
+        \begin{itemize}
+            \item \texttt{hyperref}: available from CTAN, get newer version
+            \item \texttt{verbatim}: distributed with \LaTeX
+            \item \texttt{everyshi}: available from CTAN
+        \end{itemize}
+    \item The \textsf{dljslib} Package
+        \begin{itemize}
+            \item \texttt{insdljs}: distributed with \AcroT
+        \end{itemize}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX ing Your First File}
+
+The functionality of the \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz}
+environments depends on JavaScript code that is placed at the
+``document level'', to use Adobe's terminology.  The applications
+\textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{dvipdfm} offer direct support for
+writing to this document level. For those who use the
+\textcolor{blue}{Adobe Distiller}, things aren't quite so easy.
+
+In this section, we describe how to insert document level
+Java\-Scripts into a \textsf{PDF} file, prepared from a
+\LaTeX{} source that uses the \texttt{exerquiz} package. Even
+though the handling and insertion of document level JavaScript is
+done with the package \textsf{insdljs}, a little care must be
+taken, at least in the Distiller case, when building your
+{\PDF} document.
+
+%http://www.acrotex.net/blog/?p=803
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} Download \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website. The source file \texttt{webeqtst.tex} is attached to the PDF, save
+it to your local hard drive. \gob{\exPDF{webeqtst}}Open
+\texttt{webeqtst.tex} in your favorite text editor. The top lines read:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{For Non-\textsf{dvips} Users}
+
+Edit the third line by inserting your driver; the choices are
+\texttt{pdftex}, \texttt{dvipdfm}, \texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex}. For
+example, if you use \textsf{dvipdfm}, the lines should read:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[dvipdfm,tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For \textsf{dvipdfm}, you \LaTeX{} the document, then hit it with
+\textsf{dvipdfm}, and your ready to review your \textsf{PDF} file. The
+insertion of the document level JavaScript is automatic.
+
+For the \textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{xetex} applications, you simply
+compile with that application, and you have your nice \textsf{PDF} file, ready for
+review. The insertion of the document level JavaScript is automatic.
+
+\redpoint Both the \textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{xetex} applications are
+automatically detected so there is no need to specify them in the option list
+of \pkg{web}.\endredpoint
+
+
+\subsubsection{For Distiller Users}
+
+If you use the distiller, as I do, the sophisticated features of
+{\AcroB} require Acrobat 5.0 or higher.
+
+%I've discontinued my attempt at supporting Acrobat 4.0.
+
+Edit the optional parameters of the \pkg{web} package by inserting your driver; the choices are
+\texttt{dvips} and \texttt{dvipsone}.\footnote{The choice of driver can be placed in he \texttt{web.cfg} configuration
+file, in which
+case, you need not specify the driver. See \Nameref{sss:driver}.} For example, if you use \textsf{dvips}, the
+lines should read:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[dvips,tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begingroup\raggedright
+\noindent When you latex the source file, you create a DVI file and one or more FDF files.\footnote{The FDF files (for
+example, \texttt{exerquiz.fdf}) contain the document level JavaScript that needs to be imported into your document. They
+are imported when the newly
+created document is opened is Acrobat for the first time.}
+You then convert your \texttt{.dvi} to \texttt{.ps} using either
+\textsf{dvips} or \textsf{dvipsone}, and distill.
+\par\endgroup
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Important:} When you distill, \emph{save the
+\emph{\texttt{.pdf}} back to the same folder} in which your source file
+(\texttt{.tex}) resides as this is where the \texttt{.fdf} files
+reside too. Insertion of document level JavaScripts automatically
+takes place when you open your newly distilled document
+in the \textsf{Acrobat} application. (It is actually
+\textsf{Acrobat} that imports the scripts, not the
+\textsf{Distiller}.)
+
+\handpoint  When your document is opened in \textsf{Acrobat} for
+the first time, the Java\-Script contained in the \texttt{.fdf} files
+(for example, \texttt{exerquiz.fdf}) is imported into the document
+and is stored at the document level.
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{red}{Important:} \emph{Save your document}. When you
+save, the JavaScripts you just imported are also saved with the
+document. At this point you can move your \textsf{PDF} to another
+folder, or to the web. The document does not need the
+\texttt{.fdf} files any more.
+
+\begin{comment}
+\redpoint \textbf{For Distiller~4.0--4.05 Users.} Versions prior
+to~5.0 of the Acrobat product cannot import document level
+JavaScript contained in a \texttt{.fdf} file. The JavaScript needs
+to be inserted ``by hand''.
+
+The procedure is as follows: Modify the preamble and insert the \texttt{acrobativ}
+option for the \textsf{exerquiz} package:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[dvips,tight,designi]{web}
+\usepackage[acrobativ]{exerquiz}      %<- acrobativ option
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This suppresses all the JavaScript code generation that is used in the case
+of \textsf{pdftex}, \textsf{dvipdfm} or \textsf{Distiller~5.0$^+$}. After that
+change, \LaTeX{} the document, and convert
+the \texttt{.dvi} file to PostScript (using \texttt{dvips} or
+\texttt{dvipsone}), and distill. Now, open the new \textsf{PDF} file
+ in \textsf{Acrobat} (formerly known as
+\textsf{Exchange}). Click on \texttt{Document > Insert Pages},
+browse, and choose the \textsf{PDF} file \textsf{eq\_dljs.pdf},
+which comes with the \cAcroB. The file is now inserted. Next, click
+on \texttt{Document > Delete Pages} and delete the page you just
+inserted! \textcolor{red}{Important:} Do a ``\texttt{Save As}''; now you are done!
+
+The \textsf{PDF} file \textsf{eq\_dljs.pdf} contains all the
+standard JavaScript that goes in at the document level.  In all
+the other situations discussed above, you can modify the
+JavaScript from the preamble, for example, in the \textsf{exerquiz}
+source code we have
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\checkColor{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This command is expanded when the document level JavaScript is imported into the
+\textsf{PDF} file. If \cs{checkColor} has been redefined
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\checkColor{["RGB", 1, 0, 0]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+it is this definition that is used in the expansion. This
+convenience is lost for $\text{4.0} \le\text{\textsf{distiller}}\le\text{4.05}$.
+You can edit \textsf{eq\_dljs.pdf} and make whatever changes you
+please to the script, in terms of changing color.
+\end{comment}
+
+There are several ways the Distiller workflow can be accomplished:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%    \item \textbf{Through the {\LaTeX} Editor.} Some editors, WinEdt, in particular, have toolbars that can distill
+%    a PostScript file. (The default is to use  Ghostscript, you'll have to change to Distiller.) From WinEdt, you
+%    can latex, convert to Postscript, and distill with a few presses of toolbar buttons. Very smooth and easy.
+%    \item \textbf{Do it yourself.} Some systems, most notably on Mac OS, do not have a convenient way of distilling.
+%    A Mac user sent in the following steps.
+%    \begin{enumerate}
+%        \item Drop the \texttt{.ps} file on Distiller.
+%        \item Drag the resulting .pdf file out of the folder it was
+%            compiled in (for example, to the desktop)
+%        \item Open the \texttt{.pdf} file in Acrobat.
+%
+%        At this stage readers will be prompted for the location of the existing .fdf file for inclusion.
+%
+%        Now, for contrast, try this:
+%
+%        1. Drop the .ps file on Distiller.
+%        2. Open the .pdf file in Acrobat.
+%        3. Save the .pdf file.
+%        4. Drag the .pdf file out of the folder it was compiled in (for example, to the desktop)
+%        5. Open the .pdf file.
+%
+%        This will allow readers the opportunity to see what will happen if they fail to save the file before moving it
+to another location, like the web.
+%
+%
+%    \end{enumerate}
+%\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic For distiller users, the
+\href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/aeb_pro.html}{\AEB\ Pro package}
+has many exciting features, functionality requires the document author use
+Acrobat~7.0 or higher.
+
+
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{\medskipamount}}
+\part{The Web Package}\label{s:web}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The purpose of the \pkg{web} package is to create a page layout
+for documents meant for screen presentation, whether over the
+\textsf{WWW} or classroom/conference presentations, in
+\textsf{PDF}. Such documents are \emph{not \emph{(necessarily)}
+intended to be printed}; consequently, the page layout is, in some
+sense, optimized for screen viewing.
+
+\subsection{Overview}
+
+The \pkg{web} package redefines \cs{maketitle} and
+\cs{tableofcontents} in a more web friendly way; it colors the
+section headings, and inserts \cs{bullet}s ($\bullet$) at the
+\cs{subsubsection} level.  This, to my eyes, is very attractive.
+Additionally, certain navigation devices (a navigation bar and
+some direction icons) are included in the package.
+
+There are options for a small collection of drivers:
+\texttt{dvipsone}, \texttt{dvips}. \texttt{dvipdfm} and \texttt{pdftex}.  The language
+option redefines certain language dependent elements of the package
+to other languages. Currently, the following options are supported:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\texttt{dutch}   & \texttt{french} & \texttt{german}\\
+\texttt{italian} & \texttt{norsk}  & \texttt{russian}\\
+\texttt{spanish} & \texttt{dansk}  & \texttt{polish}\\
+\texttt{finnish} & \texttt{czech}  & \texttt{catalan}\\
+\texttt{brazil}  & \texttt{turkish}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+
+There is even an option for reformatting the \texttt{web}
+style to a print format!
+
+The capabilities of the \pkg{web} package and its options are
+discussed below. Any comments and suggested improvements (new
+features) would be greatly appreciated.
+
+\subsection{Package Requirements}
+
+The \pkg{web} package was designed for screen presentations
+tutorials, such as classroom or conference lectures, short technical
+articles, etc.; consequently, the \texttt{article} class of \LaTeX{}
+seems to be sufficient for these purposes.  Though you can use
+\pkg{web} with any of the standard classes that define the
+\cs{section}, \cs{subsection} and \cs{subsubsection} commands, the
+package is really meant to be used with the \texttt{article}
+class.  It is \textbf{strongly} suggested!
+
+The package heavily depends on Sebastian Rahtz' \pkg{hyperref}
+package (now maintained and developed by Heiko Oberdiek). The
+\pkg{web} package was developed using version 6.56 of
+\pkg{hyperref}. Using prior versions of \pkg{hyperref}
+\emph{may} lead to successful compilation, no guarantees offered.
+It is best to work with the most recent version of
+\pkg{hyperref}.
+
+The \textsf{color} and \textsf{amssymb} packages are also
+required. The former is for obvious reasons, the later is to
+provide certain navigation symbols when the \texttt{navibar}
+option is invoked.
+
+Finally, to create quality PDF documents, type~1 fonts \emph{must}
+be used. Fortunately, type~1 fonts in the Computer Modern font set
+are freely available, and come with all the major
+freeware, shareware and commercial \TeX{} systems. If you haven't
+done so already, learn how to use the type~1 fonts.
+
+In this regard, I have written an article that may be of interest
+to you entitled ``\textit{Using \LaTeX{} to Create Quality PDF Documents
+for the WWW}'', see reference \cite{article:Story:LaTeX}.
+
+\section{Basic Package Options}
+
+To use the \pkg{web} package, insert into the preamble of
+your document the following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(other_options)]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Replace \meta{other\_options} with any of the options recognized by
+\pkg{web}; see \hyperref[s:ListofOpts]{Section~\ref*{s:ListofOpts}}
+for a complete list of options. The first and optional argument
+\meta{driver} above defines the driver to be used; for
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[dvips]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Driver options.}\label{para:webdrivers} Below is a list of \meta{driver} options
+for the \pkg{web} package.
+\bgroup\def\rf#1{{\normalfont#1}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+dvips dvipsone textures  % !rf((DVI)-to-(PS))
+pdftex                   % !rf(includes the !app(lualatex) application)
+dvipdfm dvipdfmx xetex   % !rf((DVI)-to-(PDF))
+\end{Verbatim}
+\egroup\noindent
+Currently, the \pkg{web} package supports five drivers:
+\texttt{dvipsone}, the dvi-to-ps converter by \Y&Y, Inc.; \texttt{dvips},
+the freeware dvi-to-ps converter; \texttt{pdftex}, the
+\texttt{tex}-to-\texttt{pdf} application; \texttt{dvipdfm},
+\texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex} the \texttt{dvi}-to-\texttt{pdf}
+applications by Mark Wicks and subsequent
+developers;\footnote{\url{http://odo.kettering.edu/dvipdfm/}}${}^{\text{\scriptsize,}}$\footnote{\url{http://scripts.sil.org/xetex}}
+and the
+commercial {\TeX} system for the Mac, \texttt{textures} and
+\href{http://www.uoregon.edu/~koch/texshop/texshop.html}{{\TeX}shop}.
+
+\handpoint\textbf{Automatic driver detection.} {\AEB} now  has automatic driver detection for
+\textsf{pdftex} (including \textsf{luatex}) and \textsf{xetex}. Specification of these options
+is no longer needed.
+
+\newtopic {\AEB} is better at passing the driver between its components.
+When the driver is specified in the \pkg{web} package, the driver is passed to
+its components (\textsf{exerquiz}, \textsf{eforms}, \textsf{insdljs}). Similarly, if \pkg{web} is not used,
+exerquiz passes the driver specified to \textsf{eforms} and \textsf{insdljs}. Finally, \textsf{eforms} passes the driver
+specified to \textsf{insdljs}.
+
+\paragraph*{A note on \app{xetex}.}
+The \app{xetex} application may be set to strip out named destinations that
+are not referenced within the document as a target of a `hard-wired' actions.
+\app{AeB} (in particular, \pkg{exerquiz}) sets a lot of destinations (or
+targets) but, in many instances, `dynamic' links are employed using the
+JavaScript method \texttt{\textsl{Doc}.gotoNamedDest(\anglemeta{target})}. In
+such instances, \app{xetex} may strip out these targets; the link or button
+action may not perform the jump to the destination because the destination
+does not exist. If this becomes an issue for your \app{xetex} installation,
+the \textbf{\app{Dvipdfmx} Compatibility Flags} need to be modified. Search
+for the configuration file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg}, open the file. Scroll down
+to the line `\texttt{\%C  0x0000}', beneath it insert `\texttt{C  0x0010}',
+save and close the file.\footnote{MiK\TeX{} discourages the direct editing of
+the file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg}, instead, on the command-line prompt type and
+execute `\texttt{initexmf -{}-edit-config-file dvipdfmx}' enabling you to
+edit a local version of the configuration file as described above;
+just enter the line `\texttt{C  0x0010}', save and close.} The documentation
+for this bit field is just above the referenced line and an explanation of
+the `\texttt{C 0x0010}' setting is given.
+
+\redpoint The package has been tested using
+\verb+\documentclass{article}+ and it is \emph{strongly}
+recommended that this class be used; however, {\Web} does support the
+\texttt{book} class as well.\endredpoint
+
+%\begin{comment}
+%
+%\redpoint The default paper setting for \textsf{dvips} is
+%\texttt{A4}, but the cropping parameters assumes \texttt{letter}
+%paper size.  To get the cropping of the page correct, there are
+%several procedures you can follow.
+%
+%\begin{questions}
+%\item  Use the command line switch \texttt{-t letter}.
+%For example,
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%dvips.exe -j0 -Pcm -Pams -t letter -o <foo>.ps <foo>.dvi
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\item Change the default paper setting of \textsf{dvips} to
+%\texttt{letter} by placing the paper size for \texttt{letter}
+%first in the \texttt{config.ps} file of \textsf{dvips}:
+%
+%\smallskip
+%\leavevmode\begin{minipage}{.45\linewidth}
+%Change these lines \dots
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%@ A4size 210mm 297mm
+%@+ %%PaperSize: A4
+%
+%@ letterSize 8.5in 11in
+%
+%@ letter 8.5in 11in
+%@+ %%BeginPaperSize: Letter
+%@+ letter
+%@+ %%EndPaperSize
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\end{minipage}
+%\hfil
+%\begin{minipage}{.45\linewidth}
+%\dots to these.
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%@ letter 8.5in 11in
+%@+ %%BeginPaperSize: Letter
+%@+ letter
+%@+ %%EndPaperSize
+%
+%@ A4size 210mm 297mm
+%@+ %%PaperSize: A4
+%
+%@ letterSize 8.5in 11in
+%
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\end{minipage}
+%
+%\end{questions}
+%
+% If you find changing the command line inconvenient, you can
+%include the command
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%   \hypersetup{pdfpagescrop=53 486 389 754}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%in the preamble of your document.
+%
+%\end{comment}
+
+%\makeatletter\hy@bookmarksnumberedfalse\makeatother
+%\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{}{\textbullet\space}Setting the Driver Option}
+%\makeatletter\hy@bookmarksnumberedtrue\makeatother
+
+\subsection{Setting the Driver Option}\label{sss:driver}
+
+You can set your driver option in one of three ways:
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item Pass as a local option: %\\ %[3pt]
+        \cs{usepackage[\meta{driver}]\darg{web}}
+  \item Pass as a global option: %\\ %[3pt]
+        \cs{documentclass[\meta{driver}]\darg{article}}
+  \item Create the file \texttt{web.cfg} with the single command
+       in it:%\\ %[3pt]
+\begin{quote}
+       \cs{ExecuteOptions\darg{\meta{driver}}}
+\end{quote}
+       Place the file \texttt{web.cfg} in any folder where \LaTeX\
+       looks for input files.  Then, you need only type
+       \verb+\usepackage{web}+.
+\end{itemize}
+Where \meta{driver} is any of the following options listed in
+the paragraph \textbf{\nameref{para:webdrivers}} on page~\pageref{para:webdrivers}.
+
+The macros of the \pkg{web} package have been extensively
+tested using the \Y&Y\ \TeX\ System for the
+\texttt{dvipsone} option and a MiK\TeX\ System
+(\url{www.miktex.org}) for the \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex} (which includes lua(la)tex),
+\texttt{dvipdfm}, \texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex}
+
+%\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{pdftex}}{pdftex} Option}
+%
+%
+%The \texttt{pdftex} option requires \pkg{hyperref} version 6.60
+%or greater. (The most recent version is preferred.) The
+%\pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages will probably run
+%correctly with slightly earlier versions, but you may see
+%`underfull hbox' error messages.
+%
+%The \pkg{web} package uses the AMS Font set for the
+%black triangle that appears in the navigation bar, see
+%\hyperref[ss:naviaids]{Section~\ref*{ss:naviaids}}.
+%
+%The AMS Font sets comes with Mik\TeX, if you don't have
+%\textsf{pdftex} configured the use them, here are some
+%instructions that work for the Mik\TeX{} system.
+%\begin{questions}
+%\item Copy the file \texttt{amsfonts.map} from the folder
+%\texttt{texmf/dvips/ams} to the folder \texttt{texmf/pdftex/base}.
+%(Mik\TeX{} may have restructured the directory tree since the time
+%of this documentation.)
+%\item Edit the file \texttt{pdftex.cfg} to include the lines:
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%map  +amsfonts.map     % to get AMSFonts
+%map   standard.map     % to get dings
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%
+%\item The  \texttt{pdftex.cfg} file now looks like this:
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%output_format 1
+%compress_level 9
+%decimal_digits 2
+%page_width 210mm
+%page_height 297mm
+%horigin 1in            % <-- important, see 4.
+%vorigin 1in            % <-- important, see 4.
+%map standard.map
+%map +cm.map
+%map +amsfonts.map
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\item Take note of the settings of \texttt{horigin} and
+%\texttt{vorigin}. Set these two to 1\,in\@.  This will align the
+%text on the page where the cropping numbers expects the text to
+%be; the result will be a properly cropped page.
+%\end{questions}
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{tight} Option}\label{sss:webtight}
+
+In an effort to compact more material per page, I've introduced a
+\texttt{tight} option.  When this option is used, many of the list
+parameters are redefined so that there is not so much space around these
+environments, and between items.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),tight,!meta(other_options)]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{usesf} Option}\label{usesf}
+
+For presentations, some people like a sans serif font. Using this option
+make san serif the default font style.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{draft} Option}\label{draft}
+
+When you take this option, graphic overlays are not allowed.  This
+is useful when you rely heavily on graphic overlays, but during the
+development phase, don't need to read and re-read your overlays. The
+defined background colors will be used instead. Remove this option
+to build the final version of your document.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{nobullets} Option}\label{nobullets}
+
+Traditionally, the subsubsections have been denoted by a bullet, by
+using this option, you can force the use of numbers for the
+subsubsections, This option automatically executes the
+\texttt{latextoc} option.
+
+There is another option \texttt{forceSubSubNumbers}, which does the same thing
+as nobullets. This option is included for compatibility with the {\AcroT}
+Presentation Bundle (\textsf{APB}).
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{unicode} Option}\label{web:unicode}
+
+This option is passed to \pkg{hyperref}, and is placed in {\Web} as a
+convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded, \textsf{eforms} (and
+\textsf{exerquiz}) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional argument
+of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual}
+for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{useui} Option}\label{web:useui}
+
+This option is passed to \textsf{eforms}, and is placed in {\Web} as
+a convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+\textsf{eforms} loads the \textsf{xkeyval} package, and key-value pairs are
+defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{xhyperref} Option}\label{web:xhyperref}
+
+The \pkg{web} package requires \pkg{hyperref} and calls it with a particular
+set of options, given below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\RequirePackage[%
+    !ameta(driver),
+    bookmarks,bookmarksnumbered,bookmarksopen,%
+    colorlinks,\aeb@useunicode,linkcolor=webgreen,%
+    filecolor=webbrown,citecolor=webgreen,%
+    urlcolor=webbrown,pagebackref,pdfpagemode=UseNone,%
+    pdfstartview=Fit,pdfpagelayout=SinglePage,%
+    !ameta(addtoHyOpts)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+These option choices may be overridden using the \opt{addtoHyOpts} or
+\opt{addtoHyOpts*} option, described in Section~\ref*{web:addtoHyOpts} below.
+
+Now, if this \opt{xhyperref} option is used, the \pkg{hyperref} package is
+\emph{not automatically} included by the \pkg{web} package. It is assumed
+that \pkg{hyperref} will be included in the document prior to \pkg{web}. Use
+the \opt{xhyperref} option if you want to completely revamp the look of a
+\pkg{web} document by custom choices of the \pkg{hyperref} options.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(Hy-options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[xhyperref,!ameta(web-options)]{web}
+...
+\end{Verbatim}
+This avoids possible ``option clashes'' when your choices conflict with those of \pkg{web}.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{addtoHyOpts} and \texttt{addtoHyOpts*} Options}\label{web:addtoHyOpts}
+
+To maximize the convenience of passing options to \pkg{hyperref}, the \pkg{web} package
+provides the \opt{addtoHyOpts} option.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\usepackage[\meta{web-options},addtoHyOpts=\darg{\meta{Hy-options}}]\darg{web}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts={!meta(Hy-options)}]{web}
+...
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb The value of \opt{addtoHyOpts} is any combination of key-values that
+\pkg{hyperref} offers as package options. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts={pdfencoding=auto}]{web}
+...
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{pdfencoding=auto} is useful for authors writing in the latin1 character set. The
+value of \texttt{pdfencoding}, by the way, overrides the \opt{unicode} option.
+
+There is another option that passes its value to the \cs{hypersetup} command.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\usepackage[\meta{web-options},addtoHyOpts*=\darg{\meta{Hy-options}}]\darg{web}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts*={!meta(Hy-options)}]{web}
+...
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb The value of \opt{addtoHyOpts*} is any combination of key-values that
+\pkg{hyperref} offers as package options. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!meta(web-options),addtoHyOpts={pdfencoding=auto}]{web}
+...
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+The \opt{addtoHyOpts} adds its value to the option list of \pkg{hyperref}, as
+built by \pkg{web}, whereas \opt{addtoHyOpts*} passes its value to the
+\cs{hypersetup} command. Both options \opt{addtoHyOpts} and
+\opt{addtoHyOpts*} may appear in the option list of \pkg{web} at the same
+time.
+
+\section{Setting Screen Size}\label{s:setscreensize}
+
+Beginning with version 2.0, the screen size can be set by the
+author. There are two ways to do this: (1) use the macros
+\cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} (These are the same
+macros, slightly redefined, for setting the screen size used by
+Radhakrishnan in his fine screen package \textsf{pdfscreen}.); or (2) use
+a screen design option. The next two sections address each of
+these in turn.
+
+\subsection{Custom Design}\label{cusDesign}
+
+There are six dimensions that need to be specified. As with
+\textsf{pdfscreen},  the two commands \cs{screensize} and
+\cs{margins} are used for doing so.
+
+The command \cs{screensize} takes two length parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\screensize{!ameta(height)}{!ameta(width)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The \ameta{width} and \ameta{height} parameters are the desired
+screen size of the page. The screen version of this manual uses
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\screensize{3.72in}{4.67in}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The other command, \cs{margins}, which determines the desired
+margins, takes four length parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\margins[!ameta(panel_width)]{!ameta(left)}{!ameta(right)}{!ameta(top)}{!ameta(bottom)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic The values of \cs{textheight} and \cs{textwidth} are computed
+based on the screen size and the margins. The margin settings for
+this document are given below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\margins{.25in}{.25in}{30pt}{.25in}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic The optional first parameter \ameta{panel\_width} is used to set
+the width of the panel, if there is one.  The default is \texttt{1in}.
+
+\begin{redpoint}\space\ignorespaces
+An important comment about the third parameter
+\ameta{top} is the following: as with \textsf{pdfscreen}, we put
+\cs{@Topmargin=\ameta{top}}.  The running header fits within the top
+margin (this varies from standard \LaTeX{} practice).  The
+\pkg{web} package dimension \cs{web@Topmargin} is the distance
+from the top of the screen down to the top of the running header. Thus,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\@Topmargin = \web@Topmargin + \headheight + \headsep
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Also, \cs{web@Topmargin} can be used to adjust the
+positioning of a running header, which is specified in the
+\cs{margins} command. The default value of \cs{headheight} is
+\texttt{8pt}, so the value of \cs{headsep} is determined by the
+above equation. See the \textsf{web.dtx} file for more details.
+\end{redpoint}
+
+\subsection{Screen Design Options}\label{sss:designoptions}
+
+For your convenience, I've included nine options, \texttt{designi},
+\texttt{designii},\dots \texttt{designix}.  The first one roughly
+corresponds to the original screen dimensions of \pkg{web}. The
+dimensions of these designs options are\medskip
+\begingroup\par\noindent\hfuzz=3pt\small
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{>{\ttfamily}l>{\ttfamily}lc|>{\ttfamily}l>{\ttfamily}lc}
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{Design Option}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{width $\times$ height}&\multicolumn{1}{c|}{AR}&%
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{Design Option}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{width $\times$ height}&\multicolumn{1}{c}{AR}\\\hline
+designi &  {4.67in} $\times$ {3.736in}&5:4&designv &{6in} $\times$ {4.5in}&4:3\\
+designii &{5in} $\times$ {4.5in}&10:9&designvi &{4.67in} $\times$ {4.17in}&28:25\\
+designiii &{6in} $\times$ {5in}&6:5&designvii &{10in} $\times$ {7.5in}&4:3\\
+designiv &{5in} $\times$ {4in}&5:4&designviii&{6.67in} $\times$ {3.75in}&16:9\\
+&&&designix&3.75in $\times$ 6in&16:10
+\end{tabular*}
+\endgroup
+\newtopic Most of these design values were chosen for their visual appeal, or for some particular need.
+The designs \texttt{designv} and \texttt{designvii} have an aspect ratio of 4:3, this is a standard for video displays,
+while \texttt{designviii} is another one with a standard aspect ratio for wide screen computer monitors.
+
+\newtopic To select a particular design for your document, simply include its name amongst the option
+list for the \pkg{web} package; for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[designv]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+creates a document with dimensions of \texttt{designv},  $6\,\text{in} \times 4.5\,\text{in}$.
+
+\redpoint When you specify a screen design, the macros
+\cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} are redefined to gobble up
+their parameters. To define a custom screen size, therefore, do
+not specify a screen design option for \pkg{web}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{setScreensizeFromGraphic}}{\CMD{setScreensizeFromGraphic}}}\label{setScreensizeFromGraphic}
+
+If a design is \emph{not specified} in the option list of \Web, you
+can use a graphic to set the screen size with
+\Com{setScreensizeFromGraphic}. The command takes two parameters
+that correspond to the parameters of \cs{includegraphics}, and are
+just passed to \cs{includegraphics}. This is useful if you have a
+graphic to be used for a template but cannot be deformed to fit one
+of the standard designs. The solution is to create a screen size
+matching the graphic, then using that graphic as a template. Example
+usage,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\margins{1in}{1in}{24pt}{.25in}
+\setScreensizeFromGraphic{acro_30}
+\template{acro_30}
+\end{Verbatim}
+It may become necessary with some graphics to use the
+\texttt{hiresbb} option for the command \cs{includegraphics}, both in
+\cs{setScreensizeFromGraphic} and \cs{template} like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\margins{1in}{1in}{24pt}{.25in}
+\setScreensizeFromGraphic[hiresbb]{acro_30}
+\template[hiresbb]{acro_30}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic This command should not be used with a panel option for the text screen
+size will be adjusted for the panel, and the graphic will be
+re-scaled appropriately.
+
+\subsection{Using \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{addtoWebHeight} and \protect\cs{addtoWebWidth}}
+{\CMD{addtoWebHeight} and \CMD{addtoWebWidth}}}
+
+There may be an occasion when you've chosen your design dimensions
+(\texttt{designi}, \texttt{designii}, etc.), but you have determined the
+dimensions provided by the selected design are not quite \emph{wide} or \emph{high} enough.
+You can make adjustments to the width and height without explicitly specifying
+the commands \cs{margins} and \cs{screensize} by using \cs{addtoWebHeight} and/or
+\cs{addtoWebWidth}. The syntax for each is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\addtoWebHeight{!ameta(length)}
+\addtoWebWidth{!ameta(length)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+These two can only be executed in the preamble, and they add (or subtract)
+the specified \ameta{length} to the height and width of the page. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\addtoWebHeight{1in}
+\end{Verbatim}
+adds one inch to the height of the page. This
+command is roughly equivalent to executing,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\screensize{!ameta(current_height)+1in}{!ameta(current_width)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Using a panel option}
+
+When the \texttt{rightpanel} or \texttt{leftpanel} option is used
+the page is divided into the text screen and a panel (either on the
+left or right of the page).  The default width of the panel is 1in
+and the minimum width of the panel is 1in.
+
+When designing the screen using \cs{screensize} and \cs{margins},
+the panel width of the panel can be set by the first optional
+parameter of \cs{screensize}, as described in
+section~\ref{cusDesign}, page~\pageref*{cusDesign}. When using one
+of the standard design options, the panel width is set to the
+default value of 1in. To set the panel width to another value, use
+\cs{panelwidth} in the preamble. \verb!\panelwidth{1.25in}! sets the
+panel width to 1.25 inches.
+
+If you set the panel width to a length less than the minimal panel
+width, the minimal panel width (1in) will be used. You can reset the
+minimal panel width using \Com{minPanelWidth}. See
+section~\ref{panelscreentemplate},
+page~\pageref*{panelscreentemplate}, for more details on this command.
+
+\section{Hyperref Options}
+
+The \pkg{web} package loads \pkg{hyperref} into the document
+and sets some selected options of that package;  therefore,
+including the \pkg{hyperref} package is not needed in the
+preamble of your own document.
+
+Any additional \pkg{hyperref} options that are needed can be
+introduced into the package using \pkg{hyperref}'s
+\cs{hypersetup} macro, for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(options)]{web}
+% Declare additional hyperref options using \hypersetup
+\hypersetup{pdfpagemode=UseNone,bookmarksopen=false}
+\end{Verbatim}
+An alternate approach is to use the \opt{addtoHyOpts} option of \pkg{web}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(options),addtoHyOpts={pdfpagemode=UseNone,
+    bookmarksopen=false}]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \opt{addtoHyOpts*} option of \pkg{web} may also be used:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[!ameta(options),addtoHyOpts*={pdfpagemode=UseNone,
+    bookmarksopen=false}]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \opt{addtoHyOpts} option adds its value to the \pkg{hyperref} option of
+as built by \pkg{web}, whereas, \opt{addtoHyOpts*} passes its value to the
+argument of a \cs{hypersetup} command.
+
+
+\noindent Documentation of the options that \pkg{hyperref}
+recognizes can be had by either \LaTeX ing the file
+\texttt{hyperref.dtx}, or by getting a copy of the \textsl{The
+\LaTeX\ Web Companion} \cite{book:Goossens3} by Michel Goossens,
+{\textsl{et al}}.
+
+\redpoint The \pkg{web} option \texttt{xhyperref} bypasses the inclusion
+of the \pkg{hyperref} package. It is expected that the document author inputs
+\pkg{hyperref} prior to \pkg{web}.
+
+\section{Running Headers and Footers}
+
+There are convenience commands setting  the running headers and
+footers; they are \cs{lheader}, \cs{cheader}, \cs{rheader},
+\cs{lfooter}, \cs{cfooter}, and \cs{rfooter}. Each of these takes a
+single argument, which is the text for the header or footer in the
+position desired. In the  standard setup for {\Web}, \cs{lheader},
+\cs{rheader} and \cs{cfooter} are used for, respectively, the
+current section title, the current page and the navigation bar (if
+activated).
+
+You can set some basic formatting styles for the header and footer using
+\Com{header\-format} and \cs{footerformat}. For example, executing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\headerformat{\bfseries\color{red}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+causes the running header to appear in bold red color.
+
+There are a couple of hooks for the header and footers, these are
+\Com{webheadwrapper} and \Com{webfootwrapper}. These commands can be
+use to stylize the entire header or footer. They can be defined to have
+one argument. The argument is the content of the header or footer. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\headerformat{\bfseries\color{red}}
+\footerformat{\bfseries\color{red}}
+\renewcommand{\webheadwrapper}[1]{\fcolorbox{red}{yellow}{%
+    \makebox[\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule][s]{#1}}}
+\renewcommand{\webfootwrapper}[1]{\fcolorbox{red}{yellow}{%
+    \makebox[\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule][s]{#1}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Lines~(1) and~(2) makes declares bold font for the header and footer.
+Lines~(3) and~(4) defines a \cs{fcolorbox} with hideous red and yellow colors;
+lines~(5) and~(6). Note that adjustment in the width to account for the \cs{fcolorbox}
+rule width and the space surrounding the text in the \cs{fcolorbox}.
+
+\newtopic On occasion you may want to have no running headers at all, this can
+be accomplished by saying in the preamble, or anywhere,
+\verb!\lheader{}!, \verb!\cheader{}!, and/or \verb!\rheader{}!.
+Another solution is to use the commands \cs{clearHeaders} and
+\cs{restoreHeaders}. The command \cs{clearHeaders} first saves the current
+definitions of the headers then sets the headers to the empty
+header. The command \cs{restoreHeaders} restores the definitions that were in
+effect when the last \cs{clearHeaders} was executed.
+
+\newtopic\textbf{No running headers on section pages.}
+One user did not like a running header that includes a section title
+on the same page where the section begins. The default behavior is
+to create a running header where the section title does not appear
+in the header on the same page as the section is inserted, on
+subsequent pages, the section head appears, I hope.
+
+The two commands control this behavior, the default is \emph{to not
+show} the section heading (\cs{lheader}) on the page where the
+section begins. Use \Com{headersOnSectionPage} to place headers on
+the same page as the beginning of a section. You can also change back to
+the default behavior using \Com{noHeadersOnSectionPage} (the default).
+
+
+\section{The Title Page and TOC}
+
+The title page is constructed from the values of the macros:
+\cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{uni\-ver\-sity}, \cs{email}, and
+\cs{version}.  The values of some of the macros \cs{title} and
+\cs{author} are also transferred to the PDFDocInfo section of the
+Acrobat/Adobe Reader. (Press \texttt{Ctrl+D} while viewing a \PDF{} document
+to see this information.)
+
+Additionally, the values of \cs{subject} and \cs{keywords}---which
+do not appear on the title page---are inserted into the PDFDocInfo
+section.
+
+\newtopic The colors of the text corresponding to \cs{title}, \cs{author} and \cs{university} on the title
+page can be set by using \cs{titleColor}, \cs{authorColor} and \cs{universityColor}.
+Each takes a single argument, a named color. The defaults are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\universityColor{blue}
+\titleColor{black}
+\authorColor{black}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For more information on defining named \textsf{colors}, see the documentation
+of the color or \textsf{xcolor} packages. A simple example would be
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\definecolor{MyOwnColor}{rgb}{0.945,0.87,0.518}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{extended} option is used, all colors can be
+specified with \cs{selectColors}, see
+\Nameref{designColor}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{Basic Information Commands}\label{ss:BIM}
+
+The basic information commands allows you a convenient way to enter the title and author
+of the document, as well as other information. To enter this basic information,
+just fill in the values of all the basic macros briefly described below.
+
+For example, the following is a copy of the title information for this document:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \title,\author,\subject,\keywords are sent to DocInfo
+\title{The Web and Exerquiz Packages Manual of Usage}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{How to create on-line exercises and quizzes}
+\keywords{LaTeX,hyperref,PDF,exercises,quizzes}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% \university,\email,\version are used only on title page
+\university{Northwest Florida State College\\
+   Department of Mathematics}
+\email{dpstory@acrotex.net}
+\version{1.0}
+\copyrightyears{1999-2010}
+\end{Verbatim}
+You can optionally specify the \cs{date}. The web packages uses the value of \cs{date}
+at the bottom of the title page. There is says, ``Last Revision Date: \ameta{date}''. If
+the \cs{date} command is not used, the current date is used.
+
+\redpoint The \cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{subject}, \cs{keywords}
+are a convenient way of entering information in the Document
+Information fields---see
+\begin{equation*}
+\texttt{File > Document Info > General... (Ctrl+D)}
+\end{equation*}
+in the Acrobat/Adobe Reader.\endredpoint
+
+\newtopic\indent If \cs{title} contains control sequences that do not expand to the
+Standard PDFDocEncoding character set, Distiller will be thrown
+into a tailspin; \pkg{hyperref} defines the \cs{texorpdfstring}
+macro\footnote{The code for handling PDFDocEncoding for
+\pkg{hyperref} is due to Heiko Oberdiek} to avoid these kinds
+of problems.  For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\title{The \texorpdfstring{$e^x$}{EXP} Function}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The first argument is the one that is typeset (on the title page,
+the title of the document will be `The $e^x$ Function'); the
+second argument is the one that is sent to the title field of
+DocInfo in the Adobe Reader (and will read `The EXP Function').
+
+Of all the \nameref{ss:BIM}, as listed on page~\pageref*{ss:BIM},
+use \cs{texorpdfstring} only with the \cs{title} and \cs{author};
+these are the only two that are both typeset and placed in the
+DocInfo field of the Adobe Reader.
+
+\redpoint \cs{texorpdfstring} works for \cs{section},
+\cs{subsection}, etc\@. as well.\par\medskip
+
+\newtopic Having entered the values of the basic information
+commands, you can now type the standard sort of \LaTeX\ commands of
+\cs{maketitle} and \cs{tableofcontents}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+...
+...
+\end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803}\gob{\exPDF{webeqtst}} Use the source file for
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} as a prototype or
+template for your own document.
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{extended} option is in effect, the basic document
+information just described can be entered through the
+\cs{DeclareDocInfo} command, see page~\pageref{docinfo}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{Title Page Structure}
+
+The title page is divided into three parts: top, middle and bottom.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Title Top:} The content of the top is determined by the \Com{top\-Titl\-ePage}
+command. (This command can be redefined, but it is not recommended.) The
+\cs{topTitlePage} command expands to three elements: the university (affiliation), the title,
+and the author(s), in that order vertically. These are the values of the commands \cs{university},
+\cs{title} and \cs{author} discussed in the previous section.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Middle:} The \Com{optionalPageMatter} command
+is used to enter content into this part of the title page. This
+middle part is optional; if \cs{optionalPageMatter} does
+not appear in the preamble, this part of the title page is
+empty. Here is an example of usage:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\optionalPageMatter{%
+    \begin{center}
+    \fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{
+    \begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+    \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Abstract:}} This
+    file attempts to teach you how to create a simple
+    \LaTeX\ document.
+    \end{minipage}}
+    \end{center}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above definition will create the framed box seen below.
+
+    \begin{center}
+    \fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{
+    \begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+    \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Abstract:}} This file
+    attempts to teach you how to create a simple \LaTeX\ document.
+    \end{minipage}}
+    \end{center}
+
+The \cs{optionalPageMatter} appears just below the \cs{webauthor}
+and above the directory listing if there is any.
+
+The syntax \cs{optionalPageMatter} is\dots
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\cs{optionalPageMatter[\ameta{vspace}]\darg{\ameta{content}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\optionalPageMatter[!ameta(vspace)]{!ameta(content)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb where \ameta{content} content to be displayed in middle title region, and
+\texttt{[\ameta{vspace}]} consists of one (or more) \cs{vspace} commands. The default
+is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\minimumskip\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The command \cs{minimumskip} expands to \cs{medskip}.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Bottom:} Bottom of the title page is controlled
+by the contents of the command \cs{titlepageTrailer} and consists of
+the values of the commands \cs{email}, \cs{version}, \texttt{copyrightyears}
+Below is a rough figure depicting the location of the elements found
+in the title page trailer.
+
+{\setlength{\tabcolsep}{0pt}
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lr}
+\anglemeta{copyright notice}  &  \cs{thewebemail}\\
+\anglemeta{revision}     &  \cs{webversion}
+\end{tabular*}}
+\newtopic The definition of these elements are as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\maketitle@trailer@ul{\web@copyright\ \web@copyright@symbol\
+    \webcopyrightyears}
+\def\maketitle@trailer@ll{\web@revision\ \@date}
+\def\maketitle@trailer@ur{\thewebemail}
+\def\maketitle@trailer@lr{\webversion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{description}
+%
+% ?? The ul corner not accurate, need to address this.
+%
+\item The \texttt{ul} corner: The macro \cs{web@copyright} expands to `Copyright', it can be redefined, or removed by
+    executing \Com{nocopyright}. \cs{webcopyrightyears} expands to the argument of \cs{copyrightyears}.
+
+%the final element in the upper left is the email address.
+%To make everything go away except for the email address, executed \Com{nocopyrightNotice}.
+
+\item The \texttt{ll} corner: The \anglemeta{revision} expands to
+\cs{web@revision} followed by \cs{@date}. The \cs{web@revision} expands to
+``Last Revision Date:'', and can be changed by using \cs{revisionLabel}
+(for example \verb!\revisionLabel{Published:}!). The \cs{@date} expands to
+the argument of the \cs{date} command, or if this was  not used, expands
+to the current date.
+
+\item The \texttt{ur} corner: The upper-right corner goes the email address, as enter through
+the \cs{email} command.
+
+\item The \texttt{lr} corner: The \cs{webversion} command goes into the
+    lower-right corner. It expands to
+    \cs{web@versionlabel\;\anglemeta{version\_number}}, while, in turn,
+    the command \cs{web@versionlabel} expands to ``Version''. This label can be
+    changed by using \Com{versionLabel} (for example,
+    \verb!versionLabel{Attempt}!). Finally, the variable
+    \anglemeta{version\_number} is the number entered through the
+    \cs{version} command.
+\end{description}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic The font size of the title page trailer
+ is set by the command \cs{trailerFontSize}, the default is
+\cs{footnotesize}. This command must be re-defined in the usual
+way: for example, \verb!\renewcommand{\trailerFontSize}{\small}!.
+
+
+\redpoint When using the pro option, the elements of the title page trailer
+can be entered by using \Com{DesignTitlePageTrailer}, see
+\Nameref{trailer}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{Redefining
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{maketitle}}{\textbackslash maketitle}}
+
+The arguments of the \Nameref{ss:BIM} macros, as just discussed,
+are used to define text macros with no parameters; for example,
+when you type \verb+\title{Web Package}+, the macro \cs{title}
+takes its argument and defines a macro \cs{webtitle} that expands
+to `Web Package'.
+
+You can redesign the title page to suit your needs simply by
+redefining \cs{maketitle}: rearrange the macros listed in the
+second column of \hyperref[table:BIM]{Table~\ref*{table:BIM}} on
+the page, or include a graphic, or change the background color.
+To redefine \cs{maketitle}, use the commands:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\maketitle{...your design...}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the definition of \cs{maketitle} in the \texttt{web.sty} file
+for an example.
+
+\begin{table}[hbt]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+\hline
+\multicolumn1{|l|}{This macro}   &
+\multicolumn1{l|}{defines this macro} \\
+\hline
+\cs{title}          &   \cs{webtitle}  \\
+\cs{author}         &   \cs{webauthor}  \\
+\cs{subject}        &   \cs{websubject} \\
+\cs{keywords}       &   \cs{webkeywords}\\
+\cs{university}     &   \cs{webuniversity} \\
+\cs{email}          &   \cs{webemail} \\
+\cs{version}        &   \cs{webversion} \\
+\cs{copyrightyears} &   \cs{webcopyrightyears} \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{The Basic Information Macros}\label{table:BIM}
+\end{center}
+\vspace{-\baselineskip}
+\end{table}
+
+When making the design, it is useful to know that the {\Web}
+package uses the command \cs{hypertarget} to create a named destination,
+`\texttt{webtoc}', in the table of contents.  Use this
+\texttt{webtoc} to jump to the table of contents using
+the macro \cs{hyperlink}.
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{extended} option is in effect, a slight redefinition
+of \cs{maketitle} occurs. See the details in section~\ref{maketitlepro},
+\Nameref{maketitlepro}.
+
+\subsection{The Title Page Directory}\label{titlepagedir}
+
+When the \texttt{usedirectory} option is taken, a directory listing
+appears on the title page. The default structure of the directory is
+
+\makeatletter
+    \vbox{\begin{flushleft}{\web@formatWordDirectory\web@directory}%
+    \vspace{-3pt}%
+    \begin{itemize}\setlength{\itemsep}{-3pt}\web@formatDirectoryItems
+        \if\web@removeDirTOC y\else\item\relax\dirTOCItem\fi
+        \if\web@removeDirArticle y\else\item\relax\dirArticleItem\fi
+        \web@addtoDirList
+    \end{itemize}
+    \end{flushleft}}
+\makeatother
+There are several commands that can be used to modify the directory.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{dirContentLink\darg{Begin \string\hyperlink\darg{\string\web@Start.1}\darg{Article}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\directoryName{Directory}
+\tocName{Table of Contents}
+\dirContentLink{Begin \hyperlink{\web@Start.1}{Article}}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic These three define the default text strings
+that appear. In the case of \cs{dirContentLink},
+there is a built-in \cs{hyperlink} to the start of
+the article.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{formatWordDirectory\darg{\string\bfseries\string\large}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\formatWordDirectory{\bfseries\large}
+\formatDirectoryItems{\bfseries}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic The formatting of the \cs{directoryName} can be set by \cs{formatWordDirectory},
+the default definition is given above.  The (global) formatting for the listing of the
+items can be set using \cs{formatDirectoryItems}, the default is shown above.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{removeDirTOC\quad\string\removeDirArticle}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\removeDirTOC!quad\removeDirArticle
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic These two commands remove the ``Table of Contents'' and
+the ``Begin Article'' items from the list, respectively.
+
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{addtoDirList\darg{\meta{new\_item}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\addtoDirList{!meta(new_item)}
+\dirTOCItem
+\dirArticleItem
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic To add a new item to the end of the directory list, use \cs{addtoDirList}, the argument
+is the new item. The other two commands \cs{dirTOCItem} and \cs{dirArticleItem} are commands
+representing the first two default items. For example, typing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\addtoDirList{My home page is \url{www.example.com}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+in the preamble, adds this item to the end of the list. Should you want your home page listed first, you could do the
+following
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\removeDirTOC
+\removeDirArticle
+\addtoDirList{My home page is \url{www.example.com}}
+\addtoDirList{\dirTOCItem}
+\addtoDirList{\dirArticleItem}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The following are for creating some special effects around the directory,
+such as putting the directory into a multicolumn format.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{priorDirMatter\darg{\meta{text/commands}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\priorDirMatter{!meta(text/commands)}
+\afterDirMatter{!meta(text/commands)}
+\priorDirList{!meta(text/commands)}
+\afterDirList{!meta(text/commands)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+Below is a partial listing of the definition of \cs{webdirectory}, the internal name
+for the directory. We present the code so you can see where the prior/after commands
+write to.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\web@priorDirMatter
+\begin{flushleft}{\web@formatWordDirectory\web@directory}%
+\web@priorDirList
+\vspace{\vspaceAfterDirName}%
+\begin{itemize}
+    !anglemeta(directory listing)
+\end{itemize}
+\web@afterDirList
+\end{flushleft}
+\web@afterDirMatter
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Contained within the code is another command, \Com{vspaceAfterDirName}, not mentioned before.
+It is used to adjust vertical spacing after the directory name and
+the beginning of the itemize list.
+
+A final command that may be useful is \Com{directoryhook}. It is used for manipulating
+the directory as a whole.
+
+\bgroup\obeyspaces %
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily{    \anglemeta{code that manipulates \#1}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\directoryhook{
+    !anglemeta(code that manipulates #1)
+}
+\end{dCmd}
+\egroup
+\newtopic The argument of \cs{directoryhook} is some \LaTeX{} code that manipulates \texttt{\#1}, within
+the argument \texttt{\#1} refers to \cs{webdirectory}, the internal name of the directory.
+The following example places a colored box around the directory, and centers it on the title page.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\directoryhook{%
+    \begin{center}
+    \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}%
+    \fcolorbox{red}{webyellow}{%
+    \parbox{.4\linewidth}{#1}}%
+    \end{center}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=283} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=283}{multicol\_dir.pdf}}
+for examples of many of these commands. This file is posted on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroBlog}.
+
+
+%\directoryhook
+
+
+\subsection{The TOC for Web}
+
+The \pkg{web} style comes with its own table of contents format,
+as seen in the table of contents for the screen version of this document.
+The amount of indentation can be adjusted using \cs{tocindent}. The default is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\tocindent{20pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+There is another relevant parameter, \cs{widestNumber}. The value of the
+argument of this command declaration sets the amount of indentation for the
+subsection numbers. The default is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\widestNumber{0.0.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This is a template for the subsection numbers, the default is a one digit
+section number and a one digit subsection number. In the preamble of this
+document, I've set \cs{widestNumber\darg{0.00.}}, since some subsection
+numbers have two digits.
+
+\newtopic The color of the heading of the table of contents is set through
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{tocColor\darg{\meta{named\_color}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\tocColor{!meta(named_color)}
+\end{dCmd}
+Specifying a color through this command at any time before the creation of the table of contents
+will change the color of the heading. The default is blue.
+
+
+\redpoint If you prefer the standard {\LaTeX}, the
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:latextoc]{latextoc}} option can be used.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{usedirectory}}{usedirectory}
+Option}\label{sss:nodir}
+
+When the \texttt{usedirectory} option is specified, a short
+directory appears on the first page, see \Nameref{titlepagedir} for
+more details.
+
+\redpoint \textbf{\textcolor{red}{Important Note:}} In previous versions
+of {\Web}, the directory automatically appeared, and there was a
+\texttt{nodirectory} option to make it go away. Now, the directory
+does not appear by default, and the option \texttt{usedirectory}
+makes it appear. The \texttt{nodirectory} option is still defined,
+but does nothing.\endredpoint
+
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{latextoc}}{latextoc}
+Option}\label{sss:latextoc}
+
+If you don't like the default design for the table of contents,
+you can always recover the standard \LaTeX\ table of contents by
+using the \texttt{latextoc} option with the \pkg{web}
+package:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[latextoc]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Should you want to go with this option, you might consider
+including
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\hypersetup{linktocpage}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Look at the table of contents with and without this
+\pkg{hyperref} option to decide which you prefer.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{centertitlepage} Option}\label{centertitle}
+
+Beginning with version 5.0, there is a \texttt{centertitlepage} option
+that attempts to center the title page better when the \texttt{forpaper} option
+is taken. The \cs{textwidth} of the document is preserved.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{centertitlepagefull} Option}\label{centertitlefull}
+
+When the \texttt{centertitlepagefull} option is used, the content of the title
+page is centered on the page when the \texttt{forpaper} option
+is taken. The \cs{textwidth} is \cs{paperwidth} minus \texttt{2\cs{coverpagemargin}}.
+The default value of the \emph{command} \cs{coverpagemargin} is \texttt{1\,in}.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{makeinlinetitle}}{\CMD{makeinlinetitle}} Command}\label{inlinetitle}
+    \aebCng[makeinlinetitle]
+
+For some short documents,\footnote{Short documents such as white
+papers, homework assignments, for example.} a formal title page may
+not be needed or desirable. In this case, use \cs{makeinlinetitle},
+the ``in-line'' title.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{makeinlinetitle}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\makeinlinetitle
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The command, which can be redefined to your needs, has the following design:
+\begin{center}\setlength{\tabcolsep}{0pt}
+\begin{tabular*}{\linewidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}lcr}
+                    & \cs{webtitle}  &\\
+\cs{webuniversity}  & \cs{webauthor} & \cs{webemail}\\
+\texttt{date}       &                & \cs{webversion}
+\end{tabular*}
+\end{center}
+The table above extends the entire \cs{linewidth}. The values of \cs{webtitle},
+\cs{web\-uni\-ver\-sity}, \cs{webauthor}, \cs{webmail} and \cs{web\-ver\-sion}
+are populated by their command counterparts, see \hyperref[table:BIM]
+{Table~\ref*{table:BIM}}, page~\pageref*{table:BIM}. The \texttt{date},
+as appears in the lower left row, will expand to the current date,
+or the value specified by the \cs{date} command.
+
+\newtopic Below are notes in the case the \texttt{extended} option is in effect:
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item The basic information above can be entered through
+    \cs{DeclareDocInfo} command as described in
+    section~\ref*{docinfo}, entitled \Nameref{docinfo}.
+    \item If the value of the \texttt{prepared} key is not specified, then
+    \texttt{date} is the current date, otherwise, \texttt{date} is the one specified
+    as the value of the \texttt{prepared} key.
+    \item If the value of the \texttt{talksite} key is not specified, then
+    \cs{webversion} is used; but if  \texttt{talksite} is specified, the value of this
+    key is used instead of \cs{webversion}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Template Options}\label{ss:templates}
+
+The \pkg{web} Package has three options (and supporting
+commands) for creating colored backgrounds, graphics backgrounds,
+and various overlays.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{usetemplates} Option}
+
+The \texttt{usetemplates} option activates the mechanism for
+creating colored backgrounds and graphic overlays. A complete
+discussion of the commands related to this option can be found
+in the section entitled \Nameref{ss:templagemagement}.
+
+\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{bgtest.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{leftpanel} and \texttt{right\-panel} Options}\label{ss:lrpanel}
+
+When either of these two options is specified, a vertical panel
+is created. See the section entitled \Nameref{ss:templagemagement}
+for a complete discussion of the commands related to these options.
+
+\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{bgtest.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{leftpanelprt} and \texttt{right\-panelprt} Options}\label{ss:lrpanelprt}
+
+These two options are the same as \texttt{leftpanel} and
+\texttt{right\-panel} \emph{when there is no paper option} (\texttt{forpaper},
+\texttt{forcolorpaper}). When a paper option is taken, these options do
+nothing. The options are useful for creating a paneled PDF for the
+screen, but the paper version that has no panel.
+
+\section{Navigation Aids}\label{ss:naviaids}
+
+The \pkg{web} package offers a couple of navigation aids to
+help you move around: the \texttt{navibar} Option, and some
+\hyperref[sss:diricons]{direction icons}.
+
+\subsection{A Navigation Bar}\label{sss:navibar}
+
+Use the \texttt{navibar} option of \pkg{web} to add a
+navigation toolbar, as seen at the bottom of this page.
+Usage:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),navibar]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The result is the navigation bar you see at the bottom of the
+page.
+
+\NaviBarOn\AddToShipoutPicture*{\NaviBarOff}
+
+\begin{comment}
+\redpoint Here is (almost) the preamble of this document.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[dvipsone,navibar]{web}  % <- navibar option
+
+\hypersetup{pdfpagemode=None,bookmarksopen=false}
+
+\title{The Web and Exerquiz Packages Manual of Usage}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{How to create on-line exercises and quizzes}
+\keywords{LaTeX, hyperref, PDF, exercises, quizzes}
+\version{1.30}\copyrightyears{1999-2000}
+\email{dpstory@uakron.edu}
+\university{THE UNIVERSITY OF AKRON\\
+   Mathematics and Computer Science}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{comment}
+
+\redpoint The toolbar can be turned on or off by the following
+commands: \cs{Navi\-Bar\-On}\sCom{NaviBarOn} and
+\cs{Navi\-Bar\-Off}\sCom{NaviBarOff}. The navigation toolbar at
+the bottom of the page was generated by the \cs{NaviBarOn}.
+\cs{NaviBarOff} was placed on the next page to turn off the bar. The
+exact code used on this page is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\NaviBarOn\AddToShipoutPicture*{\NaviBarOff}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The colors for the navigation bar can be set with commands
+\Com{navibarTextColor} and \Com{navibarBgColor}. Each take a single
+argument, a named color. The default colors are \texttt{webblue} and
+\texttt{webgray}, respectively.
+
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{newNaviIcon}}
+    {\textbackslash newNaviIcon}}\label{ss:newnaviicon}
+
+The \cs{newNaviIcon} can be used to define a navigation icon.
+The action of the icon can be to execute a menu item, perform a
+hyper-jump, or execute the JavaScript code. It takes six
+parameters:
+
+\medskip\noindent Parameters
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+#1 = m, j, or l
+#2 = command name of the new navigation icon
+#3 = width of icon
+#4 = height of icon
+#5 = text to appear in the center of the icon.
+#6 = if m: named menu action, e.g., NextPage, PrevPage, etc.
+    if j: execute JavaScript
+    if l: \hyperlink{arg} or \href{arg}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Once the \cs{newNaviIcon} command is executed, a new icon is
+defined. The name of this new icon is the value of parameter \#2.
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{blue}{Example:}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newNaviIcon[m]{\myNext}{34pt}{10pt}{Next}{NextPage}
+\newNaviIcon[j]{\jsWarning}{34pt}{10pt}{Hi}{app.alert("Hi there")}
+\newNaviIcon[l]{\linkJump}{34pt}{10pt}{Go}{\hyperlink{page.1}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newNaviIcon[m]{\myNext}{34pt}{10pt}{Next}{NextPage}
+\newNaviIcon[j]{\jsWarning}{34pt}{10pt}{Hi}{app.alert("Hi there")}
+\newNaviIcon[l]{\linkJump}{34pt}{10pt}{Go}{\hyperlink{page.1}}
+
+\noindent By typing \verb+\myNext\ \jsWarning\ \linkJump+, we get
+\[
+    \myNext\ \jsWarning\ \linkJump
+\]
+The colors for the navigation bar can be set with commands
+\cs{navibarTextColor} and \cs{navibarBgColor}.
+
+\subsection{Direction Icons}\label{sss:diricons}
+
+The up arrow you see in the upper right-hand corner was
+constructed using colored rules and the AMS symbol font,
+\texttt{amssymb}. The uparrow icon was produced by the command:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowUp{\hyperlink{webtoc}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The definition of \cs{ArrowUp}, which be found in the \textsf{web.dtx} file is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\ArrowUp[1]
+{%
+    \setlength{\fboxsep}{6pt}\normalsize
+    \raisebox{-\depth}[0pt][0pt]{%
+    #1{\web@colorbox@w@transparency{\web@directionIconBgColor}%
+    {\textcolor{\web@directionIconTextColor}{$\bigl\Uparrow$}}}}%
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Or, more generally,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowUp{link_command}}
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowDown{link_command}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This will insert direction icons on the current page (I
+hope).
+
+\insertnaviiconhere{\ArrowUp{\hyperlink{toc.1}}}
+
+\medskip
+
+If you want a running direction icon you can use
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhereafter{\ArrowUp{link_command}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent or
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\insertnaviiconhereafter{\ArrowDown{link_command}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint To discontinue a running arrow icon type
+\begin{equation*}
+\cs{defaultpageheader}
+\end{equation*}
+on the page you want the arrow(s) to disappear.
+
+\newtopic The colors of the direction icons by using
+the commands \Com{directionIconTextColor} and
+\Com{directionIconBgColor}. Each command takes a named color as its argument;
+the default values are \texttt{webblue} and \texttt{webgray}, respectively.
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{panelNaviGroup}}
+    {\textbackslash panelNaviGroup}}\label{ss:panelnavigroup}
+
+When the \texttt{\hyperref[ss:lrpanel]{leftpanel}} or
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:lrpanel]{rightpanel}} options are chosen, a
+(navigation) panel is created. The command \cs{panelNaviGroup}
+can be used to create the standard navigation panel.
+
+%\exPDF{bgtest} See the sample file \texttt{bgtest.tex} for an example of usage.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=877} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=877}{bgtest.pdf}}.
+The source file \texttt{bgtest.tex}, attached to the PDF, offers an example
+of \cs{panelNaviGroup}. This article is posted on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroBlog}.
+
+
+\section{The Language Options}\label{web:langopts}
+
+The language options redefine all of the language dependent text
+macros that appear on the title page, in the table of contents, and
+in the running headers. Invoke these options in the usual
+way:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(lang_opt)]{web}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here, \texttt{\meta{lang\_opt}} is one of the following values:
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\texttt{dutch}   & \texttt{french} & \texttt{german}\\
+\texttt{italian} & \texttt{norsk}  & \texttt{russian}\\
+\texttt{spanish} & \texttt{dansk}  & \texttt{polish}\\
+\texttt{finnish} & \texttt{czech}  & \texttt{catalan}\\
+\texttt{brazil}  & \texttt{turkish}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+
+The \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages seem to be
+compatible with the \textsf{babel} package;  you can use
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\usepackage[dvips,french]{web}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+subject to the usual restrictions on these language packages.
+(Don't use characters declared active by these languages within a
+\cs{label}, or as a field name for a quiz.)
+
+\section{Paper Related Options and Commands}\label{paperoptions}
+
+In this section, several paper options are discussed, and one command.
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forpaper}}{forpaper}
+Option}\label{sss:webforpaper}
+
+Some people may want to create exercises using the
+\texttt{exercise} environment for a paper document. The
+\texttt{forpaper} option can be used to remove the color from the
+document, and to restore the standard \cs{textheight} of a standard
+\texttt{article} class \LaTeX{} document.
+
+The \cs{textwidth} is determined from the \cs{screensize} and
+\cs{margins} parameters or by the design option (see
+\nameref{sss:designoptions}), \emph{if any are given}; consequently,
+the line breaks are the same for the ``web'' version and the
+``print'' version. If the screen dimensions are not set (by a design
+option or by the \cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} commands) when
+using the \texttt{forpaper} option, the standard {\LaTeX} page
+layout dimensions are used for the class.
+
+Using the \texttt{forpaper} option with the \texttt{latexlayout}
+option will give you the standard \LaTeX{} \cs{textwidth}.
+
+The \texttt{forpaper} option also changes the \cs{newpage} command
+to \cs{par}\cs{medskip} at the end of each solution---we don't
+want to waste paper now, do we?
+
+Finally, there is a Boolean switch \verb+\ifeqforpaper+, which you
+are free to use to refine the look your \texttt{forpaper} version.
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forcolorpaper}}{forcolorpaper}
+Option}\label{forcolorpaper}
+
+Same as the \hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{\texttt{forpaper}} option,
+but the color operators are not turned off.
+
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{latexlayout}}{latexlayout}
+Option}\label{sss:weblatexlayout}
+
+For those who want to go ``totally native,'' use the
+\texttt{latexlayout} and \texttt{forpaper} options together.  When the
+\texttt{latexlayout} option is used, the page layout redefinitions of
+\pkg{web} are bypassed, leaving the original layout values of the
+\texttt{article} class of \LaTeX.
+
+\redpoint If the \texttt{latexlayout} option is taken, all templates
+are turned off, and the \texttt{for\-color\-option} is executed. To remove
+color, you need to explicitly take the \texttt{forpaper} option.
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{uselatexparts}}{uselatexparts}
+and \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{uselatexchapters}}{uselatexchapters}
+Options}
+
+As described in \hyperref[partsChaptersDots]{section~\ref*{partsChaptersDots}},
+page~\pageref*{partsChaptersDots}, the {\Web} package redefines the \cs{part}
+and \cs{chapter} commands for the purpose of allowing easier access to redefining
+how these section elements are to appear in the document and in the table of contents.
+You can bypass these definitions by using \texttt{uselatexparts} and
+the \texttt{uselatexchapters} options. This may be useful if you want to use AeB
+to create a paper document and you want to use that standard definitions, or perhaps
+want to use another package to define the look of the table of contents or
+of the \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} commands. (The other sectioning comments can be overridden
+as well, but any controls provided by the \texttt{extended} option will be lost.)
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{useFullWidthForPaper}}
+    {\CMD{useFullWidthForPaper}}  Command}
+
+We introduce a command of resetting the page layout paper \emph{when
+the \emph{\texttt{forpaper}} option is in effect}. The primary use
+is to create standard documents for academics such as homeworks,
+syllabuses or any handout to the student.
+
+This command is used to set the page layout to its maximum width, given
+a 1 inch margin. The height is maximized after taking into account
+other page parameters that effect it.  The parameters \cs{marginparwidth}
+and \cs{marginparsep} are set to zero; for this layout, there are no
+marginal comments. The command may be redefined as desired.
+
+\newtopic The command should be used in the preamble, otherwise, it
+has no effect.
+
+\section{Formatting for screen and paper}
+
+As we learned in \hyperref[paperoptions]
+{Section~\ref*{paperoptions}}, {\Web} can format a document in a for
+screen or for paper. The {\Web} package provides several commands and
+environments for changing content as needed.
+
+When the \texttt{forpaper} option is used, the switch
+\cs{ifeqforpaper}\sCom{ifeqforpaper} is set to true. You can use
+this switch, to get different content for the printed page or the
+screen page, or you can use the convenience command \cs{prtscr}:
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{prtscr\darg{\meta{print\_text}}\darg{\meta{screen\_text}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\prtscr{!meta(print_text)}{!meta(screen_text)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdDescription This command expands to \meta{print\_text} if the \texttt{forpaper} option
+is taken and to \meta{screen\_text} if not.
+
+The \cs{prtscr} command is useful for small changes in content, not
+involving verbatim text or paragraph breaks. {\Web} defines two additional environments,
+\texttt{forpaper} and \texttt{forscreen}.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{begin\darg{forscreen}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{forscreen}
+....
+....
+....
+\end{forscreen}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\EnvLoc Anywhere.
+
+\newtopic Use the \texttt{forscreen} environment to insert commands or content meant only for
+the screen.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{begin\darg{forpaper}}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{forpaper}
+....
+....
+....
+\end{forpaper}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\EnvLoc Anywhere.
+
+\newtopic Use the \texttt{forpaper} environment to insert commands
+or content meant only for the paper document.
+
+\newtopic Another command, \cs{NewPage}, is useful for formatting
+the same document for print as well as screen
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{NewPage}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\NewPage
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Anywhere.
+
+\CmdDescription This command expands to \cs{newpage} if the
+\texttt{forpaper} option is \emph{not taken}, and does nothing,
+otherwise. Useful for inserting page breaks in the screen version
+that are not needed in the paper version.
+
+\section{Template Building and Management}\label{ss:templagemagement}
+
+The {\Web} package has a template building capability.
+You can conveniently create backgrounds for your page, insert an
+arbitrary number of graphic overlays, create a left or right
+(navigation) side panel, define your own navigation icons that
+appear in the panel, and write material that will appear in a
+panel.
+
+%\exPDF{bgtest} The demo file for the template feature is \texttt{bgtest.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=877} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=877}{bgtest.pdf}}.
+The source file \texttt{bgtest.tex}, attached to the PDF,
+is demo file for the template feature. This article
+is posted on the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroBlog}.
+
+
+\subsection{Template options}
+
+As with pdfscreen by Radhakrishnan C. V., we shall have the two
+options, \texttt{leftpanel} and \texttt{rightpanel}. In addition to
+these two, there is the \texttt{usetemplates} option.  Use the
+option \texttt{usetemplates} if you want to use colored backgrounds
+or overlays without a left or right panel.
+
+The template, or overlay, capability of the \textsf{Web Package}
+requires the use of two \LaTeX{} Packages: \texttt{everyshi.dtx},
+by Martin Schr\"oder, and \texttt{eso-pic.dtx}, by  Rolf
+Niepraschk.  If any of the three template options
+(\texttt{usetemplates}, \texttt{leftpanel} or
+\texttt{rightpanel}) are used, the \textsf{eso-pic package} is
+automatically included by \pkg{web}. The \textsf{eso-pic
+package}, in turn, inputs the \textsf{everyshi} package. These two
+packages need to be present on your system, unpacked, and in the
+search path of \LaTeX.
+
+Templates, or overlays, are available for the all driver options.
+
+\subsection{Text Screen Template}
+
+You can specify a graphic that will be overlaid onto the text
+screen, that portion of the screen to which {\LaTeX} content is
+written.  If a panel option has not been specified, this is the
+whole screen; otherwise, it is that portion of the screen outside
+the panel.
+
+If one of the options \texttt{usetemplates}, \texttt{leftpanel} or
+\texttt{rightpanel} is specified, the commands
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\template{!meta(graphics_file_name)}
+\textBgColor{!meta(named_color)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+insert a background graphic and a background color,
+respectively, onto the text screen region. The \cs{template} command
+will rescale the graphic to cover the entire text screen region.
+
+Additional graphics can be overlayed with the \cs{AddToTemplate}
+command.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\AddToTemplate{!meta(template_name)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The command takes one argument, the \meta{template\_name}.
+Define an overlay,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\newcommand\myTemplate
+{%
+    !anglemeta(commands to insert an overlay)
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the \meta{template\_name} for this template is \texttt{myTemplate}. (Note that there
+is no backslash.) To add this template to the list graphics to be overlayed onto the page,
+we would type
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\AddToTemplate{myTemplate}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{blue}{Example:} Insert the ``\AcroT'' logo in lower-left corner, offset by~36pt
+in the $x$ and $y$ directions.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\AEBLogo
+{%
+    \put(36,36){\includegraphics{acrotexlogo}}%
+}
+\AddToTemplate{AEBLogo}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Because the \textsf{Web Package} uses \textsf{eso-pic}, the
+commands will be executed within a \texttt{picture} environment.
+Within the \texttt{picture} environment, the reference point of the text
+screen is the lower-left corner. The above code puts the
+``\AcroT'' logo at coordinates of \texttt{(36,36)} relative to the
+lower-left corner. The units are measured in (\TeX) points.
+
+\redpoint \textcolor{blue}{Example:} Center the logo within the text screen region.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\AEBLogoCenter
+{%
+    \ifnum\arabic{page}>1\relax
+        \parbox[b][\paperheight][c]{\textscreenwidth}
+        {\centering\includegraphics{acrotexlogo}}%
+     \fi
+}
+\AddToTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent
+See the section titled \Nameref{sss:templatemanage} for details of
+how to manage your templates.
+
+\subsection{Panel Screen Template}\label{panelscreentemplate}
+
+When the \texttt{leftpanel} or \texttt{rightpanel}
+option is specified, a (navigation/logo) panel is created. The commands
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\paneltemplate{!meta(graphics_file_name)}
+\panelBgColor{!meta(named_color)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent set the overlay graphic and the background color, respectively.
+The graphic is rescaled to fit the panel region.
+
+Once the panel and its background have been defined, contents and
+form elements can be placed on top of the panel. The command \cs{buildpanel} can
+be used for this purpose. For example, from the sample file
+\texttt{bgtest.tex},
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\buildpanel
+{%
+    \href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/}
+        {\includegraphics[scale=.4]{uakron}}
+    \par\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+    \href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}
+        {\rotatebox{-90}{\aebLogo}}
+    \par\vspace{\stretch{1}}
+    \panelNaviGroup             % defined in web
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The content of the panel is stacked from top to bottom.\footnote{The command \cs{aebLogo}
+is defined in the file, \texttt{bgtest.tex}.}
+
+\redpoint Additional overlays can be added with
+\cs{AddToPanelTemplate}. The command may not be as useful as the panel overlay can
+always be rebuilt using \cs{buildpanel}.\endredpoint
+
+\newtopic The minimal width for the panel is set through the            \aebCng[minPanelWidth]
+\Com{minPanelWidth} command, the default size is 1in; that is,
+\verb!\minPanelWidth{1in}! is executed by the package at start up.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{minPanelWidth\darg{\meta{length}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\minPanelWidth{!meta(length)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc You can reset the minimal width by executing the
+command in the preamble before the \cs{screenwidth} and \cs{margins}
+commands. Or, place it in the \texttt{web.cfg}.
+
+\subsection{Template Management}\label{sss:templatemanage}
+
+In order to change backgrounds or templates, on any page, re-issue
+any one of the commands \cs{template} or \cs{textBgColor} (for the
+screen text region), or \cs{paneltemplate} or \cs{textBgColor}
+(for the panel region).
+
+The panel overlay can be redesigned with \cs{buildpanel}, or some of the
+command components that make up the panel overlay can be redefined.
+
+Templates that are inserted into the output stream using
+either \cs{AddToTemplate} or \cs{AddToPanelTemplate} can also be
+redefined on any page.
+
+Templates, created by either \cs{AddToTemplate} or
+\cs{AddTo\-Panel\-Template}, can also be \emph{disabled} or \emph{enabled}
+individually. For example, if the \texttt{AEBLogoCenter} template
+has been overlayed using the command
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\AddToTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the template can be disabled (turned off) by typing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\disableTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent on any page. (\textcolor{red}{Note:} The effects of this command
+may be not be seen until the following page.) Turn the template
+on by typing
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\enableTemplate{AEBLogoCenter}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent on any page.
+
+For the panel region, there are commands for \emph{disabling}
+(\cs{disablePanelTemplate}) and \emph{enabling} (\cs{enablePanelTemplate}) as
+well. Each of these takes a \meta{template\_name} as an argument.
+
+There are a number of commands for \emph{clearing} backgrounds and
+templates.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearTextTemplate
+\ClearPanelTemplate
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent These two clear background colors and background graphics.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearBuildPanel
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This command will clear the build panel as well as the graphics
+and field elements that lay on top of the panel created by the
+\cs{buildpanel} command.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearAllTemplates
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The command \cs{ClearAllTemplates} is equivalent to executing \cs{ClearTextTemplate} and
+\cs{ClearPanelTemplate}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ClearTextTemplateBuffer
+\ClearPanelTemplateBuffer
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The commands will clear all overlays, including overlays created  by
+\cs{Add\-To\-Template} and \cs{Add\-To\-Panel\-Template}.
+
+\redpoint See the documentation file, \texttt{web.dtx}, for exact definitions of the
+commands in this section.
+
+% \subsubsection{Parameters used in Template Building}\label{sss:partemp}
+
+\section{The \texttt{extended} or \texttt{pro} Option}\label{webpro}
+
+Version 5.0 of {\Web} introduces the \texttt{pro}, which encompasses many new
+features. The \opt{pro} option has a preferred alias of \opt{extended}. The
+\opt{extended} option uses the very fine package \texttt{xkeyval} by
+Hendri Adriaens, which enables developers to create commands with key-value
+pairs.
+
+\newtopic The following new features are provided by the \texttt{extended} option:
+\begin{questions}
+    \item \cs{DeclareDocInfo}: A data structure for setting various document properties.
+    \item A slightly re-designed \cs{maketitle}. Also, increased control over
+    the placement of the elements of the title page.
+    \item Extensive control over the display of \cs{section}, \cs{subsection},
+    \cs{subsubsection} headings. Now color, fonts, size and so on can easily
+    be set.
+    \item A choice of using section numbers (the default) or no sections, or dings.
+    \item A single data structure to set virtually all colors.
+\end{questions}
+Details provided in subsequent sections.
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{DeclareDocInfo}}{\CMD{DeclareDocInfo}}}\label{docinfo}
+
+The preamble of your document should contain a number of keys that
+identify the document, including the title and author of the
+document. Some of this information is used to construct the
+title page, some is placed in the {\PDF}, to be displayed in the
+`Description' tab of the \textbf{Document Properties} dialog box, which
+is accessed through the \texttt{Ctrl+D} accelerator key, or through
+the menu system \texttt{File > Document Properties...} (for version 8,
+this is \texttt{File > Properties...}).
+
+Information is passed through the \cs{DeclareDocInfo} command which
+takes a number of key-value pairs. This is a simple \textsf{xkeyval}
+interface to many of the text macros that are defined in \Web.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{DeclareDocInfo\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\DeclareDocInfo{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Place in the preamble.
+
+\KVP The following is a description of the key value pairs.
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item \texttt{title}: The title of the document.
+    \item \texttt{author}: The author or authors of the document.
+    \item \texttt{subject}: The subject of the presentation. Optional, this appears only in the
+    `Description' tab of the \textbf{Document Properties}.
+    \item \texttt{keywords}: A list of keywords that describe your document. Optional, this appears only in the
+    `Description' tab of the \textbf{Document Properties}. Some search engines use this field.
+    \item \texttt{university}: The university or company the author represents.
+    \item \texttt{email}: The email address of the author. This appears on the title page, and becomes
+    an email link.
+    \item \texttt{version}: The version number of the document.
+    \item \texttt{versionLabel}: Text that precedes the version number. The default is \texttt{Version}.
+    \item \texttt{talkdate}: Date of the presentation.
+
+           The fields \texttt{version} and \texttt{talkdate} occupy the
+           same position on the title page. If the \texttt{talkdate} is
+           specified, then the talk date will appear on the title page, if
+           \texttt{talkdate} is not specified, then \texttt{version} will
+           appear. Both \texttt{version} and \texttt{talkdate} can be
+           specified, but in this case, it is \texttt{talkdate} that will
+           appear. The \texttt{version} can be used for version
+           management.
+
+    \item \texttt{talkdateLabel}: Text that precedes the date of the document. The default text for the talkdate label
+        is \texttt{Presented:}.
+    \item \texttt{talksite}: Site of the presentation. This field can be used for generally anything, for
+    example, you could specify your web site.
+    \item \texttt{copyrightyears}: Year(s) of the copyright of this publication, defaults to this year.
+    \item \texttt{prepared}: The date of preparation of the
+          document, defaults to the day the file was compiled (\LaTeX ed).
+          This was formerly the last revision date.
+    \item \texttt{preparedLabel}: The label that precedes the date \texttt{prepared}. The default string
+            value is \texttt{Prepared:}. The old default was \texttt{Last Revision Date:}, and will remain so
+            if the \texttt{extended} option is not taken.
+    \item \texttt{copyrightStatus}: If the \textsf{aebxmp} package is loaded for advanced metadata,
+        this key allows you to set the copyright status. Possible
+        values \texttt{True}, \texttt{False}, or blank (no value, or the key not listed at all)
+        corresponding to \textsf{Copyrighted}, \textsf{Public Domain} and
+        \textsf{Unknown}, respectively. The values of this key are case sensitive, so you must enter
+        \texttt{True} and \texttt{False}, with the first letter capitalized. If \textsf{aebxmp} is
+        not loaded, specifying this key does nothing.
+    \item \texttt{copyrightNotice}: If the \textsf{aebxmp} package is loaded for advanced metadata,
+        this key allows you to set copyright notice, short text describing the copyright, perhaps,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+copyrightNotice={Copyright D. P. Story, 2009--2012}
+\end{Verbatim}
+        If \textsf{aebxmp} is not loaded, specifying this key does nothing.
+    \item \texttt{copyrightInfoURL}: If the \textsf{aebxmp} package is loaded for advanced metadata,
+        this key allows you to set the copyright info url, a url to
+        a page on the web containing a more detailed description of the copyright. If \textsf{aebxmp} is
+        not loaded, specifying this key does nothing.
+    \item \texttt{authors}: A list of authors, \emph{each enclosed in braces}.
+    Names of individual authors can be accessed using the JavaScript \texttt{info.Authors}
+    property: the first author is \texttt{info.Authors[0]}; the second
+    author is \texttt{info.Authors[1]}, etc.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+authors={D. P. Story}{J\u00FCrgen Gilg}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Notice the use of unicode to create a u-umlaut (\"{u}).
+    \item \texttt{Keywords}: Similar to keywords, but note the capital `K'. Then
+    \texttt{Keywords} is used to list the keywords, they are inserted into the
+    metadata as an array. The individual keywords can be accessed through a special
+    JS function, \texttt{aKeywords()}, defined by the \textsf{aebxmp} package. The syntax
+    is the same as \texttt{keywords}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Keywords={AcroTeX.Net,XMP,E4X,Adobe Acrobat,JavaScript}
+\end{Verbatim}
+If you execute \texttt{aKeywords(0)}, the string \texttt{"AcroTeX.Net"} is returned.
+Executing \texttt{aKeywords(4)} returns \texttt{"JavaScript"}, while  executing
+\texttt{aKeywords(5)} returns \texttt{undefined}.
+    \item \texttt{authortitle}: The \texttt{authortitle} is a field that appears
+    on the \textsf{Additional Metadata} dialog box. It can be used for whatever purpose you wish.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+authortitle={Programming and Development, AcroTeX.Net}
+\end{Verbatim}
+    \item \texttt{descriptionwriter}: This key fills a field on the
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+descriptionwriter={A good, well-liked guy}
+\end{Verbatim}
+    \textsf{Additional Metadata} dialog box. For example
+    \item \texttt{customProperties}: Acrobat allows for the creation of
+        custom properties which are accessible through the \texttt{info}
+        object. The value of this key consists of one or more property
+        definition(s) enclosed in braces. Each property definition has two
+        required key-value pairs, \texttt{name} and \texttt{value}. The
+        \texttt{name} needs to be a simple name consisting of letters and
+        numbers (not starting with a number). The \texttt{value} string
+        can be any string. See the example following:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+customProperties={name=Developer,value={D. P. Story, Esq.}}
+                 {name=Motivator,value=J\u00FCrgen Gilg}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Executing \texttt{this.info.Developer} returns the value of
+\texttt{"D. P. Story, Esq."}, while, \texttt{this.info.Motivator} returns
+\texttt{"J\"{u}rgen Gilg"}.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\Ex\label{exDeclareDocInfo} Example of usage of \Com{DeclareDocInfo} can
+be found in
+\hyperref[fig:declaredocinfo]{Figure~\ref*{fig:declaredocinfo}},
+page~\pageref*{fig:declaredocinfo}.
+\paragraph*{Discussion of \texttt{keywords} versus \texttt{Keywords}.} \texttt{Keywords} will overwrite
+\texttt{keywords}; the value of \texttt{keywords} is passed to
+\pkg{hyperref} which enters them as a single string, while
+\texttt{Keywords} enters the keywords. as an array. There is no need to
+have both \texttt{keywords} and \texttt{Keywords}.
+\paragraph*{Discussion of \texttt{author} versus \texttt{authors}.} Similarly,
+\texttt{authors} overwrites \texttt{author}, individual authors names can
+be accessed; however, unlike \texttt{keywords}/\texttt{Keywords}, it may
+make sense to use both \texttt{author} and \texttt{authors}. The
+\pkg{web} package takes a copy of the value of \texttt{author} and uses
+it in the title page. It is possible to have two versions of the author's
+names, one for presentation and one for the PDF info.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+author={Dr. D. P. Story, Herr J. Gilg},
+authors={D. Story,J. Gilg},
+\end{Verbatim}
+You can do the same thing, with the \texttt{author} key only by using
+the \cs{texorpdfstring} command of \texttt{hyperref}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+author={\texorpdfstring{Dr. D. P. Story, Herr J. Gilg}
+        {D. Story,J. Gilg}},
+\end{Verbatim}
+The difference is that with \texttt{authors}, individual authors are accessible
+through the JavaScript command \texttt{this.info.Authors}.
+\begin{figure}[ht]
+\footnotesize\centering
+\begin{dCmd*}{.9\linewidth}
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+    title=My First Presentation,
+    author=D. P. Speaker,
+    university=My University,
+    email=dpspeaker@myu.edu,
+    talkdate={Dec.\ 17, \the\year},
+    talksite=The Talking University,
+    subject=On the Theory of AcroTeX,
+    keywords={AcroTeX.Net,XMP,E4X,Adobe Acrobat,JavaScript},
+    copyrightStatus=False,
+    copyrightNotice={Copyright D. P. Story, 2009--\the\year},
+    copyrightInfoURL=http://www.acrotex.net,
+    authors={D. P. Story}{J\u00FCrgen Gilg},
+    Keywords={AcroTeX.Net,XMP,E4X,Adobe Acrobat,JavaScript},
+    authortitle={Programming and Development, AcroTeX.Net},
+    descriptionwriter={A good, well-liked guy},
+    customProperties={name=Developer,value={D. P. Story, Esq.}}
+                     {name=Motivator,value=J\u00FCrgen Gilg}
+}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\caption{The \protect\cs{DeclareDocInfo} Command}\label{fig:declaredocinfo}
+\end{figure}
+
+\handpoint \textbf{Two tricks of importance:} When the value contains a
+comma, then the whole value should be delimited by matching braces,
+as in the \texttt{talkdate} key-value in the
+\textbf{Example~\ref*{exDeclareDocInfo}} above. The \pkg{hyperref}
+command \Com{texorpdfstring} is handy for giving alternate wording, when
+some of the {\LaTeX} commands do not transfer to the {\PDF}'s \textbf{Document Properties}.
+For example, the title might have been ``A Discussion of $e^x$''; this title should appear
+in \cs{DeclareDocInfo} as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+title=A Discussion of \texorpdfstring{$e^x$}{exp(x)},
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Now the phrase, ``A Discussion of exp(x)'' will appear in
+the `Title' field of the \textbf{Document Properties}.
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} Download \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+from the {\AcroBlog} website. The source file \texttt{web\_pro.tex} is
+attached to the PDF, illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{DeclarePageLayout}}{\CMD{DeclarePageLayout}}}\label{pagelayout}
+
+The \Com{DeclarePageLayout} command gathers together many page
+layout parameters, both for {\LaTeX} and for {\Web}, into one
+convenient package of key-value pairs.
+
+\CmdLoc Place in the preamble.
+
+\KVP The following is a description of the key value pairs.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{design}: This key sets the \texttt{screensize}
+    according to preset dimensions, permissible values are
+    \texttt{designi}, \texttt{designii}, \texttt{designiii},
+    \texttt{designiv}, \texttt{designv}, \texttt{designvi},
+    \texttt{designvii}, \texttt{designviii}, and \texttt{designix}. These correspond to the
+    package options of the same names. This key is ignored if one of the
+    design options was taken as a {\Web} option. This key sets both the
+    \cs{screensize} and \cs{margins} commands.
+\item \texttt{screensizeOf}: This key sets the \texttt{screensize}
+    only (does not change the margins), possible values are
+    \texttt{designi}, \texttt{designii}, \texttt{designiii},
+    \texttt{designiv}, \texttt{designv}, \texttt{designvi},
+    \texttt{designvii}, \texttt{designviii}, and \texttt{designix}. Use this key, in
+    combination with the \texttt{margins} key, to use a standard design
+    \texttt{screensize}, but with different margins.
+\item \texttt{screensize}: Sets the \texttt{screensize} by executing
+    the \cs{screensize} command. The key takes two dimensions as
+    parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+screensize={!meta(height)}{!meta(width)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{screensize} key sets the screen to a height of
+\meta{height} and a width of \meta{width}. This key is
+ignored if a design option has been taken in the {\Web} option list,
+or if the \cs{screensize} command has already been executed.
+\item \texttt{margins}: Sets the dimensions of the margins of the
+    screen page. The key takes four dimensions as parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+margins={!meta(left)}{!meta(right)}{!meta(top)}{!meta(bottom)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here \meta{left}, \meta{right}, \meta{top}, and
+\meta{bottom} are the dimensions of the margins of the screen
+page. These are the same arguments as the \cs{margins} command. This
+key is ignored if a design option has been taken in the {\Web}
+option list, or if the \cs{margins} command has already been
+executed.
+\item \texttt{headheight}: Sets the standard page layout parameter
+    \cs{headheight}. The default is \texttt{8pt}.
+\item \texttt{topmargin}: Sets the position of the running header.
+    The default is 8pt for screen sizes, and the {\LaTeX} default is the
+    \texttt{forpaper} option is taken. You can say
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+topmargin=\prtscr{!meta(paper_dim)}{!meta(screen_dim)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+To get a \texttt{topmargin} value that works for paper and screen.
+(Perhaps you have a border running around the page, and you need to
+reposition the header below the border.) This repositioning differs
+depending on whether you compile with the \texttt{forpaper} option,
+or not.
+
+\item \texttt{additionalheadsep}: Additional separation between the
+    running header and the beginning of the text. This parameter
+    modifies \cs{headsep}, which is computed automatically by the
+    \pkg{web} package. Use \texttt{additionalheadsep} to add in a
+    little bit more, if the calculation does not yield good results. The default
+    value is 0pt.
+
+\item \texttt{marginparsep}: The horizontal distance between body and
+    marginal notes. The default is 11pt. When the page size is designed for
+    viewing on a computer, the margins are often times quite small, and
+    marginal notes are typically not used. You can use a conditional to give
+    two values one for screen and one for paper. See the \texttt{topmargin}
+    key.
+
+\item \texttt{marginparwidth}: The width of marginal notes. The default is .25in.
+    When the page size is designed for viewing on a computer,
+    the margins are often times quite small, and marginal notes are typically not used.
+    You can use a conditional to give two values one for screen and one for paper.
+    See the \texttt{topmargin} key.
+
+\item \texttt{marginparpush}: The minimal vertical space between
+    successive marginal notes. The default is 5pt.
+
+\item \texttt{footskip}: Vertical distance separating the baseline
+    of the last line and the baseline of the footer. The default is
+    30pt.
+
+\item \texttt{webfootskip}: Same as \texttt{footskip}, but the
+    \texttt{webfootskip} is measured up from the bottom edge of the
+    document. The default is 4pt.
+
+\item \texttt{panelwidth}: Sets the panel width. If not specified,
+    the minimal panel width of 1in is used. Panels appear when either
+    \texttt{leftpanel} or \texttt{rightpanel} is taken in the option
+    list of \Web. This key executes the \cs{panelwidth} command.
+
+\item \texttt{panelsep}: Sets the separation between the text screen
+    and the panel. The default is 10pt.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{The Title Page:
+    \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{maketitle}}{\CMD{maketitle}}}\label{maketitlepro}
+
+In this section, we described the enhanced features for controlling the title page.
+
+\subsubsection{The Title Page Structure}
+
+The title page is divided into three parts: top, middle and bottom.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Title Top:} The content of the top is determined by the \Com{top\-Titl\-ePage}
+command. (This command can be redefined, but it is not recommended.) The
+\cs{topTitlePage} command expands to three elements: the university (affiliation), the title,
+and the author(s), in that order vertically. These are the values of the keys \texttt{university},
+\texttt{title} and \texttt{author} that appear in the \cs{Declare\-Doc\-Info} command.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Middle:} The \Com{optionalPageMatter} command
+is used to enter content into this part of the title page. This middle
+part is optional; if \cs{optionalPageMatter} does not
+appear in the preamble, then this part of the title page is empty.
+
+\item \textbf{Title Bottom:} Bottom of the title page is controlled by the contents
+of the command \cs{titlepageTrailer} and consists of some of the
+document information entered in the \cs{Declare\-DocInfo} command.
+By default, \cs{titlepageTrailer} lists the values of the
+\cs{DeclareDocInfo} keys \texttt{email}, \texttt{talkdate},
+\texttt{talksite}, and \texttt{copy\-right\-years}, as described above. The
+font size of this bottom part is set by the command \cs{trailerFontSize}, the
+default is \cs{footnotesize}. This command can be re-defined in the
+usual way, for example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\trailerFontSize}{\scriptsize}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic \hyperref[fig:titlepage]{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage}}, page~\pageref*{fig:titlepage}, shows the basic
+composition of the title page of an {\AEB} document. The title page elements are described as they relate to the
+key-values of \nameref{docinfo}, described on page~\pageref{docinfo}.
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item At the very top is the value of the \Indextt{university} key.  The color of this
+    element can be set using the \Indextt{universityColor} key of \hyperref[designColor]{\Com{selectColors}},
+    page~\pageref{designColor}.
+    \item Next comes the value of \Indextt{title}, its color is controlled using the \Indextt{titleColor}
+    key  of \hyperref[designColor]{\cs{selectColors}}.
+
+    \item The author follows, which is the value of \Indextt{author}. The color is set by
+    \Indextt{authorColor} of \hyperref[designColor]{\cs{selectColors}}.
+    \item The {\AEB} logo is inserted using \Com{optionalPageMatter}. Normally,
+    this macro does nothing unless it is defined. In this example, we have
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\optionalPageMatter
+{%
+    \begin{center}
+        \begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+        \centering\includegraphics[scale=.5]{AeB_Logo}
+        \end{minipage}
+    \end{center}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+    \item Finally comes the \Com{titlepageTrailer}, a macro that can
+    be redefined (see the package file \texttt{web.dtx} for its definition. This
+    macro places the other elements at the bottom of the page:
+    \begin{itemize}
+        \item The copyright year and email address, as given by
+        \Com{email}. The color of the email address is set by
+        \Indextt{urlColor} through the command
+        \hyperref[designColor]{\cs{selectColors}}. This color
+        actually sets the color of all external \textsf{URL}s.
+        \item To the right, on the first line of the title page trailer is the value of \Com{talksite}.
+        The color is the default color for text.
+        \item In the lower left is the date of the last revision of the document. The color is the default color for
+            text.
+        \item In the lower right is the date the talk was given. The color is the default color for text.
+    \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+Not shown in Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage} is the title page directory, which is turned off by default.
+
+\begin{figure}[ht]
+\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\centering\fbox{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{figures/titlepage1}}
+\caption{The Title Page}\label{fig:titlepage}
+\end{figure}
+
+\newtopic The title page layout is, of course, defined by the standard
+\Com{maketitle} command, which has been redefined by the \texttt{extended} option.
+In {\Web}, the \cs{maketitle} has different behaviors, one for screen and one for paper.
+
+\subsubsection{Greater Control of the Top Title Page}\label{top}
+
+The three elements of the top title page are the values of the keys
+\texttt{university}, \texttt{title} and \texttt{author}. Values of these keys
+are declared in the command \cs{DeclareDocInfo}. The \texttt{extended} option
+defines three commands \cs{universityLayout}, \cs{titleLayout}, and
+\cs{authorLayout}, to format these three keys in a variety of ways.
+
+%\handpoint A working example of the commands that follow can be found in \texttt{aebpro\_ex2.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1242} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1242}{aebpro\_ex2.pdf}}. The source file
+\texttt{aebpro\_ex2.tex}, attached to the PDF, is a working example of the
+commands that follow.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{universityLayout\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\universityLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\titleLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\authorLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Place these optional commands in the preamble.
+
+\KVP Each of these commands have a number of key-value pairs. The
+first thirteen are the same that appear in the description of
+\cs{sectionLayout}, \mlNameref{secHead}. The rest are unique to
+these three commands. In the descriptions below, the word `element'
+refers to the values of the keys \texttt{university},
+\texttt{title} and \texttt{author}.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{fontfamily}: Font family to use with this element,
+    permitted values are \texttt{rmfamily}, \texttt{sffamily}, \texttt{ttfamily}.
+
+\item \texttt{fontseries}: Font series to  use, possible values are \texttt{bfseries} and \texttt{mdseries}.
+
+\item \texttt{fontshape}: Font shape to use: \texttt{upshape}, \texttt{itshape}, \texttt{scshape}, \texttt{slshape}.
+
+\item \texttt{fontsize}: Font size to use with this element, recognized values are \texttt{tiny},
+    \texttt{script\-size},
+\texttt{footnotesize}, \texttt{small}, \texttt{normalsize},
+    \texttt{large}, \texttt{Large}, \texttt{LARGE}, \texttt{huge}, \texttt{Huge}.
+
+\item \texttt{halign}: Alignment of this element within its enclosing \cs{parbox}, permissible
+    values are \texttt{l} (left aligned), \texttt{c} (centered), \texttt{r} (right aligned). See \hyperref[tutex17]
+    {Example~\ref*{tutex17}} for a visualization of the effects of the \texttt{halign} key.
+
+\item \texttt{color}: The color of the section title, this can be any named color. The default is blue
+for \texttt{title}, and black otherwise.
+
+\item \texttt{special}: Through this key, you can a specify predefined layout for the title elements. Permissible
+    values are \texttt{shadow}, \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox},
+    \texttt{frame\-box\-fit}, \texttt{color\-box\-fit}, \texttt{fcolor\-box\-fit}, \texttt{custom}, \texttt{default}.
+
+\item[] Custom titles can be created by specifying a value of
+    \texttt{custom}. In this case, {\Web} uses
+    \Com{customUniversity}, \Com{customTitle} and \Com{customAuthor}.
+    These are macros that take one argument, the code for designing the
+    title. The title is referred to as \texttt{\#1}. Depending on how
+    these custom titles are defined, the other keys may not be
+    obeyed.
+
+\item \texttt{framecolor}: The color of the frame surrounding the subject when the \texttt{special}
+    key has a value of \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{fcolorbox} \texttt{frameboxfit} or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{bgcolor}: The background (fill color) of the box enclosing this element, when
+    \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox}, \texttt{colorboxfit}
+    or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{shadowcolor}: The color of the shadow, when \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{shadow}.
+
+\item \texttt{beforeskip}: The amount of skip before the title element.
+
+\item \texttt{afterskip}: The amount of skip after the title element.
+
+\item \texttt{usefont}: Through this key it is possible to specify
+an arbitrary font and font size. The key takes five parameters, for
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+usefont={OT1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{{16}{16pt}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first four are the arguments of the {\LaTeX}'s \cs{usefont}, encoding, family, series and shape. The last argument
+are the arguments of the {\LaTeX}'s \cs{fontsize}, size and baselineskip.
+
+\item[] If the fifth parameter is empty, no font size is specified, the current default sizes are used.
+
+
+%\item \texttt{reset}: This key attempts to reset changes to their defaults. Permissible values are
+%    \texttt{font} (to reset the font changes only), or \texttt{all} (to reset all the keys).
+
+\item \texttt{hproportion}: Each of the three elements (university, title, author) lie in their own
+\cs{parbox}, the width of this box is determined by the value of this key, as a proportion of the
+total \cs{linewidth}. The default for all three is .7. This value can be set to get more or less
+``natural'' line breaks, without having to insert a new line with a `\verb!\\!'. See \hyperref[tutex17]
+{Example~\ref*{tutex17}} for a visualization of the effects of the \texttt{hproportion} key.
+
+\item \texttt{xhalign}: The \cs{parbox} of each of the three elements are also placed in a \cs{makebox}, additional
+control over positioning can be had by setting this key, which sets the positioning parameter of \cs{makebox}.
+The default value for \texttt{xhalign} is \texttt{c}, the element is centered. See \hyperref[tutex17]
+{Example~\ref*{tutex17}} for a visualization of the effects of the \texttt{xhalign} key.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+%\exPDF{webpro_titlepg} The file \texttt{webpro\_titlepg} shows the structure of the title page.
+
+\newtopic Just above the \textbf{Title Top} is a skip that can be    \aebCng[aboveTopTitleSkip]
+used to push the top down. The default value of this skip is
+\texttt{0pt}, but this can be changed through
+\cs{aboveTopTitleSkip}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{aboveTopTitleSkip\darg{\meta{skip}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\aboveTopTitleSkip{!meta(skip)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic There is one other title page parameter that effects the layout.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{topTitlePageProportion\darg{0..1}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\topTitlePageProportion{0..1}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc Place this (optional) command in the preamble.
+
+\PD The top part of the title page is enclosed in a big \cs{parbox}
+with depth set to a proportion of \cs{textheight}.
+\cs{topTitlePageProportion} is used to set this proportion. The
+argument of this command should be a number between 0 and 1,
+obviously a value of 0 makes no sense. The default value is set by
+the {\Web} package to .33, i.e., the default is
+\verb!\topTitlePageProportion{.33}!.
+
+\begin{figure}[ht]
+\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\centering\fbox{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{figures/titlepage}}
+\caption{The Title Page Layout Structure}\label{fig:titlepage1}
+\end{figure}
+
+\Ex\label{tutex17} \hyperref[fig:titlepage1]{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage1}}
+gives a representation of the page layout of the title page. The
+big \cs{parbox} of depth equal to the proportion of
+\cs{textheight} set by \cs{topTitlePage\-Proportion} is
+shown as a blue box. Each of the three top title elements are
+enclosed in a \cs{makebox}, shown in yellow.  Inside this
+\cs{makebox}, the top title elements are placed in a \cs{parbox},
+shown in gray. The image shown in
+\hyperref[fig:titlepage1]{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage1}} came about
+as a result of the following commands in the preamble:
+\begin{pCmd*}{fontsize=\small}{254pt}
+\topTitlePageProportion{.5}
+\universityLayout{halign=l,color=red}
+\titleLayout{halign=r,xhalign=r,hproportion=.4}
+\authorLayout{color=webbrown}
+\end{pCmd*}
+
+\medskip
+In \hyperref[fig:titlepage1]
+{Figure~\ref*{fig:titlepage1}}, notice that the
+\texttt{university} is left aligned within its \cs{parbox}. For
+\texttt{title}, the proportion is changed from the default of .7
+to .4, this is manifested by the shorter gray box (which
+represents the underlying \cs{parbox}); \texttt{halign} and
+\texttt{xhalign} are both set to \texttt{r}, so the title appears
+right aligned within its \cs{parbox}, and the \cs{parbox} is right
+aligned within its \cs{makebox}, understand? Finally, for the
+\texttt{author} key, we change only the color.  Swave!
+
+\subsubsection{Greater Control over Title Page Trailer}\label{trailer} \aebCng[trailer]
+
+The pro option defines the command \Com{DesignTitlePageTrailer} that takes a
+number of key-value pairs to describe the title page trailer. The use of this
+command is not needed unless you want something in the trailer other than the default
+information.\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{DesignTitlePageTrailer\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\DesignTitlePageTrailer{KV-pairs}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\KVP The key-value pairs are described below:
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item \texttt{ul}: The text in the upper left corner of the trailer, the default is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\web@copyright\ \web@copyright@symbol\
+    \webcopyrightyears\ \thewebemail
+\end{Verbatim}
+    \item \texttt{ur}: The text in the upper right corner of the trailer,
+        the default is \cs{aeb@talksite}, as defined by the \cs{talksite}
+        command or the \texttt{talksite} key of the \cs{DeclareDoc\-Info}
+        command.
+    \item \texttt{ll}: The text in the lower left corner of the trailer,
+        the default is \cs{aeb@Prepared}, as defined by the \cs{prepared}
+        command or the \texttt{prepared} key of the \cs{De\-clare\-Doc\-Info}
+        command.
+    \item \texttt{lr}: The text in the lower right corner of the trailer,
+        the default is \cs{webversion}, as defined by the \cs{version}
+        command, by the \texttt{version} key, or by the \texttt{talkdate} key.
+        If \texttt{version} and \texttt{talkdate} both have values,
+        \texttt{talkdate} is used.
+    \item \texttt{textColor}: The default color of the text. The default is black.
+    \item \texttt{bgColor}: The background of the trailer. This is a named color. The default is there is no color.
+    \item \texttt{borderColor}: The border color of the trailer. This is a named color. If specified, then
+    \texttt{bgColor} must have a named color too, otherwise, this
+    key does nothing. The default is that there is no border color.
+    \item \texttt{fboxsep}: The previous two keys use \cs{colorbox} and \cs{fcolorbox}. You can adjust
+        the parameters \cs{fboxsep} through this key. The default is 3pt.
+    \item \texttt{fboxrule}: The width of the rule created when there are values for
+    \texttt{bgColor} and for \texttt{borderColor}. This key sets the value of \cs{fboxrule}. The default
+    is .4pt.
+    \item \texttt{graphic}: The value of this key is the base name of a graphic to be used as the background
+    of the trailer. The graphic is rescaled to the width and the height of the trailer. It also reduces
+    \cs{linewidth} so that the text is \cs{fboxsep} from the borders. The default is no graphic.
+    If the key graphic is specified, then \texttt{bgColor} and \texttt{borderColor} are ignored.
+
+    \item[] If the \textsf{graphicxbox} package is loaded, AeB uses this package to place the graphic.
+    In this case, the \texttt{borderColor} key is obeyed; whereas, it is not obeyed without the
+    \textsf{graphicxbox} package.
+
+    \item \texttt{namedgraphic}: This key requires the use of \textsf{graphicxsp}, and Acrobat Distiller.
+    Use \textsf{graphicxsp} to embed a graphic and give it a symbolic name \anglemeta{mygraphic}.
+    If you then say \texttt{namedgraphic=\anglemeta{mygraphic}}, the graphic is used without re-embedding the graphic.
+    The advantage of this method is that the graphic can be used and re-used in the document, without
+    significantly increasing file size.
+
+    \item[] If the \textsf{graphicxbox} package is loaded, AeB uses this package to place the named graphic.
+    In this case, the \texttt{borderColor} key is obeyed; whereas, it is not obeyed without the
+    \textsf{graphicxbox} package.
+
+    \item \texttt{raise}: A key that takes a dimension as its value. The trailer will be raised or
+    lowered by the amount specified. For example, \texttt{raise=-10pt} lowers the trailer 10pt from its natural
+    position.
+
+    \item \texttt{fontSize}: Set the font size of the text, the default is \cs{footnotesize}. This key
+    simply redefines \cs{trailerFontSize}.
+
+    \item \texttt{formatting}: Any additional formatting you wish
+    that does not cause trouble; for example,
+    \verb!formatting=\bfseries!.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{The Table of Contents}
+
+The pro option also defines \Com{tocLayout} for controlling the
+title of the table of contents.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{tocLayout\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\tocLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The key-value pairs are the same as layout commands for the section titles, see
+\mlNameref{secHead}.
+
+\CmdLoc Place this command in the preamble.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{selectTocDings\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\selectTocDings{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic When the \cs{noSectionNumbers} command is used (\Nameref{secHead}), the entries in the table of
+contents have no section number.  You can define a ding for each of the three
+levels of the table of contents with this command. The key-value entries in the
+\cs{selectTocDings} command are ignored if \cs{noSectionNumbers} is not in effect.
+
+\CmdLoc Place this (optional) command in the preamble.
+
+\KVP The following are the recognized key-value pairs:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{dDing}: The ding for the first (section) level entry.\\Example,
+\verb!dDing=\ding{072}!.
+\item \texttt{ddDing}: The ding for the second (subsection) level entry.
+\item \texttt{dddDing}: The ding for the third (subsubsection) level entry.
+\item \texttt{dDingColor}: The (named) color for the ding of the first level entry. The default is red.
+\item \texttt{ddDingColor}: The (named) color for the ding of the first level entry. The default is blue.
+\item \texttt{dddDingColor}: The (named) color for the ding of the first level entry. The default is webgreen.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{Selecting Colors}\label{designColor}
+
+The \cs{selectColors} command can be used to set the color of most all elements of
+the document that have a color attribute.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{selectColors\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\selectColors{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc There are no restrictions on this command.  In the preamble,
+it will set the defaults for the entire document.
+
+\KVP Each of the following keys take a named color. Many of these keys have a
+command interface as well, these are also noted.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item  \texttt{universityColor}: The color of the value of the \cs{university}
+    declaration (refer to page~\pageref{docinfo}). The value of
+    \cs{university} appears on the title page. The default is blue.
+\item  \texttt{titleColor}: The color of the value of the \cs{title} declaration
+    (see page~\pageref{docinfo}).
+    The value of \cs{title} appears on the title page. The default is black.
+\item  \texttt{authorColor}: The color of the value of the \cs{author} declaration
+    (see page~\pageref{docinfo}).
+    The value of \cs{author} appears on the title page. The default is black.
+\item  \texttt{textBgColor}: The background color of the text screen. The default is white.
+\item  \texttt{panelBgColor}: The background color of the navigation panel. The default is white.
+\item  \texttt{urlColor}: The color of an \textsf{URL} link. The default is webbrown.
+\item  \texttt{linkColor}: The color of a link. The default is webgreen.
+\item  \texttt{fileColor}: The color of a link to a local file. The default is webbrown.
+\end{enumerate}
+There are several other colors as well, these can be set through their interface, see
+\hyperref[secHead]{Section~\ref*{secHead}}, page~\pageref*{secHead}, for a discussion of
+the commands \cs{sectionLayout}, \cs{sub\-sec\-iion\-Layout} and \cs{sub\-sub\-sec\-tion\-Layout}.
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates this command.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates this command.
+
+
+\subsection{Section Headings}\label{secHead}
+
+The {\Web} package uses the section heading commands \cs{section}, \cs{subsection}, and \cs{sub\-sub\-section}, but the
+\texttt{extended} option modifies their definitions so that the document author can easily design how the section titles
+look.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{noSectionNumbers}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\noSectionNumbers
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic The command \Com{noSectionNumbers} causes {\Web} to remove the usual
+numbering system for a {\LaTeX} document.  This may be useful when
+preparing a document for presentation, and a numbering system is not
+needed. The default is to use section numbers.
+
+\CmdLoc The use of this command is restricted to the preamble. The
+decision must be made for the whole document at the beginning of the
+document.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{subsubsectionLayout\darg{\meta{KV-pairs}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\sectionLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\subsectionLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\subsubsectionLayout{!meta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\CmdLoc No restriction on the use of this command. In the preamble, you set the layout
+for sections for the whole document. In the body of the document, changes occur immediately
+starting with the next relevant section.
+
+\KVP Each of these takes the same key-value pairs.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{fontfamily}: Font family to use for section titles,
+    permitted values are \texttt{rmfamily}, \texttt{sffamily}, \texttt{ttfamily}.
+\item \texttt{fontseries}: Font series to use for the section title, values are \texttt{bfseries} and
+    \texttt{mdseries}.
+\item \texttt{fontshape}: Font shapes to use for the section title, values are \texttt{upshape}, \texttt{itshape},
+    \texttt{scshape}, \texttt{slshape}.
+\item \texttt{fontsize}: Font size of the section title, permissible values are \texttt{tiny}, \texttt{scriptsize},
+\texttt{foot\-note\-size}, \texttt{small}, \texttt{normalsize}.
+    \texttt{large}, \texttt{Large}, \texttt{LARGE}, \texttt{huge}, \texttt{Huge}.
+\item \texttt{halign}: Alignment of the section title, permissible
+    values are \texttt{l} (left aligned), \texttt{c} (centered), \texttt{r} (right aligned).
+\item \texttt{ding}: You can specify a ding to display where the section number is usually placed; e.g.,
+    \verb+ding=\ding{066}+.
+
+\item \texttt{color}: The color of the section title, this can be any named color. The default is blue.
+
+\item \texttt{special}: Through this key, you can a specify predefined layout for the section titles. Permissible
+    values are \texttt{shadow}, \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox},
+    \texttt{frame\-box\-fit}, \texttt{color\-box\-fit}, \texttt{fcolorbox\-fit}, \texttt{custom}, \texttt{default}.
+
+\item[] Custom section heads can be used by specifying a value of \texttt{custom}. In this
+    case, {\Web} uses the values of \Com{customSecHead}, \Com{custom\-Sub\-sec\-Head} and
+    \Com{custom\-Sub\-sub\-sec\-Head}. Each of these macros take one argument, the code for designing
+    the title. The title is referred to as \texttt{\#1}. Depending on how these custom section titles
+    are defined, the other keys may not be obeyed.
+
+%    See an \hyperref[customHeadEx]
+%    {Example~\ref*{customHeadEx}} below; there are other examples in the demo files.
+
+\item \texttt{framecolor}: The color of the frame surrounding the subject when the \texttt{special}
+    key has a value of \texttt{framebox}, \texttt{fcolorbox} \texttt{frameboxfit} or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{bgcolor}: The background (fill color) of the box enclosing the section title, when
+    \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{colorbox}, \texttt{fcolorbox}, \texttt{colorboxfit}
+    or \texttt{fcolorboxfit}.
+
+\item \texttt{shadowcolor}: The color of the shadow, when \texttt{special} has a value of \texttt{shadow}.
+
+\item \texttt{beforeskip}: The amount of skip before the section title.
+
+\item \texttt{afterskip}: The amount of skip after the section title.
+
+\item \texttt{usefont}: Through this key it is possible to specify
+an arbitrary font and font size. The key takes five parameters, for
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+usefont={OT1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{{16}{16pt}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first
+four are the arguments of the {\LaTeX}'s \cs{usefont}, encoding,
+family, series and shape. The last argument are the arguments of the
+{\LaTeX}'s \cs{fontsize}, size and baselineskip.
+
+\item[] If the fifth parameter is empty, no font size is specified, the current default sizes are used.
+
+\item \texttt{numdingcolor}: The color of the section number or ding, if defined. The default is blue.
+
+\item \texttt{reset}: This key attempts to reset changes to their defaults. Permissible values are
+    \texttt{font} (to reset the font changes only), or \texttt{all} (to reset all the keys).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\Ex\label{tutex7} The following example sets the section
+title with shadows: text is red and shadow is blue. We center the
+title horizontally, and specify an after skip of \texttt{12pt}.
+\begin{dCmd*}{.5\linewidth}
+\sectionLayout{%
+    afterskip=12pt,
+    halign=c,
+    color=red,
+    shadowcolor=blue,
+    special=shadow
+}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\noindent Similarly for \Com{subsectionLayout} and \Com{subsubsectionLayout}.
+
+% \expoint{ex7} Use \texttt{apb\_ex7.tex} to explore the section layout commands.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{subsubsectionLayout\darg{\meta{length}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\shadowhoffset{!meta(length)}
+\shadowvoffset{!meta(length)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic When \texttt{$\text{special} = \text{shadow}$}, shadowing is
+obtained by typesetting the text twice with different colors. The
+amount of horizontal and vertical offset are controlled by these two
+commands. The defaults are \verb!\shadowhoffset{.2ex}! and
+\verb!\shadowvoffset{-.2ex}!.
+
+\newtopic The interface for writing custom section layouts are the following three
+commands.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{customSubsubsecHead\darg{\anglemeta{tex\_code}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\customSecHead{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\customSubsecHead{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\customSubsubsecHead{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\CmdLoc Use in the preamble or before a section head.
+
+\PD These three commands are used to write custom section,
+subsection and subsubsection layouts. Here, the parameter \anglemeta{tex\_code} is
+{\TeX} code for laying out the section titles, and should use
+\texttt{\#1} to represent the section title.
+
+\Ex\label{customHeadEx} The following definitions can appear
+anywhere, they are global unless appearing in a group.
+This puts a colored box around the section title, which
+is assumed to appear in one line. We use the internal color names
+for the \texttt{color} (\cs{aeb@sectioncolor}) and \texttt{bgcolor}
+(\cs{aeb@sectionbgcolor}) keys, in this way, the title will obey the
+values of these keys. This particular custom head obeys the
+\texttt{halign} key as well.
+\begin{dCmd*}{\linewidth}
+\makeatletter
+\customSecHead{\vbox{\colorbox{\aeb@sectionbgcolor}
+    {\color{\aeb@sectioncolor}#1}}}
+\sectionLayout{%
+    special=custom,
+    halign=l,
+    bgcolor=red,
+    color=white
+}
+\makeatother
+\end{dCmd*}
+\noindent The above code is a simplified version of the \texttt{colorboxfit},
+a value of the \texttt{special} key.
+
+%\exPDF{web_pro} The demo file \texttt{web\_pro} illustrates these commands.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1112} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1112}{web\_pro.pdf}}
+illustrates these commands.
+
+%\expoint{ex7} See \texttt{apb\_ex7.tex} for a working example of custom section
+%head layout.
+
+%\Important It is important to remark that between slides \texttt{@}
+%is made into a `letter', and reset to `other' at the beginning of
+%the next slide. This makes it convenient to make these definitions
+%between slides. In the preamble, however, such a definition must be
+%between  \cs{makeatletter} and \cs{makeatother}.
+
+\section{On Parts, Chapters, and Final Dots}\label{partsChaptersDots}
+
+The {\Web} package has several commands for customizing the \cs{part} and
+\cs{chapter} commands.
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{part}}{\CMD{part}} command}
+
+The appearance of the part title can be controlled by \cs{formatPartTitle}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{customSubsubsecHead\darg{\anglemeta{tex\_code}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\formatPartTitle{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\noPartNumbers
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The argument of \anglemeta{tex\_code} consists of formatting commands; within the
+argument \texttt{\#1} represents the title.  The command \cs{noPartNumbers}
+is a convenience macro to turn off all part number, if you want to create
+a document that has no part numbers, such as this document.
+
+The default argument for \cs{formatPartTitle}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\large\bfseries
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+   \partname~\thepart:\space
+\fi#1
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic This typesets as {\large\bfseries Part I: The Web Package}, for example. You can
+modify the basic definition to introduce colors, fonts, sizes of your choice, and
+even special effects; for example, the declaration
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\formatPartTitle{\fbox{\large\bfseries
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+   \partname~\thepart:\space
+\fi#1}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+gives a part title like this, {\large\bfseries\fbox{Part I: The Web Package}}
+
+\newtopic
+A companion comment for changing the format of a part title, is \cs{tocPartTitle},
+which modifies how the part title appears in the table of contents.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{tocPartTitle\darg{\cs{thepart}\cs{hspace\darg{1em}\#1}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\tocPartTitle{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\tocPartTitle{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic Again, within the argument of \cs{tocPartTitle}, \texttt{\#1} refers to the
+text of the part title. The default definition is given above also.
+
+\redpoint Finer control over the formatting of the \cs{part} command can be obtained by redefining
+\cs{web@makeparthead} or \cs{web@makesparthead}, the latter one for \cs{part*}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{chapter}}{\CMD{chapter}} command}
+
+The \cs{chapter} command is available in the \texttt{book} and \texttt{report} classes.
+There are several defined in the {\Web} package for getting a little control over these.
+
+
+\long\def\formatChapterNumber#1{\def\web@formatChapterNumber{#1}}
+\formatChapterNumber{\large\bfseries
+    \@chapapp\space\thechapter\par\nobreak}
+\long\def\formatChapterTitle#1{\def\web@formatChapterTitle##1{#1}}
+\formatChapterTitle{%
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \noindent\hspace{1em}\large\bfseries#1\par\nobreak
+}
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{formatChapterNumber\darg{\anglemeta{tex\_code}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\formatChapterNumber{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\formatChapterTitle{!anglemeta(tex_code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic The argument of \ameta{tex\_code} consists of formatting commands; within the
+argument \texttt{\#1} represents the title.
+
+The default definitions for these are
+
+\begin{dCmd*}{.85\linewidth}
+\formatChapterNumber{\large\bfseries
+    \@chapapp\space\thechapter\par\nobreak}
+\formatChapterTitle{%
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \noindent\hspace{1em}\large\bfseries#1\par\nobreak
+}
+\end{dCmd*}
+\newtopic These are slighly modified versions of what is found in \texttt{book.cls}.
+
+\redpoint A finer control can be obtained over the \cs{chapter} command
+formatting by redefining \cs{web@makechapterhead} or
+\cs{web@makeschapterhead}, the latter one is used for \cs{chapter*}.\endredpoint
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{noFinalDot}}{\CMD{noFinalDot}} Command}\label{nofinaldot}
+
+The default behavior for the {\Web} package is to place a dot (.) at the end of the section
+number in both the body of the document and in the table of contents. Thus,
+this section is numbered as \textcolor{blue}{\ref*{nofinaldot}.} (note the final dot following
+the section number). This section will appear in the table of contents the same way. The default
+behavior of all (that I know of) standard {\LaTeX} classes is not to place this final
+dot (.) at the end of the section number. To revert to this behavior, use the
+\Com{noFinalDot} command in the preamble.
+
+%---------------------- Exerquiz -----------------------------------%
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{%
+    \par\vskip6pt\vskip0pt plus .25\vsize\penalty-1000 \vskip0pt plus-.25\vsize}
+
+%\addtocontents{toc}{\par\protect\vspace{\bigskipamount}\kern0pt\vspace{-\medskipamount}}
+\part{The Exerquiz Package}\label{s:exerquiz}
+
+%The \textsf{exerquiz} package contains a series of macros for
+%creating on-line exercises, short quizzes (with or without
+%solutions), and longer quizzes that are graded using JavaScript.
+
+%\section{Overview}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package provides environments for creating
+the following interactive elements in a \textsf{PDF} file.
+
+\begingroup
+\def\mylabel#1{\hfil\hyperref[#1]{\large$\bullet$}\ }
+\begin{list}{}
+{\usecounter{questionno}\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\makelabel}{\mylabel}
+\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\normalfont\bfseries00.\ }%
+\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}}%
+
+\item[ss:online] \begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:online}\end{NoHyper}:
+Macros for creating on-line exercises.
+
+\item[ss:QuizIR] \begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:QuizIR}\end{NoHyper}:
+Macros for creating interactive quizzes with immediate feedback.
+
+
+%\item[ss:QuizS] \begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:QuizS}\end{NoHyper}:
+%Macros for creating quizzes with immediate feedback
+%and a link to the solutions to the quizzes.
+
+\item[ss:GradedQuizzes]
+\begin{NoHyper}\nameref{ss:GradedQuizzes}\end{NoHyper}:
+Macros for creating quizzes graded by Java\-Script, with an option
+to have the quizzes corrected using JavaScript.
+
+\end{list}
+\endgroup
+
+\noindent In each of the quiz environments, you can pose multiple
+choice, math fill-in, or text fill-in questions.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} provides the above listed environments for
+the \texttt{dvips\-one}, \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{textures}, \texttt{pdftex} (including
+lua(la)tex), \texttt{dvipdfm}, \texttt{dvipdfmx}, and \texttt{xetex} options. The package
+automatically detects \textsf{pdftex} and \textsf{xetex}, and passes the driver name to
+all subordinate packages, \textsf{eforms} and \textsf{insdljs}.
+
+There are options for reformatting the exercises to a print
+format,  for excluding the solutions to the exercises, for writing
+the solutions to the exercises so they follow the question, and
+for different languages, and much more.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} also allows you to rearrange the order and
+location of the solutions to the exercises and quizzes,  to
+redefine many running headers, to customize the exercises and
+quizzes, and to use the \texttt{exercise} environment to create
+a new environment with its own counter, or with no counter at all.
+
+All the above mentioned macros and the options of the package are
+discussed in this section.
+
+\section{\protect\textsf{Exerquiz} and Acrobat JavaScript}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} now uses the \textsf{insdljs} Package to insert
+Document level Java\-Scripts into the \textsf{PDF} file. The quizzes
+created using the \texttt{shortquiz} or \texttt{quiz} environment are
+graded, marked and scored using these inserted JavaScript functions.
+
+Because the package \textsf{insdljs} is already loaded, it is easy
+for the document author to develop JavaScripts that can be called
+from the standard \textsf{Exerquiz} commands. The ability to write
+JavaScript, therefore, right in the \LaTeX{} document gives a
+unique programming flair to \textsf{Exerquiz}.
+
+\section{Package Requirements}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package is independent of the \pkg{web}
+package;  however, \textsf{exerquiz} utilizes \pkg{hyperref}
+just as \pkg{web} does.  Use the latest version of
+\pkg{hyperref}.  In addition to the \textsf{color} package,
+also used by \pkg{web}, \textsf{exerquiz} also uses the
+\textsf{verbatim} package. This is used to write verbatim
+solutions to exercises and quizzes to certain auxiliary files.
+
+Results from the quizzes created by the \texttt{shortquiz} and
+\texttt{quiz} environments are evaluated using document level
+JavaScripts. These JavaScripts are inserted into the final
+\textsf{PDF} file using the \textsf{insdljs} package. This package
+makes it easy for the package writer or document author to write
+JavaScripts.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package uses \emph{form features} of
+\textsf{PDF} that \pkg{web} does not use. For the interactive
+features to properly work, use \textcolor{blue}{Adobe Reader
+5.0} or higher.
+
+\section{Basic Package Options}\label{ss:exbasicusage}
+
+Place in the preamble of your document
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint to use \textsf{exerquiz} with the \pkg{web} package, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(web_options)]{web}
+\usepackage[!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+A complete list of the options recognized by \textsf{exerquiz} can be
+found in \hyperref[s:ListofOpts]{Section~\ref*{s:ListofOpts}}, page~\pageref*{s:ListofOpts}; they are
+also discussed below.
+
+The driver options for the \pkg{web} package are \texttt{dvipsone},
+\texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex}, \texttt{dvipdfm} and \texttt{textures}.
+No driver option with \textsf{exerquiz} is needed if you are using the
+\pkg{web} package,  \textsf{exerquiz} inherits the driver option from
+the \pkg{web} package.
+
+For the \texttt{dvipdfm} option to work properly you
+will need \textsf{dvipdfm}, version 0.12.7b or later, and
+\pkg{hyperref}, version 6.68a or later.
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz} with
+\texttt{dvips}, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[dvips,!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[dvips,!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz} with
+\texttt{pdftex} or \texttt{xetex}, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Both \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{exerquiz} automatically detect the \app{pdflatex}
+and \app{xelatex} applications so specification of the driver is not required.
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz} with
+any other driver, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(eq_options)]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+the \meta{driver} for both \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{exerquiz}.
+
+\redpoint To use \pkg{hyperref} and \textsf{exerquiz}, specify,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[!meta(pdfs_options)]{pdfscreen}
+\usepackage{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\makebox[0pt][r]{\raisebox{-2pt}{\color{red}\href{{\bUrl/tutorial/webeq/eq_pdfs.zip}}{{\zqacr
+    b\hspace{9.5pt}}}}\enspace}\ignorespaces
+See the sample file \texttt{eq\_pdfs.tex} already set up for use
+with \textsf{pdfscreen}, obtained by downloading the zipped file
+\texttt{\href{\bUrl/tutorial/webeq/eq_pdfs.zip}{eq\_pdfs.zip}}.
+
+
+\paragraph*{Some \app{xetex} issues.}
+In recent versions of \app{xetex}, the application may be set to strip out
+named destinations that are not referenced within the document as a target of
+a `hard-wired' link; this is an optimization feature. The \pkg{exerquiz}
+package sets a lot of destinations (or targets) but, in some instances,
+`dynamic' links are employed using the JavaScript method
+\texttt{\textsl{Doc}.gotoNamedDest(\anglemeta{target})}. In such instances,
+\app{xetex} may strip out these targets; the link or button action may not
+perform the jump to the destination because the destination does not exist.
+If this becomes an issue for your \app{xetex} installation, the
+\textbf{\app{Dvipdfmx} Compatibility Flags} needs to be modified. Search for
+the configuration file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg} and open the file. Scroll down
+to the line `\texttt{\%C  0x0000}', beneath it insert `\texttt{C  0x0010}',
+save and close the file.\footnote{MiK\TeX{} discourages the direct editing of
+the file \texttt{dvipdfmx.cfg}, instead, execute the line of code
+`\texttt{initexmf -{}-edit-config-file dvipdfmx}' at the \app{Windows}
+command-line prompt, and edit a local version of the configuration file as
+described above.} The documentation for this bit field is just above the
+referenced line and an explanation of the `\texttt{C 0x0010}' setting is
+given.
+
+
+\begin{comment}
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{pdftex}}{pdftex}
+Option}\label{ss:pdftexerquiz}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package is independent of the \pkg{web}
+package.  Therefore, you can create your own page layout package
+and use \textsf{exerquiz} to help you create exercises and
+quizzes. Of course, \pkg{hyperref} must be used.
+
+%\redpoint Using \textsf{exerquiz} with \pkg{hyperref} or
+%\textsf{pdfscreen}
+
+Should you want to use the \textsf{exerquiz} package using
+\textsf{pdftex} without the \pkg{web} package, use the
+\texttt{pdftex} option:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[pdftex,<more options>]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In particular,
+\textsf{pdfscreen}\footnote{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/pdfscreen},
+a screen design package written for \textsf{pdftex} by C. V.
+Radhakrishnan, has been tested and works correctly with
+\textsf{exerquiz}.  For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[screen,article,sidebar]{pdfscreen}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the sample file \texttt{eq\_pdfs.tex} already set up for use
+with \textsf{pdfscreen}, obtained by downloading the zipped file
+\texttt{\href{\bUrl/tutorial/webeq/eq_pdfs.zip}{eq\_pdfs.zip}}.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{dvipdfm} Option}\label{ss:dvipdfm}
+
+Should you want to use the \textsf{exerquiz} package without
+the \pkg{web} package, in this case, the usage is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[dvipdfm,<more_options>]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[dvipdfm]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\subsection{The \texttt{dvi\-windo} Option}\label{ss:dviwindo}
+%
+%Beginning with version 1.3 of \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz},
+%\textsf{dviwindo} (the \texttt{.dvi} previewer by
+%\href{http://www.yandy.com/}{\Y&Y, Inc.}) is supported.  This
+%means that hypertext links will be active from within the
+%\textsf{dviwindo} previewer---as well as from within the Adobe
+%Reader after the file has been converted to \textsf{pdf}.
+%
+%Should you want to use the \textsf{exerquiz} package without
+%the \pkg{web} package, in this case, the usage is
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%   \usepackage[dviwindo,<more_options>]{hyperref}
+%   \usepackage[dviwindo]{exerquiz}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint \textbf{\textcolor{red}{Important Note:}} \emph{Only}
+the \texttt{exercise} environment (this is the material described in
+\hyperref[ss:online]{Section~\ref*{ss:online}}) is supported by
+these two options.  None of the quiz environments can be used with
+these two options at this time. \Y&Y{} users need to use the
+\texttt{dvipsone} option if the quiz environment is needed.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{The Language Option}\label{sss:exerquizlangopts}
+
+The \hyperref[web:langopts]{language option}, available in the
+\pkg{web} package, can be invoked even when the \pkg{web} package is
+not used.\footnote{Otherwise, the language option is introduced as an
+option of the \pkg{web} package.} Currently, language options supported are
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{tabular}{lll}
+\texttt{dutch}   & \texttt{french} & \texttt{german}\\
+\texttt{italian} & \texttt{norsk}  & \texttt{russian}\\
+\texttt{spanish} & \texttt{dansk}  & \texttt{polish}\\
+\texttt{finnish} & \texttt{czech}  & \texttt{catalan}\\
+\texttt{brazil}  & \texttt{turkish}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+For example, with \pkg{hyperref}, you could use:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),french]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\meta{driver} is any of the supported drivers.
+
+\redpoint\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Unicode required for \texttt{turkish} and \texttt{russian} options:}} When using the
+\texttt{turkish} or the \texttt{russian} option, without using the \pkg{web}
+package, use the \texttt{unicode} option for \pkg{hyperref}, like so,\footnote{The
+\pkg{web} package passes the \texttt{unicode} option to
+\pkg{hyperref} when using the \texttt{turkish} or \texttt{russian} option through the \pkg{web}
+option list so there is no need to explicitly use the \texttt{unicode}
+option.}\def\1{\hspace*{-\amtIndent}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options),unicode]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),turkish]{exerquiz}
+!1or
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),russian]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent This is because the word for ``Table of Contents'' is ``{\.I}{\c
+%c}indekiler'' in Turkish. For {\.I}\c{c}indekiler to appear
+%correctly in the bookmarks, hyperref needs the \texttt{unicode}
+%option.\footnote{The glyph {\.I} (latin capital letter I with dot above) is in the Latin Extended-A group,
+%unicode \texttt{U+0130}.}
+
+\subsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forpaper{\protect\normalfont\protect\space and }forcolorpaper}}{forpaper and
+forcolorpaper}
+ Options}\label{sss:exquizforpaper}
+
+The \texttt{forpaper} or \texttt{forcolorpaper} option, also available in the
+\textsf{\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{web}} package, is needed in the
+\textsf{exerquiz} package if you are are using \textsf{exerquiz}
+without \pkg{web}.  The option is invoked in the usual way.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),!meta(hy_options)]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[!meta(driver),forpaper]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the discussion of the \texttt{\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{forpaper}} on
+page~\pageref{sss:webforpaper} given earlier.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{preview} Option}\label{sss:preview}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package can generate a large number of form
+fields: buttons, check boxes, radio buttons, and text fields. These
+are PDF objects and cannot be seen in a dvi previewer.  By using
+the \texttt{preview} option, the bounding rectangles of the form
+objects are surrounded with rules, which outline the form fields
+and make their positions visible.
+
+This option may help you to fine tune the positions of the form
+fields. The option is for developmental use only. When you are
+satisfied with the positioning and are ready to publish, remove
+this option.
+
+\redpoint This option is not useful with the \texttt{pdftex} option, as
+\textsf{pdftex} does not (normally) produce a dvi file.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{nodljs} Option}\label{sss:nodljs}
+
+If you are creating a document that is meant to be printed or your
+document only has exercises and solutions in it (which do not
+require JavaScript), the size of the document can be reduced
+significantly by using the \texttt{nodljs} option. This option is
+just passed on to the \textsf{insdljs} package.
+
+% \subsubsection{The \texttt{acrobativ} Option}\label{sss:acrobativ}
+%
+% If the document author is using the \texttt{dvips} or the \texttt{dvipsone} option
+% but has only Acrobat~4.0 or~4.05, then the document level JavaScripts need
+% to be inserted manually. Therefore, we need to turn off the automatic inclusion of JavaScript.
+% This option does exactly that; it is equivalent to the \texttt{nodljs} option.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{exercisesonly} Option}\label{sss:noquizzes}
+
+If the document author only uses the \texttt{exercise} environment, then all
+the document level JavaScripts of \texttt{exerquiz} are not needed.  Use either
+one of these two equivalent options to exclude the insertion of the JavaScripts.
+
+This is a convenience option that simply calls the \texttt{nodljs} option described above.
+
+\begin{comment}
+\subsection{The \texttt{de\-bug} Option}\label{sss:debug}
+
+Developing JavaScript functions can be tricky. Quite often, it is
+useful to insert some code lines that will help you in debugging a
+particular function or a set of functions. For example, you might
+want to verify that the parameters being passed to a function are
+the correct ones, or that the return value is correct. You can
+have Acrobat write the values to its console like so:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+console.println("Function myFunc");
+console.println("Parameters: x = " x + ", y = " + y );
+console.println("Return Value: retnValue = " + retnValue);
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In the above code, I have used the
+\texttt{console.println()} method, which is only available in the
+Acrobat application, not the Reader. For the Reader,  one could
+use \texttt{app.alert()}, but this method is not well-suited for
+monitoring values of a large number variables as the script
+executes. If you don't have the full Acrobat, the \texttt{debug}
+option will not be useful.
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} just passes this option on to the
+\textsf{insdljs} package. Additional details on the debug option
+can be found there. Within the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, you
+can place debugging code lines as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+function myFunc(x,y)
+{
+    retnValue = x + y;
+\db console.println("Function myFunc");\db%
+\db console.println("Parameters: x = " x + ", y = " + y );\db%
+\db console.println("Return Value: retnValue = " + retnValue);\db%
+    return retnValue;
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Any line that begins with \cs{db} and ends with \cs{db} is a
+debugging line. These lines will be included if the \texttt{debug} option
+is taken; otherwise they are removed. The `\texttt{\%}', is
+the comment character within the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, and prevents,
+in this case, the introduction of a carriage return.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{allowrandomize} Option}\label{ss:allowrandomize}
+
+Use this option to load in the macros to randomize the choices
+of a multiple choice question. See \hyperref[s:random]{Section~\ref*{s:random}},
+\Nameref{s:random} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{unicode} Option}\label{eq:unicode}
+
+This option is passed to \pkg{hyperref}, and is placed in {\Web} as a
+convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded, \textsf{eforms} (and
+\textsf{exerquiz}) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional argument
+of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual}
+for details.\footnote{eforms manual on Web: \url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}\edef\fnEForms{\thefootnote}
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{useui} Option}\label{eq:useui}
+
+This option is passed to \textsf{eforms}, and is placed in {\Web} as
+a convenience. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+\textsf{eforms} loads the \pkg{xkeyval} package, and key-value pairs are
+defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.${}^\text{\fnEForms}$
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{usesumrytbls} Option}\label{eq:usesumrytbls}
+
+When this option is taken, the code for creating quiz summary tables is input.
+See \hyperref[s:sumrytbl]{Section~\ref*{s:sumrytbl}}, page~\pageref*{s:sumrytbl} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{contsolns} Option}\label{eq:contsolns}
+
+When this option is taken, a message appears in the right running footer
+that a solution has crossed the page boundary and that the solution
+continues on the next page. Further documentation can be found in
+\texttt{contsolns.pdf} in the \texttt{doc} folder, the demo file for this
+feature is \texttt{contsolns\_ex.tex}, found in the \texttt{examples}
+folder.
+
+\section{The \texttt{exercise} Environment}\label{ss:online}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package defines \texttt{exercise} and
+\texttt{solution} environments, the latter being nested inside the
+former. With these environments, you can create questions
+(exercises) with solutions. Solutions are written
+\texttt{verbatim} to the auxiliary file \cs{jobname.sol}, then
+input back in near the end of the document. A hypertext link is
+created to connect the exercise with the solution.
+
+An exercise with \hyperref[sss:exwparts]{multiple parts} can also
+be defined, with hypertext links to the solutions of the
+individual parts of the exercise.
+
+The \texttt{exercise} environment has its own counter
+(\texttt{eqexno}), but there is an \hyperref[sss:eqexno]{option}
+for using another counter, or no counter at all.  This may be
+useful for creating a numbered example environment.
+
+There is an option for placing the
+\hyperref[sss:solutionsafter]{solutions immediately after} the
+statement of the problem.  This, again, may be useful for an
+example environment where you want the solution to the example to
+follow the statement, rather than being hypertext-linked to the
+solution.
+
+Finally, there is an option for \hyperref[sss:hide]{hiding
+solutions}, in the following sense: When the hidden option is
+used, the solutions are commented out rather then being written to
+the \verb+\jobname.sol+ file. Additionally, there is a global
+option, \texttt{nohiddensolutions}; in this case, when you
+re-\LaTeX, the solutions are written to \verb+\jobname.sol+, and
+input back into the document.
+
+\subsection{Basic Usage}\label{ss:basicexer}
+
+The syntax for the \texttt{exercise} and \texttt{solution}
+environments is as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}
+Your Question.
+\begin{solution}
+The Solution to Your Question
+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Here is an example of the usage.
+
+\begin{exercise}\label{ex:int}%
+Evaluate the integral \(\displaystyle\int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx\).
+\begin{solution}
+We evaluate by \textit{integration by parts}:
+\begin{alignat*}{2}
+ \int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx &
+   = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \int x e^{2x}\,dx &&\quad
+           \text{$u=x^2$, $dv=e^{2x}\,dx$}\\&
+   = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} -
+           \left[\frac12 x e^{2x}-\int \frac12 e^{2x}\,dx\right] &&\quad
+           \text{integration by parts}\\&
+   = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \frac12 x e^{2x} + \frac12\int e^{2x}\,dx &&\quad
+           \text{$u=x^2$, $dv=e^{2x}\,dx$}\\&
+   = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \frac12 x e^{2x} + \frac14 e^{2x} &&\quad
+           \text{integration by parts}\\&
+   = \frac14(2x^2-2x+1)e^{2x} &&\quad
+           \text{simplify!}
+\end{alignat*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+The code for this is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}\label{ex:int}%
+Evaluate the integral \(\displaystyle\int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx\).
+\begin{solution}
+We evaluate by \texttt{integration by parts}:
+\begin{alignat*}{2}
+ \int x^2 e^{2x}\,dx &
+   = \frac12 x^2 e^{2x} - \int x e^{2x}\,dx &&\quad
+           \text{$u=x^2$, $dv=e^{2x}\,dx$}\\&
+... lines removed ...
+   = \frac14(2x^2-2x+1)e^{2x} &&\quad
+           \text{simplify!}
+\end{alignat*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the source file for the PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} for a complete
+listing of this exercise.
+
+
+%\noindent See the demo file \textsf{webeqtst.tex} for a complete listing of this exercise.
+
+
+\redpoint Questions and solutions are kept together \textit{\`a la
+Knuth}. The solutions are written  to the file
+\cs{jobname.sol} verbatim then input back using
+\cs{includeexersolutions}.
+
+
+\redpoint You can redefine the counter to include the section
+number.  For example, the code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\theeqexno}{\thesection.\arabic{eqexno}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent can be placed in the preamble of your document. In this
+case, the above exercise would appear as
+\textsf{Exercise~\thesection.\ref*{ex:int}}.
+
+\redpoint The usual cross-referencing mechanisms for \LaTeX, i.e.,
+using \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref}, work as expected.
+
+\medskip\noindent
+For example, the label `\verb+\label{ex:int}+' was placed
+just after the \verb+\begin{exercise}+ on the previous page. Let us now
+reference Exercise~\ref{ex:int}, on page~\pageref{ex:int}.
+\begin{quote}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+let us now reference Exercise~\ref{ex:int},
+on~\pageref{ex:int}.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{quote}
+\noindent Of course, the nicer looking variations can be done as well.
+For example, see \hyperref[ex:int]{\textsf{Exercise~\ref*{ex:int}}}.
+\begin{center}
+\verb+\hyperref[ex:int]{\textsf{Exercise~\ref*{ex:int}}}+
+\end{center}
+\noindent The \texttt*-form of \cs{ref} was used to turn off the
+redundant link creation. (\pkg{hyperref} would normally make
+the \cs{ref} macro into a link.)
+
+\redpoint An `\textsf{Exercise}' that is also a hypertext link
+appears in the default color \textcolor{webgreen}{green}; if an
+`\textsf{Exercise}' is not a link, it appears in \textcolor{blue}
+{blue}. (The word `\textsf{Exercise}' is not a link if it is an
+\hyperref[sss:exwparts]{exercise with parts}, or if the
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:nosolutions]{nosolutions}} option is used.
+Finally, if the \texttt{web} option
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{forpaper}} is used, color is
+turned off and `\textsf{Exercise}' appears in black.
+
+\redpoint\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Caveat:}} There is one problem
+you might watch for.  There is an optional argument to the
+\texttt{solution} environment. When \LaTeX{} searches the source
+looking for the optional parameter, which may not exist, it expands
+macros looking for a `\texttt['.  This causes problem when you have
+a solution that begins with a math display environment and \LaTeX{}
+prematurely expands such an environment.
+
+\begin{exercise}
+Write an equation of a line that crosses the $x$- and $y$-axes at 1.
+\begin{solution}[]
+\begin{equation*}
+\boxed{x+y=1}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+\noindent To prevent \LaTeX{} errors that will stop the compilation,
+just place the empty optional argument `\texttt{[]}' prior to the math environment. The code for
+the previous exercise is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}
+Write an equation of a line that crosses
+the $x$- and $y$-axes at 1.
+\begin{solution}[]
+\begin{equation*}
+\boxed{x+y=1}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\noindent This is only necessary if the solution \textbf{does not} begin with text.
+
+\subsubsection{Exercises with Parts: The \texttt{exercise*} Environment}\label{sss:exwparts}
+
+Beginning with version 6.07, the \texttt{exercise*} environment is used to create exercises with multiple
+parts.\footnote{For users of exerquiz, this is equivalent
+to the \texttt*-option with the \texttt{exercise} environment. The \texttt{exercise*} environment is the preferred form
+but the \texttt*-option works as before.}
+
+A companion environment to \texttt{exercise*} is the
+\texttt{parts} environment, used to enclose the multiple parts of
+the question. The \texttt{parts} environment takes one optional
+argument, the number of columns to be used. The argument must be a
+positive integer greater than 1, in this case, a tabular
+environment is used, with the number of columns equal to the
+specified argument. If no optional parameter is given, then a list
+environment is used.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise*}
+Preamble for your multi-parted question.
+\begin{parts}                 % begin listing of the parts
+\item First question.
+\begin{solution}
+Solution to first question.
+\end{solution}
+...
+...
+\item Final question.
+\begin{solution}
+Solution to the final question.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}                   % end listing of parts
+\end{exercise*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} The following exercise illustrates this option.
+This example appears in \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}}.
+
+
+%\noindent The following exercise illustrates this option. \texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.tex}}.
+
+\begin{exercise*}
+Suppose a particle is moving along the $s$-axis, and that its position
+at any time $t$ is given by $s=t^2 - 5t + 1$.
+\begin{parts}
+\item Find the velocity, $v$, of the particle at any time
+$t$.\label{item:part}
+\begin{solution}
+Velocity is the rate of change of position with respect to time. In
+symbols:
+\[
+     v = \frac{ds}{dt}
+\]
+For our problem, we have
+\[
+        v = \frac{ds}{dt} =\frac d{dt}(t^2 - 5t + 1) = 2t-5.
+\]
+The velocity at time $t$ is given by $\boxed{v=2t-5}$.
+\end{solution}
+\item Find the acceleration, $a$, of the particle at any time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+Acceleration is the rate of change of velocity with respect to time.
+Thus,
+\[
+    a = \frac{dv}{dt}
+\]
+For our problem, we have
+\[
+    a = \frac{dv}{dt} =\frac d{dt}(2t-5)=2.
+\]
+The acceleration at time $t$ is constant: $\boxed{a=2}$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+
+\noindent There is also an option for listing multi-parts questions in tabular form.
+
+%\makeatletter
+%\@ifundefined{@xtabularcr}{\let\save@@xtabularcr\@xarraycr}
+%    {\let\save@@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr}
+%\def\eq@xtabularcr{\@ifnextchar[{\save@@xtabularcr}
+%    {\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep}}%
+%\def\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep{\save@@xtabularcr[\eqparts@tabrowsep]}%
+%\def\eqe@tab@parts@rowsep{\save@@xtabularcr
+%    \noalign{\expandafter\kern\eqparts@tabrowsep}}%
+%
+%\makeatother
+
+\begin{exercise*}\relax\label{ex:tabular}
+Simplify each of the following expressions in the complex number system.
+\textit{Note}: $\bar z$ is the conjugate of $z$; $\operatorname{Re} z$ is the real
+part of $z$ and $\operatorname{Im} z$ is the imaginary part of $z$.
+
+\begin{parts}[2]
+\item $i^2$
+\begin{solution}
+$i^2 = -1$
+\end{solution}
+&
+\item $i^3$
+\begin{solution}
+$i^3 = i i^2 = -i$
+\end{solution}
+\\
+\item $z+\bar z$
+\begin{solution}
+$z+\bar z=\operatorname{Re} z$
+\end{solution}
+&
+\item $1/z$
+\begin{solution}
+$\displaystyle\frac{1}{z}=\frac{1}{z}\frac{\bar{z}}{\bar{z}}
+    =\frac{\bar{z}}{z\bar{z}}=\frac{\bar{z}}{|z|^2}$
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+
+\noindent The syntax is the same as an exercise with multiparts.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise*} % <- star indicates multipart
+Simplify each...
+\begin{parts}[2]  % <- optional argument indicates tabular
+\item $i^2$
+\begin{solution}[] $i^2 = -1$ \end{solution}
+&
+\item $i^3$ \begin{solution}[] $i^3 = i i^2 = -i$\end{solution}
+\\
+\item $z+\bar z$
+\begin{solution}[] $z+\bar z=\operatorname{Re} z$\end{solution}
+&
+...
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint This problem style does not obey the
+\texttt{solutionsafter} option. (See the section entitled
+\Nameref{sss:solutionsafter}).
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} The demo PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}}
+contains this particular example.
+
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} The sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst.tex}{webeqtst.tex}}
+%contains this particular example.
+
+\subsection{Options of the \texttt{exercise} Environment}
+
+\subsubsection{Leaving Vertical Space instead of a
+Solution}\label{sss:leavevspace}
+
+The \texttt{exercise} environment can be used for test
+construction. Initially, you may want to pose a questions and
+leave space beneath for the student to write in an answer.
+
+\newtopic The \texttt{solutions} environment has an optional parameter for
+inserting a vertical space.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}
+This is the question.
+\begin{solution}[1in]    % <-- optional vertical skip
+This is the solution.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent This vertical space only appears when the
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:nosolutions] {nosolutions}} option is in
+effect.
+
+Within the context of test construction, write the test (including
+the solutions), then publish it with the \texttt{nosolutions}
+option (leaving vertical spaces as appropriate), then publish the
+key with the \texttt{\hyperref[sss:solutionsafter]
+{solutionsafter}} option.\footnote{If \texttt{solutionsafter} and
+\texttt{nosolutions} both appear in the option list,
+\texttt{solutionsafter} overrides \texttt{nosolutions}.}
+
+\redpoint The optional parameter for the solution is ignored for
+exercises with parts having a tabular format
+(\hyperref[ex:tabular]{Example~\ref{ex:tabular}} is an example of
+a tabular multipart exercise).
+
+
+\subsubsection{Hiding some Solutions}\label{sss:hide}
+
+A subset of the solutions can be hidden by using the `\texttt{h}'
+option.  This option is an option of the \texttt{exercise}
+environment, as well as an option of \cs{item}, when there is an
+exercise with parts. For example, the following code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}[h]  % <- hide solution
+Give an example of a set that is \textit{clopen}.
+\begin{solution}
+The real number line is both closed and open in the
+usual topology of the real line.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent
+yields the following exercise.
+
+\begin{exercise}[h]  % <- hide solution
+Give an example of a set that is \textit{clopen}.
+\begin{solution}
+The real number line is both closed and open in the
+usual topology of the real line.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+Notice that there is no hypertext link to the solution; indeed,
+the solution was not even written to the \cs{jobname.sol} file.
+
+The `\texttt{h}' option works with exercises with parts as well.
+Just apply the `\texttt{h}' option to the \cs{item}:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise*}
+A particle has position $s=t^2 - 5t + 1$ at time $t$.
+\begin{parts}
+
+\item Find the velocity, $v$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$v = 2t-5$.
+\end{solution}
+
+% This solution will not be included in the solutions
+% section at the end of the document.
+\item[h] Find the acceleration, $a$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$a = 2$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The results of this code follow:
+
+\begin{exercise*}
+A particle has position $s=t^2 - 5t + 1$ at time $t$.
+\begin{parts}
+
+\item Find the velocity, $v$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$v = 2t-5$.
+\end{solution}
+
+\item[h] Find the acceleration, $a$, at time $t$.
+\begin{solution}
+$a = 2$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{parts}
+\end{exercise*}
+
+Part (a) is hypertext linked to its solution, whereas part (b) is
+blue, indicating there is no link there.
+
+\redpoint Multipart exercises in the tabular format behave the same way; use
+\cs{item[h]} to ``hide'' a solution.
+
+\redpoint There is also an `\texttt{H}' option as well. Specifying
+`\texttt{H}' also hides the solutions. See the next two sections for a discussion
+of revealing the solutions marked by either `\texttt{h}' or `\texttt{H}' to understand
+the distinction between the two.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{nohiddensolutions} Option}\label{sss:nohideopt}
+
+Hidden solutions can be included in the document by either
+removing the `\texttt{h}' option everywhere and re-\LaTeX ing, or
+by simply using the \texttt{nohiddensolutions} of
+\textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[nohiddensolutions]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent This option overrides the local `\texttt{h}' option throughout the
+document.
+
+\redpoint When the \texttt{solutionsafter} option of \textsf{exerquiz} is invoked,
+the hidden solutions are also revealed.  To keep the solutions hidden, in this case,
+you should use `\texttt{H}' option instead of `\texttt{h}'. See the next section.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{noHiddensolutions} Option}\label{sss:noHideopt}
+
+In addition to the `\texttt{h}', you can also use the `\texttt{H}'
+option with exercises. The solution will be hidden with
+`\texttt{H}', but will not be revealed when either the
+\texttt{nohiddensolutions} or the \texttt{solutionsafter}
+options are used.
+
+The `\texttt{H}' option can be overridden by using the
+\texttt{noHiddensolutions} of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[noHiddensolutions]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This option overrides the `\texttt{H}' and `\texttt{h}' options throughout
+the document.
+
+\subsubsection{The \protect\texttt{exercise} environment Counter}\label{sss:eqexno}
+
+The counter for the \texttt{exercise} environment is \texttt{eqexno},
+and will number your exercises consecutively throughout the
+document.  Should you want the counter to be reset after each
+\texttt{section}, place in the preamble of your document
+the following lines:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter
+\@addtoreset{eqexno}{section}
+\makeatother
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{nosolutions}}{nosolutions}
+Option}\label{sss:nosolutions}
+
+Some educators may initially want to post a series of exercises on the
+Web without the solutions.  Then, at a later date, repost the
+exercises with the solutions included.  For this application there
+is the \texttt{nosolutions} option for the \textsf{exerquiz}
+package.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[pdftex]{web}  % dvipsone, dvips or dvipdfm
+\usepackage[nosolutions]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent For this kind of application, it might make sense to publish the exercises
+with the \texttt{forpaper} option.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\texttt{solutions\-after}}{solutionsafter}
+Option}\label{sss:solutionsafter}
+
+For additional flexibility with how you want the solutions to the
+exercises presented, there is a \texttt{sol\-u\-tions\-af\-ter} option
+with \textsf{exerquiz}.  Should you invoke this option,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[dvipsone]{web}  % dvips or pdftex
+\usepackage[solutionsafter]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the solutions to the exercises appear just \emph{after} the
+exercise question.  For example,
+
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}
+Let $V$ be a vector space, show that the zero vector, $\mathbf 0$, is
+unique.
+\begin{solution}
+Let $\mathbf 0'$ be a vector that satisfies the axiom of being a
+zero of the vector space $V$.  We want to show $\mathbf 0=\mathbf
+0'$.  Since $\mathbf 0$ is a zero, we have $\mathbf 0 + \mathbf 0'=\mathbf
+0'$.  But we are assuming $\mathbf 0'$ is a zero vector as well,
+hence, $\mathbf 0' + \mathbf 0=\mathbf 0$.  Finally,
+\[
+   \mathbf0' = \mathbf0 + \mathbf0' = \mathbf0' + \mathbf0 = \mathbf0
+\]
+and this completes the proof.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd
+
+As you can see in the above example, the word \textit{Solution:} is typeset
+at the beginning of the solutions. The command \Com{renameSolnAfterTo} can be used
+for conveniently changing the solution after label, for example,
+\verb!\renameSolnAfterTo{\textbf{Proof:}}! changes the label to \textbf{Proof:},
+and \verb!\renameSolnAfterTo{}! produces no label. These changes will be local
+to the group in which they are made, or global of there they are not made in a group.
+
+The command \cs{resetSolnAfterToDefault} sets the label text back to
+the default. The default label is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\eq@exsolafterDefault}{\textit{Solution}:}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\newtopic The option \texttt{solutionsafter} is global; all exercises are
+typeset this way---unless you change it within the document using
+the macros \cs{SolutionsAfter} and \cs{Solutions\-At\-End}.  This
+manual was typeset without the \texttt{solutionsafter} option. The
+above example was typeset as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\SolutionsAfter  % show solution following exercise
+\begin{exercise}
+Let $V$ be a vector space, show ...
+\begin{solution}
+............
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd  % turn back on solutions at end of document
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Normally, a typical document might have all solutions at the end
+of the document (the default behavior), or all solutions following
+each exercise (\texttt{solutionsafter} option).  Mixtures of these two
+types can be obtained by using the two commands
+\cs{Solutions\-After} and \cs{Solutions\-At\-End}.
+
+\newtopic This feature might be an easy way of typsetting examples.  See the example
+in the section entitled \Nameref{sss:redesignex}.
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{solutionsafter} option has no effect on
+multipart exercises in \textit{tabular form};  I haven't been
+able to find a convenient way of displaying the solutions after
+the questions when the questions are in tabular form.\endredpoint
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the file \texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.pdf}} for examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Moving the Solution Set}
+
+The solution set, by default, comes last in the file.  You can
+move its positioning by including the command
+\cs{includeexersolutions} at any point \emph{after} the last
+exercise.  You'll note that I have moved the solutions in this
+file \emph{before} the \nameref{references} section, as indicated, for
+example, by its position in the table of contents.
+
+\subsubsection{Grouping the solutions at end}\label{ss:grpEx}
+
+Historically, solutions to exercises appearing at the end of the file
+\emph{are not grouped}. This means that a color change or a definition made
+in one solution, for example, may affect all subsequent solutions.
+
+You can now declare \cs{makeExSolnsLocalOn} or \cs{makeExSolnsLocalOff}
+anywhere in the document to turn on grouping for all exercises that follow,
+or to turn off this feature again. The default is \cs{makeExSolnsLocalOff}.
+
+
+\subsection{Redesigning the
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{exercise}}{exercise}
+Environment}\label{sss:redesignex}
+
+You can customize the \texttt{exercise} environment to suit your
+own needs.  To customize, you need to change some or all of the
+following  six commands. In the listing below, the \LaTeX{} definition
+of each follows a short description.
+\begin{questions}
+   \item \cs{exlabel}: This command expands to the name of the exercise label,
+   the default string is `Exercise'.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exlabel{Exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+   \item \cs{exlabelformat}: Typesets the exercise
+   label; use it to introduce additional type style such as
+   boldface, italic, small caps, etc.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exlabelformat{%
+      {\scshape\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+   \item \cs{exlabelsol}: Expands to the name of the exercise
+   label in the solutions section. Usually its value is the same
+   as \cs{exlabel}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exlabelsol{\exlabel}
+\end{Verbatim}
+   \item \cs{exsllabelformat}: The format of the solutions label,
+   \verb+\bfseries\exlabel+ is the default.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exsllabelformat
+  {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+   \item \cs{exrtnlabelformat}: This is the label you click on to
+   return from the solution of the exercise.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exrtnlabelformat{\exlabelsol\ \theeqexno}
+\end{Verbatim}
+   \item \cs{exsectitle}: The section title of the solutions to
+   the exercises.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exsectitle{Solutions to \exlabel s}
+\end{Verbatim}
+   \item \cs{exsecrunhead}: The running header for the solution
+   section for the exercises.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{questions}
+
+\redpoint The counter \texttt{eqexno} is used to count exercises.
+When an \texttt{exercise} environment starts, this counter is
+incremented.  The value of this counter is used in
+the definitions of \cs{exlabelformat}, \cs{exsllabelformat} and
+\cs{exrtnlabelformat}.  Still, the use of \texttt{eqexno} is
+optional; for example, you might want to state a problem just as `Special
+Exercise', without an associated exercise number.
+
+Below is an example of redefining the \texttt{exercise}
+environment.  We define a \texttt{problem} environment based on
+the \texttt{exercise} environment.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newenvironment{problem}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Problem}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+   {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{\exsectitle}
+\begin{exercise}}{\end{exercise}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newenvironment{problem}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Problem}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+   {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ \theeqexno.}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{Solutions to Problems}
+\begin{exercise}}%
+{\end{exercise}}
+
+\noindent See any standard \LaTeX{} reference on how to define a new
+environment, for example \cite{book:Goossens1}.
+
+\newtopic Here is an example of the new \texttt{problem} environment:\medskip
+
+\begin{problem}
+This is a question.
+\begin{solution}
+This is the solution.
+\end{solution}
+\end{problem}
+
+\noindent
+The code for this problem was simply:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{problem}
+This is a question.
+\begin{solution}
+This is the solution.
+\end{solution}
+\end{problem}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Two of these commands, \cs{exsllabelformat} and
+\cs{exrtnlabelformat}, must be handled with special care. Formatting such
+as \cs{textbf} or \cs{scseries} must be preceded by a \cs{noexpand}. These
+commands are written to a file, and must be prevented from expanding.
+
+When you use the \texttt{exercise} environment, the counter
+\texttt{eqexno} is automatically incremented by default.  The
+\texttt{exercise} does have an optional argument for inserting
+your own counter.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{exercise}[!ameta(ctr)]
+.......................
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Where \ameta{ctr} is a counter already defined.  This option is
+useful if you want to use the \texttt{exercise} environment to
+create a new environment with its own numbering scheme, as the
+following example illustrates.
+
+This example demonstrates how to define an \texttt{example}
+environment with its own counter. For examples, we don't want the
+solutions to appear at the end of the file, so we'll use
+the commands \cs{SolutionsAfter} and \cs{SolutionsAtEnd}.  All changes are
+local.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+% put a counter in preamble
+\newcounter{exampleno}
+\newenvironment{example}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Example}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat
+  {\textbf{\exlabel\ \theexampleno.}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}[exampleno]}%
+{\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\newcounter{exampleno}
+\newenvironment{example}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Example}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theexampleno.}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}[exampleno]}%
+{\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd}
+
+\noindent Now we simply type
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{example}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{example}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic to obtain
+
+\begin{example}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{example}
+
+\noindent The changes are local to the new \texttt{example} environment. If
+we have another exercise, we get a correctly numbered exercise.
+
+
+\begin{exercise}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{exercise}
+
+\redpoint The command \cs{exsolafter} typesets the solution label
+to the exercise in the case the \texttt{solutionsafter} option is in effect.
+The default definition of \cs{exsolafter} is `\verb+\textit{Solution}:+'.
+You can redefine it as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textit{L\"osung}:}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The command \cs{renameSolnAfterTo} is a convenience macro for changing this label.
+We can redefine the label above like so:
+This redefinition yields:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renameSolnAfterTo{\textit{L\"osung}:}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\renewenvironment{example}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Example}
+\renewcommand\exsolafter{\textit{L\"osung}:}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel\ \theexampleno. }}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\square$}
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{exercise}[exampleno]}%
+{\end{exercise}
+\SolutionsAtEnd}
+
+\begin{example}
+What is $2+2$?
+\begin{solution}
+It is well known that $2+2=4$.
+\end{solution}
+\end{example}
+
+\redpoint There is a special option to the \texttt{exercise}
+environment as well,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{exercise}[0]
+.......................
+\end{exercise}
+\end{Verbatim}
+When the optional argument is \texttt{0} rather than a counter. In
+this case, no counter is associated with the environment.  For
+example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newenvironment{project}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Project}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel. }}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+   {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ Hint:}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\begin{exercise}[0]}%
+{\end{exercise}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newenvironment{project}{%
+\renewcommand\exlabel{Project}
+\renewcommand\exlabelformat{\textbf{\exlabel. }}
+\renewcommand\exsllabelformat
+   {\noexpand\textbf{\exlabel\ Hint:}}
+\renewcommand\exrtnlabelformat{$\blacktriangleleft$}
+\renewcommand\exsecrunhead{Hints to Projects}
+\begin{exercise}[0]}%
+{\end{exercise}}
+
+\noindent Thus, we obtain,
+
+\begin{project}
+Find a shorter proof of \textsf{Fermat's Last Theorem}. Do not
+look at the project hints until you have finished the
+project.
+\begin{solution}
+There, you didn't need my help after all.
+\end{solution}
+\end{project}
+
+\noindent The code:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{project}
+Find a shorter proof of \textsf{Fermat's Last Theorem}. Do not
+look at the project hints until you have finished the project.
+\begin{solution}
+There, you didn't need my help after all.
+\end{solution}
+\end{project}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Note that the solutions are typeset at the end of the file in the
+`Solutions to Exercises' section.  At this time, there is no
+feature for sorting out these different types of environments;
+they are all \texttt{exercise} environments, which is what they are.
+
+\section{The \texttt{shortquiz} Environment}\label{ss:QuizIR}
+
+The \texttt{shortquiz} environment is used to create multiple
+choice question and math/text fill-in questions with immediate
+response. The discussion of math and text fill-in questions is
+post-phoned to \hyperref[s:oQ]{Section~\ref*{s:oQ}}, entitled
+\nameref{s:oQ}.  The environment allows redefinition to customize
+the look of your quizzes. (See
+\mlNameref{sss:redefinesq}.)
+
+% The presentation of the answers will either be in a \texttt{list}
+% or a \texttt{tabular} environment, depending on the parameter
+% \texttt{num\_cols}. (A \texttt{list} is used if \texttt{num\_col}
+% is set to~1.)
+
+\subsection{Basic Usage}\label{BasicUsage}
+
+The syntax for the environment (\texttt{tabular} version) is as
+follows:
+
+\def\T#1{\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace*{200pt}\% #1}}
+\def\1{\T{begin shortquiz}}
+\def\2{\T{begin proposed answers}}
+\def\3{\T{a wrong answer}}
+\def\4{\T{the right answer}}
+\def\5{\T{end listing of answers}}
+\def\6{\T{end shortquiz}}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+!1\begin{shortquiz}[!meta(base_name)]
+...Question goes here...
+!2\begin{answers}{!meta(num_cols)}
+...
+!3\Ans0 !anglemeta(an incorrect answer) &
+...
+!4\Ans1 !anglemeta(a correct answer) &
+...
+!5\end{answers}
+!6\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The optional \meta{base\_name} is used to build names of the form fields associated with
+this quiz; if one is not provided, a \meta{base\_name} is automatically created. The name
+must be unique to the entire document.
+
+The parameter \meta{num\_cols} is the number of
+columns you want to typeset for your multiple choice responses. The
+environment sets up a \texttt{tabular} environment if
+\meta{num\_cols} is greater than~1, and a \texttt{list}
+environment if \texttt{num\_cols} is~1.
+
+This type of quiz is suitable for asking a short series of
+question of the reader, perhaps after explaining some concept.
+Quizzes can be used to direct the reader's attention to an
+important point.
+
+\redpoint Here is an example of the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environment.  Responses are graded without comment using
+JavaScript.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Which of the following is the $\dfrac{d}{dx}{\sin(x^3)}$?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 $\sin(3x^2)$ & \Ans0 $\cos(x^3)$ & \Ans1 $3x^2\cos(x^3)$ &
+\Ans0 $3x^2\cos(3x^2)$ \\
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent The verbatim listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}         % begin shortquiz environment
+Which of the following is the $\dfrac{d}{dx}{\sin(x^3)}$?
+\begin{answers}{4}        % 4 columns of answers
+  \Ans0 $\sin(3x^2)$ &    % \Ans0 is a false answer
+  \Ans0 $\cos(x^3)$ &
+  \Ans1 $3x^2\cos(x^3)$ & % \Ans1 is the correct answer
+  \Ans0 $3x^2\cos(3x^2)$
+\end{answers}             % end answers environment
+\end{shortquiz}           % end shortquiz environment
+\end{Verbatim}
+If \texttt{num\_cols} is greater than 1, the
+\texttt{answers} sets up a \texttt{tabular} environment,
+\texttt{p\darg{\meta{width}}} to sets up the column widths. The \cs{parbox}es are
+typeset ragged right.
+
+
+\redpoint Below is a two-column example in which the posed
+alternatives are rather long.   The \texttt{answers} environment
+produces is a nicely aligned set of paragraphs.
+
+\goodbreak
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Which of the following best describes Augustin Cauchy?
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\Ans0 He developed the Calculus while his University was closed
+for the plague. &  % Newton
+\Ans0 Given credit for first using the functional notation
+$f(x)$.\\ % Euler
+\Ans0 He created the ``bell-shaped curve'' and first used the
+method of
+least squares. & % Guass
+\Ans1 He first formulated a precise
+definition of the limit and continuity of a function. \\ % Cauchy
+\Ans0 Gave a rigorous definition of the definite integral---an
+integral
+that now bears his name. & % Riemann
+\Ans0 His notation for the derivative and the integral is used
+even to this day. % Leibniz
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent Here is the same example in which the \texttt{num\_cols} is set
+to~1; in this case, a \texttt{list} environment is used.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Which of the following best describes Augustin Cauchy?
+\begin{answers}{1}
+\Ans0 He developed the Calculus while his University was closed
+for the plague.   % Newton
+\Ans0 Given credit for first using the functional notation
+$f(x)$. % Euler
+\Ans0 He created the ``bell-shaped curve'' and first used the
+method of
+least squares.  % Guass
+\Ans1 He first formulated a precise
+definition of the limit and continuity of a function.  % Cauchy
+\Ans0 Gave a rigorous definition of the definite integral---an
+integral
+that now bears his name.  % Riemann
+\Ans0 His notation for the derivative and the integral is used
+even to this day. % Leibniz
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst} {webeqtst.tex}} for
+%examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\newtopic\indent The space between the label and the text of a multiple
+choice question change be adjusted using two commands,
+\Com{setMClabelsep} and \Com{resetMClabelsep}. The default
+horizontal space between the label and text is a hard space `\verb!\ !'.
+The first command takes as its argument
+anything that creates a horizontal white space, for example,
+\verb!\setMClabelsep{\quad}! or \verb!\setMClabelsep{\kern20pt}!. If
+\cs{setMClabelsep} is set in a group, its value will revert to the
+default on exit from the group. The second command
+\cs{resetMClabelsep} resets the space back to its default `\verb!\ !'.
+
+The space above the beginning of the \texttt{answer} environment can be
+adjusted using the length \Com{aboveanswersSkip}. The default value for
+this is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setlength\aboveanswersSkip{3pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+and this can be reset to any desired vertical skip.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{shortquiz} with Radio Buttons}\label{sqwRadio}
+
+The short quizzes (with multiple choices) can also be laid out using
+radio buttons rather than typeset lettering. Use a
+\texttt{shortquiz*} environment, with an optional argument the value
+of which is a unique name (which will be used to construct the
+titles of the radio buttons).\footnote{In previous versions of \textsf{exerquiz}, there was a
+\texttt*-option that was use to signal the use of radio buttons.  This option is still
+available, but the shortquiz* environment is preferred.} If you do not provide an optional
+argument name, one will programmatically be provided for you.
+
+\newtopic For example, the following code
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan1]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent yields the following question:
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan2]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\noindent Check the functionality of this question, and contrast it with
+the same question.
+
+\sqTurnOffAlerts \sqCorrections
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan3]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\noindent We have inserted two new commands prior to this last
+short quiz \cs{sqTurnOffAlerts} and \cs{sqCorrections} to change
+response feedback. The former turns off the alerts and the latter
+turns on the corrections: check for a correct answer and an cross
+for an incorrect answer. (It doesn't make sense to
+\cs{sqTurnOffAlerts} without \cs{sqCorrections};
+\cs{sqCorrections} can be used without turning off the alerts.)
+
+\redpoint These two commands only apply to a short quiz that uses radio buttons.
+You can reverse these two commands with \cs{sqTurnOnAlerts} and
+\cs{sqNoCorrections}, respectively. These settings are the
+defaults of the \texttt{shortquiz} with check boxes.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{shortquiz} with Solutions}\label{ss:QuizS}
+
+Another type of quiz that is easy to implement in PDF is the
+multiple choice quiz with immediate response with solution given.
+This too is a \texttt{shortquiz} environment:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+...Question goes here...
+\begin{answers}!anglemeta(dest){!meta(num_cols)}
+...
+\Ans0 !anglemeta(an incorrect answer) &
+...
+\Ans1 !anglemeta(a correct answer) &
+...
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+    !anglemeta(solution to correct answer)
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The \anglemeta{name} takes on two forms, in either case, it is used to create a hypertext jump to
+the solution. The first form of \anglemeta{name} is an explicit named
+definition `\texttt{[\meta{named\_dest}]}', where \meta{named\_dest} is a
+word selected by the document author for a ``named destination.'' The other
+form is the star-form `\texttt{*}', when the star-form is used,
+\textsf{exerquiz} automatically generates the name. Use the
+`[\meta{named\_dest}]' form when you want to refer to a solution in another
+part of the document; otherwise, use `\texttt{*}' for convenience.
+
+\newtopic As before, \meta{num\_cols} is the number of columns to
+typeset the answers in.
+
+\newtopic The following example illustrates the quiz with
+solution.
+
+%\renewcommand\sqslrtnlabel{\string\raisebox{1pt}{$\blacktriangleleft$}Return to Quiz}
+
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Define a function $f(s)=4s^3$ and another function
+$F(t)=t^4$. Is $F$ an antiderivative of $f$?
+\begin{answers}[quiz:anti]{4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+The answer is `Yes'.  The definition requires that
+\[
+           F'(x) = f(x) \quad\text{for all $x$,}
+\]
+well, let's check it out.
+
+The definition of $f$ is $f(s)=4s^3$ and so $f(x)=4x^3$.
+The definition of $F$ is $F(t)=t^4$ and so, by the rules of
+differentiation, $F'(t)=4t^3$.  Thus, $F'(x)=4x^3$. Therefore,
+\[
+       F'(x) = 4x^3 = f(x)\quad\text{for all $x$,}
+\]
+as required by the definition.
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\newtopic The verbatim listing that uses the explicit form of the destination, shown
+in bold font.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Define a function $f(s)=4s^3$ and another
+function $F(t)=t^4$. Is $F$ an antiderivative of $f$?
+\begin{answers}!textbf([quiz:anti]){4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+...solution not shown...
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Here is a listing of the same quiz using the \texttt{*} to
+automatically assign a destination label.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Define a function $f(s)=4s^3$ and another
+function $F(t)=t^4$. Is $F$ an antiderivative of $f$?
+\begin{answers}!textbf(*){4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+...solution not shown...
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{bChoices}/\-\protect\cs{eChoices}}
+    {\textbackslash bChoices/\textbackslash eChoices} Commands}\label{bChoices}
+
+
+Beginning with \textsf{exerquiz} version~6.03, the command pair
+\cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} are defined to help lay out
+the list of choices for a multiple choice question. This pair of
+macros is not really an environment, the \cs{eChoices} really
+does nothing other than to act as an ending marker. The idea
+behind this pair of macros is twofold:
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item To provide a convenient way of listing alternate choices for
+a multiple choice questions, the ``environment'' makes it easy to
+change the number of columns, or to change from tabular to list
+(or visa-versa);
+
+\item To lay out the alternatives in a uniform manner, which will
+make it easy to develop techniques of randomizing the
+alternatives.
+
+\end{questions}
+Here is an example of usage:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{answers}{4}                  %<- 4 columns
+\bChoices[2]                        %<- use only first 2 columns
+  \Ans0 a choice\eAns               %<- choices delimited by
+  \Ans1 another choice\eAns         %   \Ans...\eAns
+  \Ans0 still another choice\eAns
+  \Ans0 another\eAns
+  \Ans0 incoming\eAns
+  \Ans0 more choices\eAns
+  \Ans0 another still\eAns
+  \Ans0 too many\eAns
+  \Ans0 choices\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Note that the choices begin with the \cs{Ans} macro
+followed by a 0 or 1, as described in the previous pages.  The
+end of the choice is delimited by the \cs{eAns} command (which is
+undefined, but is used as a argument delimiter). Note that it is
+not necessary (and would be a mistake) to place the column
+delimiter~`\texttt\&', or the end of line
+command~`\texttt{\string\\}', this is done by the \cs{bChoices}
+command.
+
+The commands \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} can be used within
+the \texttt{answers} environment as part of a \texttt{shortquiz} or a
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{quiz}} environment.
+
+Concerning the example above, the argument of the \texttt{answers}
+environment is 4 which means we are going to use the tabular
+environment with 4 columns. Now within those 4 columns we are
+going to only use the first 2 columns (this is the optional
+argument of \cs{bChoices}). If the optional argument is removed
+from \cs{bChoices}, the choices are typeset in the with 4
+columns.
+
+If the argument of \texttt{answers} or \texttt{manswers} is changed to 1, the
+optional argument of \cs{bChoices} is ignored, and the
+alternatives are typeset in a one column list environment.
+
+By changing the two parameters (the one for \cs{answers} and the
+one for \cs{bChoices}) you can easily modify how the
+alternatives are typeset.
+
+\redpoint \cs{rowsep}: Space between rows (or items in list environment)
+can be adjusted with the \cs{rowsep} command. If you
+say \verb+\rowsep{3pt}+, an additional \texttt{3pt} space is added
+between rows or items in a list environment. The default is \texttt{0pt}. The default is
+controlled through the command \cs{rowsepDefault}, like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rowsepDefault{0pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\rowsep{3pt}
+\bChoices[2]
+  \Ans0 a choice\eAns
+  \Ans1 another choice\eAns
+  \Ans0 still another choice\eAns
+  \Ans0 another\eAns
+  \Ans0 incoming\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent Do not place this command inside the
+\cs{bChoices}/\cs{eChoices} pair, the above example shows
+the optimal placement, just before \cs{bChoices}.  This
+separation {\cs{rowsep}} is reset to the default at the end of the
+listing. To get a uniform separation between rows across the
+document, redefine \cs{rowsepDefault} in the preamble, like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rowsepDefault{3pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint No commands should appear \textit{between} the pair
+\cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} and \textit{outside} an
+\cs{Ans} and \cs{eAns} pair.  All such tokens are gobbled up.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Limitations:} The command \cs{eAns} acts as
+a macro parameter delimiter: Everything between \cs{Ans} and \cs{eAns}
+is taken in as the argument of a macro; therefore, verbatim content
+generated by \cs{verb} is not permitted by {\LaTeX}. If you want
+your choices to contain verbatim text, use the style as described in
+\Nameref{BasicUsage}.
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{questions}}{questions} Environment}
+
+The \texttt{questions} environment was designed to work with the
+\texttt{quiz} environment---taken up in
+\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{Section~\ref*{ss:GradedQuizzes}}
+below---but it works equally well with \texttt{shortquiz}.
+
+Using the \texttt{questions} environment, quizzes defined by
+\texttt{shortquiz}, with/without solutions, can be
+mixed together and combined to make a ``mini-quiz''.  For example,
+
+\begin{shortquiz} Determine the LCD for each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+\item  $\dfrac{3x}{2y^2z^3}-\dfrac2{xy^3 z^2}$.
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\bChoices
+    \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=2xy^5z^5$\eAns
+    \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=2y^3 z^3$\eAns
+    \Ans1 $\text{LCD}=2x y^3 z^3$\eAns
+    \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=2 x y^3 z^5$\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\item  $\dfrac{x+y}{3 x^{3/2}y^2}-\dfrac{x^2+y^2}{6 x y^4}$.
+\begin{answers}[quiz:LCB]{2}
+\bChoices
+    \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=18 x^{3/2}y^4$\eAns
+    \Ans1 $\text{LCD}=6x^{3/2}y^4$\eAns
+    \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=18 x y^4$\eAns
+    \Ans0 $\text{LCD}=6 x y^4$\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+If you erred on this one, more than likely it was on the
+appropriate multiplicative constant: 6 not 18.  At least
+that's what I'm betting on.
+
+The instructions of the LCD Algorithm said to \textit{completely
+factor the denominator}.  Here's a list of the factors
+\[\def\us#1#2{\underbrace{#2}_{\text{#1 term}}}
+         \us{first}{3, x^{3/2}, y^2}\,,\,\us{second}{2, 3, x, y^4}
+\]
+Let's rearrange them
+\[
+                 2, 3, 3, x, x^{3/2}, y^2, y^4
+\]
+Now drop duplicate factors---that's the 3.  Oops! I did mention
+dropping identical factors, didn't I?
+\[
+                   2, 3, x, x^{3/2}, y^2, y^4
+\]
+Now, group together all terms which have the same base, then drop,
+from each of these groups all terms but the one with the highest
+power.  We obtain then,
+\[
+                      2, 3, x^{3/2}, y^4
+\]
+The LCD is the product of same:
+\[
+    \text{LCD}=(2)(3) x^{3/2} y^4 = 6 x^{3/2} y^4.
+\]
+{\it Solution Notes\/}: Alternative (a) will work as a common
+denominator, but it is not the least common denominator.  If you
+use (a), you will be working with larger numbers than is really
+necessary.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent The first question is given without a solution, the second has a
+solution attached to it. An abbreviated verbatim listing follows.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Determine the LCD for each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+\item  $\dfrac{3x}{2y^2z^3}-\dfrac2{xy^3 z^2}$.
+\begin{answers}{2}
+...
+\end{answers}
+\item  $\dfrac{x+y}{3 x^{3/2}y^2}
+          -\dfrac{x^2+y^2}{6 x y^4}$.
+\begin{answers}[quiz:LCB]{2}
+...
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+If you erred on this one, ... ...
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\Important The questions environment can be nested three deep.
+
+\newtopic Between items, you can say \Com{pushquestions}, make a comment, to continue
+with more questions, type \Com{popquestions}. Here is an example without using \texttt{shortquiz} environment.
+
+\begin{questions}
+  \item This is my first question.
+  \item This is my second question.
+\pushquestions
+We now begin a multipart question.
+\popquestions
+    \item Answer each of the following:
+    \begin{questions}
+        \item First part of the question.
+\pushquestions
+Be sure to concentrate on this next question, its a hard one; recall that $1+1=2$.
+\popquestions
+        \item Second part of the question.
+        \begin{questions}
+            \item This is a subpart of this part.
+\pushquestions
+The questions environment can be nested up to three deep.
+\popquestions
+            \item This is a second subpart of this part.
+        \end{questions}
+    \end{questions}
+    \item This is the fourth question.
+\end{questions}
+The color of the item labels is set by the command \cs{quesNumColor}. The command take one
+argument, a named color. The default is \verb!\quesNumColor{blue}!.
+
+
+\newtopic A partial listing of the above environment is presented below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{questions}
+  \item This is my first question.
+  \item This is my second question.
+\pushquestions
+We now begin a multipart question.
+\popquestions
+    \item Answer each of the following:
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Options of the \texttt{shortquiz} Environment}\label{sq:opts}
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{forpaper}}{forpaper} Option}
+
+The \texttt{forpaper} option has already been described. The
+solutions to \texttt{short\-quiz} questions are not typeset on
+separate pages, but are separated by a \cs{medskip}.
+
+Following up on the pre-test angle discussed in
+``\mlnameref{sss:redefinesq}'', page~\pageref*{sss:redefinesq}, a single
+document can be constructed that can be published on-line, or
+published for paper distribution.  This feature may be useful to
+some educators.
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{solutionsafter} Option}
+
+The \texttt{solutionsafter} option works as described for the
+\texttt{exercise} environment.  The option just sets a Boolean
+switch.  This switch can be controlled  with
+\cs{Solutions\-After} and \cs{SolutionsAtEnd}.  Here is a simple
+example.
+
+\SolutionsAfter
+\begin{shortquiz}
+In what year did Columbus sail the ocean blue?
+\begin{answers}[qz:columbus2]{4}
+\Ans0 1490 &\Ans0 1491 &\Ans1 1492 &\Ans0 1493
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Columbus sailed the ocean blue in 1492.  Some say he discovered
+San Salvatore, others say he first sited Cat Island in the
+Bahamas.
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\SolutionsAtEnd
+In the example above, \cs{SolutionsAfter} was placed before the \texttt{shortquiz} environment and
+the \cs{SolutionsAtEnd} was placed just after.
+
+This option may be useful in publishing an answer key to a multiple
+choice quiz.  The quiz and solutions can be created together.  The
+quiz can be published, then later, the quiz with complete
+solutions.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\texttt{proof\-ing}}{proofing}
+Option}\label{sss:proofing}
+
+For proofreading, use the \texttt{proofing} option of
+\textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[proofing]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent When used, a symbol, defined by the command \cs{proofingsymbol},
+will mark the correct answers, as defined in your source file. The
+command \cs{proofingsymbol} may be redefined, its definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\proofingsymbol{\textcolor{webgreen}{$\bullet$}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent
+This option works for the
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{quiz}} environment defined
+below
+(\hyperref[ss:GradedQuizzes]{page~\pageref*{ss:GradedQuizzes}}),
+as well.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{showgrayletters} Option}\label{showgraylettersOpt}  \aebCng[showgrayletters]
+
+When \texttt{showgrayletters} is used, the form field check boxes
+that appear in a \texttt{quiz} or in a \texttt{shortquiz} will have a gray capital letter
+\texttt{A}, \texttt{B}, \texttt{C}, etc. underneath it. This letter
+can then be referred to in the text or the solution.
+
+This option is global and is controlled by a switch, \cs{ifaebshowgrayletters}. The gray letter feature can be turned on
+and off locally: To turn on this feature, insert the command \Com{graylettersOn} at some appropriately chosen point in
+the document; to turn off the gray letter feature insert \Com{graylettersOff}.
+
+\newtopic In support of the \texttt{showgrayletters} option is a new command \Com{REF}.
+\cs{REF} acts like the {\LaTeX} command \cs{ref} with the hyperref modifications, but it converts
+the reference to uppercase. When \cs{ref} would typeset the letter `a', for example, \cs{REF}
+would typeset the letter `A'. \cs{REF}, like \cs{ref}, typesets a hyperref link. Hyperref defines a
+\texttt{*} version of \cs{ref}; \cs{ref*} typesets the reference, but does not create a link;
+\cs{REF*} does the same.  When \cs{aebshowgraylettersfalse} is in effect, \cs{REF} does not capitalize
+the reference.
+
+The \texttt{showgrayletters} feature and the \cs{REF} command work equally
+well for the \texttt{quiz} environment.
+
+\redpoint Below is an example of this.
+
+\graylettersOn
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[TestSQ]
+Answer this if you can!
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\bChoices
+    \Ans0\label{testsqFirst}  This is a possible answer.\eAns
+
+    \Ans1\label{testsqSecond} Try this one (the correct one)\eAns
+
+    \Ans0  This is an answer.\eAns
+
+    \Ans0  Another alternative.\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+
+\noindent Reference both (\REF{testsqFirst}) and (\REF*{testsqSecond}).
+
+\graylettersOff
+
+\newtopic The code is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\graylettersOn
+\begin{shortquiz*}[TestSQ]
+Answer this if you can!
+\begin{answers}{2}
+\bChoices
+    \Ans0\label{testsqFirst} This is a possible answer.\eAns
+    \Ans1\label{testsqSecond} Try this one (the correct one).\eAns
+    \Ans0 This is an answer.\eAns
+    \Ans0 Another alternative.\eAns
+\eChoices
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+\noindent Reference both (\REF{testsqFirst}) and (\REF*{testsqSecond}).
+\graylettersOff
+\end{Verbatim}
+\newtopic Notice that the gray letters was  not turned to off
+until after the usage of \cs{REF}.
+
+\textcolor{red}{\Important} The gray letters are typeset into the document. Do not
+use a background color for the checkboxes as this color will cover
+up the gray letters. The default background color checkboxes is
+transparent, keep it that way.
+
+\newtopic The command \Com{insertGrayLetters} is used to insert the gray letters;
+this command can be redefined as desired. See the source file \texttt{exerquiz.dtx}.
+Also see the definition of \Com{bottomOfAnsfStack}.
+
+\subsubsection{Moving the Solution Set}
+
+The solution set, by default, comes last in the file.  You can move
+its positioning by including the command \cs{includequizsolutions}
+at any point \emph{after} the last quiz (created by the \texttt{shortquiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments).  You'll note
+that I
+have moved the solutions in this file before the
+\nameref{references} section, as indicated, for example, by its
+position in the table of contents.
+
+\subsubsection{Grouping the solutions at end}\label{ss:grpQzs}
+
+Historically, solutions to quizzes (created by the \env{shortquiz} and
+\env{quiz} environments) appearing at the end of the file \emph{are not
+grouped}. This means that a color change or a definition made in one solution
+may affect all subsequent solutions.
+
+You can now declare \cs{makeQzSolnsLocalOn} or \cs{makeQzSolnsLocalOff}
+anywhere in the document to turn on grouping for all quizzes that follow, or
+to turn off this feature again. The default is \cs{makeQzSolnsLocalOff}.
+
+\subsection{Redesigning the
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{shortquiz}}{shortquiz}
+Environment}\label{sss:redefinesq}
+
+The \texttt{shortquiz} environment can be redesigned to better suit
+your needs.  In the paragraphs below, we describe how you can change
+titles and form elements.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Changing Titles}
+
+You can temporarily change the title  for the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environment by redefining the macro \cs{sqlabel}; for example, the
+default definition of this macro is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Quiz.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The syntax for redefining \cs{sqlabel} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\sqlabel{...new code goes here...}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent You can redefine the \textit{default} label as well; the
+default label is the title label that \texttt{short\-quiz} uses when
+\cs{sqlabel} is \textit{not present}.  The default label is
+\verb+\eq@sqlabel+ and must be redefined using the macro
+\cs{renewcommand}. The best place for this to be done is the
+preamble. The syntax:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter    % make `at'=@ a normal letter
+\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{...new code goes here...}
+\makeatother     % make `at'=@ something special(other)
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent To change the entire document to use `Exam' instead of `Quiz',
+make the following changes in the preamble:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter
+% change default quiz title to 'Exam'
+\renewcommand\eq@sqlabel{\textcolor{red}{Exam.}}
+% change quiz solutions return label
+\renewcommand\eq@sqslrtnlabel{End Soln}
+% change solutions label
+\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
+   \string\textbf{Solution to Exam:}}
+\renewcommand\eq@sqslsectitle{Solutions to Exams}
+% change default running header for solutions
+\renewcommand\eq@sqslsecrunhead{Solutions to Exams}
+\makeatother
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+% ?? Did not document \sqsolafter
+
+\redpoint The above commands are `global'---they are in effect
+throughout the entire document. You can temporarily change these
+labels using the \cs{sqlabel}, \cs{sqslrtnlabel}, \cs{sqsllabel} and
+\cs{sqslsectitle}.  Note that you cannot temporarily change  the running label
+\cs{eq@qslsecrunhead}, this should be set in the
+preamble.
+
+Should you want to make a series of multiple choice questions
+(using the \texttt{questions} environment) and combine them into a
+sort of review or pretest, a useful idea would be to number the
+solutions.  The counter that maintains the question number is
+called \texttt{questionno}. You can then, for example, define
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\eq@sqsllabel{%
+   \string\textbf{Solution to Question \thequestionno:}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.tex}}
+%for examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Modifying Form Elements}\label{sqMFE1}
+
+For quizzes that use radio buttons (see page~\pageref{sqwRadio}
+above), the appearance of the radio buttons can be controlled
+using the ``every'' mechanism as described in the document
+\href{eformman.pdf}{eFormMan.pdf} on
+\textit{\href{eformman.pdf}{eForm Support}} for the \cAcroB.
+The radio buttons can be modified using the command \cs{everysqRadioButton}.
+
+Prior to the short quiz below, the following command was executed
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everysqRadioButton{\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\sqTurnOffAlerts \sqCorrections
+\everysqRadioButton{\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+
+\begin{shortquiz*}[KublaKhan3]
+Was it in Xanadu did Kubla Kahn a stately pleasure dome decree?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+\end{shortquiz*}
+
+\everysqRadioButton{}
+\sqTurnOnAlerts\sqNoCorrections
+
+\noindent Return to the defaults, if desired, by then emitting
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everysqRadioButton{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The short quiz can also have fill-in questions and
+various other controls, these are described in
+Section~\ref{s:oQsq}, \nameref{s:oQsq}. There too, methods of
+modifying the appearance of the form elements are discussed.
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}
+    and \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}\label{titleQuizSQ}
+
+%\exPDF{title_quiz}The demo file for these features is \texttt{title\_quiz.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=908} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=908}{title\_quiz.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}}
+
+To assign a title to your short quiz use \Com{titleQuiz}. This title
+appears just after the typeset word ``Quiz''.
+
+\fancyQuizHeaders
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{shortquiz}\label{myCoolSQ}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+  The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+  The answer is false, statistics is interesting but not fun.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\noindent The partial verbatim code for the above quiz follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{shortquiz}\label{myCoolSQ}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\restoreDefaultQuizHeaders
+
+\noindent The format of the title is controlled by the command \Com{titleQuizfmt},
+the default definition is \verb!\newcommand\titleQuizfmt{\bfseries}!. The value
+of the \cs{titleQuiz} command can act as an argument for \cs{titleQuizfmt} if you redefine
+\cs{titleQuizfmt} to have an argument. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt[1]{\bfseries(#1)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, the title will appear in a set of parentheses. The title and formatting are enclosed
+in a \cs{mbox}, so font and style changes are localized to that  \cs{mbox}.
+
+\newtopic If a quiz does not have a title, as defined by \cs{titleQuiz}, the title defaults to
+an empty title.
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{titleQuiz} is such that the command \cs{makeatletter} is executed
+before the argument for \cs{titleQuiz} is read. This means that the special character
+`\texttt{@}' can be used within the argument of \cs{titleQuiz}.  For example, the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environment maintains a text macro \cs{@shortquizCnt} which contains the current short quiz
+count number. Thus you can say \verb!\titleQuiz{Short Quiz \@shortquizCnt}!, the title of
+the short quiz will include a short quiz number as well.
+
+The \cs{titleQuiz} is used for quizzes as well as with short quizzes. It is possible to have
+different formatting for each of these two environments by using the \Com{ifQuizType}
+command. The command takes two arguments:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ifQuizType{!anglemeta(quiz_code)}{!anglemeta(shortquiz_code)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For example, we could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}{\slshape}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or with an argument, as mentioned above, you could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} with an argument,
+like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}[1]{%
+    \ifQuizType{\bfseries(#1)}{\slshape[#1]}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz*}}{\CMD{titleQuiz*}}}
+
+For \texttt{shortquiz} environment---not for the \texttt{quiz}
+environment---there is a `\texttt*' optional first parameter. When
+the `\texttt*' option is taken, the quiz label (\cs{sqlabel}) is
+redefined to be the title of the quiz text.
+
+%\exPDF{title_quiz} The \texttt{title\_quiz.tex} demo file illustrates the `\texttt{*}' option.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=908} See
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=908}{title\_quiz.pdf}} demo file illustrates
+the `\texttt{*}' option.
+
+
+\newtopic Thus, if we title a quiz with the `\texttt{*}', we get
+
+\titleQuiz*{My Cool Quiz}
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+The formatting is that defined by the \cs{titleQuizfmt}, which is \cs{bfseries}. In addition
+to the \Com{ifQuizType} command, there is also the \cs{ifstaroption} command. It takes two
+parameters
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ifstaroption{!ameta(code if \titleQuiz*)}{!ameta(otherwise)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This allows us to not only format for quizzes, but for short quizzes, with or without
+the `\texttt*' option. If we redefine \cs{titleQuizfmt} to be
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}%
+    {\ifstaroption{\color{red}}{\bfseries}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+we format the quiz title as \cs{bfseries} is either a quiz or a
+short quiz without `\texttt*' option, and as \verb!\color{red}! with
+a short quiz with the `\texttt*' option. The results are seen in the next quiz,
+with this redefinition:
+
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}%
+    {\ifstaroption{\color{red}}{\bfseries}}}
+
+\titleQuiz*{My Swave Quiz}
+\begin{shortquiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+
+\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing}
+
+Quizzes and shortquizzes conform to the cross-referencing system of
+{\LaTeX}. For example, we used the label \verb!\label{myCoolSQ}! in the
+last quiz, the one on page~\pageref{myCoolSQ}. The title of the quiz is
+\nameref{myCoolSQ}. The code for the past two sentences is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+For example, we used the label \verb!\label{myCoolSQ}! in the
+last quiz, the one on page~\pageref{myCoolSQ}. The title of
+the quiz is \nameref{myCoolSQ}.
+\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent If the shortquiz does not have a title, as defined by the \cs{titleQuiz} command, a generic label of
+%`Quiz' is generated. The default label name is
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%    \newcommand\eq@defaultShortQuizLableName{Quiz}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent This definition can be change using \cs{renewcommand}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}
+
+The \Com{fancyQuizHeaders} command, a companion feature to \Com{titleQuiz}, enhances
+the labeling of the quiz in the solutions section of the document. If
+\cs{fancyQuizHeaders} is executed in the preamble, or prior to a quiz, the solution header has the
+following default format:
+
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.} The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+
+\newtopic The above assumes the title of the quiz is the one given in the previous section.
+
+\newtopic When a quiz has no title, the header reverts to
+\textcolor{blue}{Solution to Quiz:} followed by the question number.
+
+\redpoint You can turn off fancy quiz headers by using
+\Com{restoreDefaultQuizHeaders}.
+
+\newtopic You can modify the fancy headers with a combination of setting \Com{setsolnspace}
+and/or redefining the command \Com{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}. First
+\cs{setsolnspace}: This is a hook into the space immediately
+following the header. To insert a \cs{medskip} after the header, for example, you
+can say \verb!\setsolnspace{\par\medskip\noindent}! a
+\cs{medskip} is created after the solution header and the solution
+above appears as
+
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.}\par\medskip\noindent The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\def\eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt{\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \Com{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} is the \texttt{quiz} counterpart to
+this \texttt{shortquiz} construct. The fancy short quiz solutions header
+defaults to the same header used for a quiz. You can copy
+and paste the definition of \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} into the definition
+of the command \cs{eq@fancyShrtQuizHeadersfmt}, then modify as described in
+\Nameref{fancyQuizHeadersQ}.
+
+%See the section \Nameref{fancyQuizHeadersQ} for a full discussion of this topic.
+
+% \subsection{Graded Quizzes using JavaScript}
+\section{The \texttt{quiz} Environment}\label{ss:GradedQuizzes}
+
+Use the \texttt{quiz} environment to create graded quizzes.  In
+this case, several (many) questions are bundled together.  The
+student takes the quiz and responses are recorded by
+JavaScript.  Upon completion of the quiz, the total score is
+reported to the student.
+
+The \texttt{quiz} environment can generate multiple choice
+questions and math/text fill-in questions. The discussion of math
+and text fill-in questions is postponed to \hyperref[s:oQ]
+{Section~\ref*{s:oQ}} on page~\pageref*{s:oQ}
+
+
+There are two types of quizzes, the
+\hyperref[sss:QuizwLinks]{link-style} and
+\hyperref[sss:QuizwChecks]{form-style}.
+In \hyperref[ss:correct]{Section~\ref*{ss:correct}}, we see that
+the \texttt{quiz} environment can also correct the quizzes.
+
+The quiz environment takes one required parameter, the
+\meta{base\_name}, which is a string.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz}{!meta(base_name)}
+...
+\end{quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\textcolor{red}{\Important} The \pkg{exerquiz} package uses the
+\meta{base\_name} to build Acrobat form fields, and also JavaScript
+variables; therefore, there are restrictions on the choice of the
+name. The name must be a (JavaScript) \emph{identifier}, the rules to
+be an identifier are these.
+\begin{quote}
+The first character shall be a letter, an underscore (\texttt{\_}),
+or a dollar sign (\texttt{\$}); subsequent characters may be any
+letter or digit, or an underscore or a dollar sign.
+\end{quote}
+Do not use other symbols, like a colon (\texttt{\:}) or a period as part of the field  name,
+these will confuse the JavaScript interpreter, and may cause the quiz not to function as
+designed.
+
+
+The \texttt{quiz} environment consists of a series of nested
+environments.  Inside the \texttt{quiz} environment is the
+\texttt{questions} environment (an enumerated list), and within
+that environment is the \texttt{answers} environment.
+Symbolically, we can express this as
+\[
+    \mbox{\texttt{quiz}} \supseteq
+    \mbox{\texttt{questions}} \supseteq
+    \mbox{\texttt{answers}}
+\]
+The term `answers' is, perhaps, not sufficiently descriptive;
+`alternatives' would be more appropriate, but it requires more
+typing.  \verb!{:-{)!
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{answers} environment requires one parameter,
+the \texttt{num\_cols}. If \texttt{num\_cols} is~1, a
+\texttt{list} environment is created; otherwise, a
+\texttt{tabular} environment is used.
+
+This (\texttt{tabular}) environment has the following syntax:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz}{!meta(base_name)}
+The preamble to the questions goes here.
+\begin{questions}
+\item State first question....
+\begin{answers}{4} % <- num_cols = 4
+\Ans0 ... &\Ans1 ... &\Ans0 ... &\Ans0 ...
+\end{answers}
+...
+\item n th question....
+\begin{answers}{4}                     % <- 4 column format
+\Ans0 ... &\Ans1 ... &\Ans0 ... &\Ans0 ...
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Following the quiz, or anywhere in the document, place
+the macro \cs{ScoreField}, defined in \textsf{exerquiz}, to
+display the results of the quiz:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ScoreField{!meta(base_name)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent\textcolor{red}{\bfseries Important.} The value of the parameter of
+the macro \cs{ScoreField} must match the \meta{base\_name}
+defined in the argument of the \texttt{quiz} environment.
+
+\redpoint There is a convenience macro, \cs{currQuiz}, that holds the name
+of the current quiz. Thus, we could have instead typed:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ScoreField\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Read the paragraph entitled \Nameref{sss:scorefield} for more
+details on this macro.
+
+%An alternative to \cs{ScoreField} is to use \cs{TextField}.
+%a macro defined by \pkg{hyperref}.  See more details later. %??
+
+\begin{comment}
+The \textsf{exerquiz} macro \cs{eqScore} is a text macro that
+expands to the phrase `Score:'. (It expands to `Punkte:' with the
+\texttt{german} language option and `Score :' with the
+\texttt{french}.)
+
+
+The \cs{TextField} macro takes two arguments, we need only the
+first---the second is left empty. This \cs{TextField} can be
+modified by changing the options; the layout of the field can be
+changed as well using the \cs{LayoutTextField}.  For more
+information see the paragraphs on \nameref{ss:modoutputfield}
+beginning on page~\pageref{ss:modoutputfield}.   There are
+extensive examples on how to set up the \cs{TextField} in the
+paragraph \nameref{sss:modtextfield} on
+page~\pageref{sss:modtextfield}, with examples following on
+page~\pageref{sss:exampltextfield}.
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsection{Options of the \texttt{quiz} Environment}
+
+In addition to the options listed in the section \ref{sq:opts}, page \pageref*{sq:opts}, the following is
+designed for quizzes.
+
+\subsubsection{The option
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{noquiz\-solutions}}{noquizsolutions}}\label{sss:noquizsolutions}
+
+For online quizzing, where results are stored in some way (database,
+e-mail, text file) the presence of the solutions in the same file as the
+questions is a breach in security of the quiz.  Using the
+\texttt{noquizsolutions} removes the solutions to a \texttt{quiz} and
+\texttt{shortquiz} from the document under construction.
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{answers} Environment}\label{answersQuiz}
+
+The simplest type of question that can be posed is the multiple choice question.
+For this question type, the \texttt{answers} environment is used. The basic syntax
+is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\item A question
+\begin{answers}!anglemeta(dest){!meta(num_cols)}
+\Ans[!meta(partial_pts)]{0|1}....
+\end{answers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The \anglemeta{dest}, an optional argument, is a name used to create a hypertext jump to
+the solution; it has two forms: \texttt{[\meta{named\_dest}]}, an explicit
+``named destination.''; and the \texttt{*}-form, \textsf{exerquiz} automatically
+generates the name. Use \meta{named\_dest} when you want to refer to a solution
+in another part of the document; otherwise, use \texttt{*}, for convenience.
+
+If either the \texttt{[\meta{named\_dest}]} or \texttt{*} is used, a
+\texttt{solution} environment should follow.
+
+\newtopic The \meta{num\_cols} is the number of columns to
+typeset the answers in. When \meta{num\_cols} is 1, the answers are set
+in a list environment; otherwise, a tabular environment is used. In the latter case,
+the usual table syntax is used. (Use \texttt{\&} to separate columns, and \verb!\\! to
+terminate a row.)
+
+\newtopic The \cs{Ans} command has one required argument, a 1 to mark that this
+answer is a correct answer, and a 0 to mark that this answer is not true.  \cs{Ans}
+also has an optional argument to pass partial points rewarded for a wrong answer.
+
+\newtopic This environment is illustrated extensively in this section. See also the
+\texttt{manswers} environment, \Nameref{manswersQuiz}, for posting questions with multiple
+correct answers.
+
+\subsection{Basic Usage}
+
+In this section we discuss the two  \texttt{quiz} styles:
+\nameref{sss:QuizwLinks} and \nameref{sss:QuizwChecks}.
+
+A paragraph is devoted to some modifications that can be made at
+the beginning and end of the quiz.  In addition, a
+\texttt{\hyperref[sss:proofing]{proofing}} option is also
+described.
+
+\subsubsection{Link-Style Quiz}\label{sss:QuizwLinks}
+
+%\renewcommand\bqlabel{Begin Exam}
+%\renewcommand\eqlabel{End Exam}
+
+%There are actually two variations on this type of quiz, one uses
+%links, the other uses radio button fields.
+
+This style uses links to record the choices to the alternatives.
+The link method takes up less space in the pdf file than does the
+form-style.
+
+Below is an example of a link-style quiz.  Instructions should be
+given to guide the student in operating the quiz correctly.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textcolor{red}{Instructions.} You must click on
+`Begin Quiz' to  initialize the quiz.  Not doing so brings forth
+an error message.  When finished, click on `End Quiz'.
+
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscrl}
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\par
+\ScoreField\currQuiz
+%\TextField[name=qz:discr,width=3in,default=\eqScore]{}
+
+\redpoint While you are taking the test, and before you click on
+`End Quiz', you can change your answers.
+
+%A message box comes out,
+%gives you your original choice, and asks you whether you really
+%want to change your answer.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscrl}  % qzdiscrl=base_name
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2-4x+3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2-3x-2=0$ have?
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\par
+\ScoreField\currQuiz % matching quiz field name
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The convenience text macro, \cs{currQuiz}, contains the name
+of the current quiz. This macro can be used as the argument of
+\cs{ScoreField}.
+
+\subsubsection{Form-Style Quiz}\label{sss:QuizwChecks}
+
+You may be thinking that such a quiz format---one in which the
+student cannot see the choices made---is not very good.  It is
+perhaps adequate for two or three quick questions.  For a longer
+quiz format, one would like to see a ``checkbox'' format.
+A quiz with a checkbox format can be obtained using the
+\texttt{quiz*} environment:\footnote{In previous versions of \textsf{exerquiz}, there was a \texttt*-option
+for this purpose. The \texttt{quiz*} has replaced the \texttt*-option and is the preferred method, though
+the \texttt*-option is still defined so as not to break previous code.}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz*}{!meta(base_name)}
+...
+...same format as before...
+...
+\end{quiz*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent Here is the same sample quiz with the form-style option.  The only
+change in the code is the insertion of the \texttt*-option.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textcolor{red}{Instructions.} You must click on
+`Begin Quiz' to  initialize the quiz.  Not doing so, brings forth
+an error message.  When finished, click on `End Quiz'.
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscrf}
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}
+
+\ScoreField{qzdiscrf}
+
+\redpoint Before completing the quiz, a student can easily change
+alternatives.
+
+\redpoint This type is more suitable for longer quizzes.  The
+choices the student makes are visually recorded for the student to
+review and change before clicking on `End Quiz'. A partial
+verbatim listing:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscrf}
+Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$, respond to each of the
+following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+.............
+.............
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\par
+\ScoreField{qzdiscrf}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} See the sample file
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst} {webeqtst.tex}}
+%and for examples.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} See the file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+website for examples.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Using Circular Radio Buttons with MC Questions}
+
+As seen with the examples of the previous section, the form-type quizzes
+have a rectangular check box for the user to make his selection. Acrobat also
+offers a circular radio button that can be used to make a multiple choice.
+
+To create circular radio buttons for a MC question execute \Com{useMCCircles} before
+the quiz, or, perhaps, in the preamble of your document.
+
+To return to the default rectangular choice boxes, execute \Com{useMCCRects}. This
+setting is the default, there is no need to executed it unless
+\cs{useMCCircles} has already been executed.
+
+Executing \cs{useMCCircles} does not affect the \texttt{manswers}
+environment, page~\pageref*{manswersQuiz}), so you can have circular radio
+buttons for multiple choice, and rectangular choice boxes for multiple
+selection problems.
+
+%\exPDF{quiz_w_circ} The sample file \texttt{quiz\_w\_circ.tex} illustrates these two commands.
+
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=914} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=914}{quiz\_w\_circ.pdf}}
+illustrates these two commands.
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{Overriding the `quiztype' Parameter}
+
+You can globally declare that all quizzes to be a link-type or
+form-type by using the command \Com{quiztype}. Placing
+\verb+\quiztype{f}+  in the preamble (or prior to any quiz) will
+cause all quizzes following that command to be form-type  quizzes.
+Similarly, executing \verb+\quiztype{l}+ will produce all link-type quizzes.
+
+You can make the environments revert back to their normal behavior by using
+the command \Com{defaultquiztype}, which cancels out the \cs{quiztype} command.
+
+%\exPDF{quizpts} The sample file \texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#quizpts}
+%{quizpts.tex}} illustrates these collections of commands.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1054} The demo file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1054}{quizpts.pdf}}
+illustrates these collections of commands.
+
+
+
+\newtopic \emph{Within a quiz}, you can say \Com{useForms}, to change the style to a visible checkbox
+for multiple choice or multiple selection questions; use \Com{useLinks} to change
+the style to links with alphabetized alternatives. Using \cs{restoreFLTypeDefault}
+restores the next multiple choice/selection question back to the default determined
+by the quiz environment (\texttt{quiz} versus \texttt{quiz*}), or as set by the
+\cs{quiztype} command.
+
+\subsubsection{The BeginQuiz and EndQuiz Form Buttons}\label{sss:FormButton}
+
+The default setup the \texttt{quiz} environment is to have
+hypertext links for the `Begin Quiz' and `End Quiz'. You can also
+redefine this linking and use a form button instead
+Prior to your quiz, use the following code, if desired.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useBeginQuizButton
+\useEndQuizButton
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\useBeginQuizButton\useEndQuizButton
+%\makeatletter
+%\renewcommand\eq@beginQuiz{\eq@BeginQuizButton}
+%\renewcommand\eq@endQuiz{\eq@EndQuizButton}
+%\makeatother
+
+
+\begin{quiz}{qzTeXf} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\quad\ScoreField{qzTeXf}
+
+\medskip
+\noindent Revert back to link-style as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useBeginQuizLink
+\useEndQuizLink
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\useBeginQuizLink\useEndQuizLink
+
+\noindent The commands \cs{useBeginQuizButton} and \cs{useEndQuizButton} each
+have an optional argument that can be used to modify the appearance
+of the buttons.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useBeginQuizButton[\textColor{0 0 1}]
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent would create a `Begin Quiz' button with blue text for the button label.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\texttt{proof\-ing}}{proofing}
+Option}\label{ss:proofing}
+
+For proofreading, use the \texttt{proofing} option of
+\textsf{exerquiz}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\usepackage[proofing]{exerquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent When used, a symbol, defined by the command \cs{proofingsymbol},
+will mark the correct answers, as defined in your source file. The
+command \cs{proofingsymbol} can be redefined, its definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\proofingsymbol{\textcolor{webgreen}{$\bullet$}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent
+This option works for the \texttt{\hyperref[ss:QuizIR]{shortquiz}}
+environments defined above
+(\hyperref[ss:QuizIR]{page~\pageref*{ss:QuizIR}}), as well.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texttt{showgrayletters} Option}             \aebCng[showgrayletters]
+
+The showgrayletters option is valid for the \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments.
+See the section entitled \Nameref{showgraylettersOpt} for a detailed explanation
+of this option.
+
+\subsubsection{Setting the Threshold}\label{threshold}
+
+The default behavior of the \texttt{quiz} environment is that a
+student can begin the quiz and finish the quiz without answering
+any or all of the questions. This is called a \texttt{lowThreshold}
+and is the default behavior.
+
+The document author can set a \texttt{highThreshold} by re-defining
+the \cs{minQuizResp} macro. The default definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\minQuizResp{lowThreshold}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent However, if you make the definition
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\minQuizResp{highThreshold}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent the student is required to answer all the questions of a
+quiz.
+
+Actually, \texttt{lowThreshold} and \texttt{highThreshold} are
+JavaScript functions that are called when the ``End
+Quiz'' button is clicked. If the threshold is not met, an alert box
+appears informing the user of this.
+
+The document author can write a custom threshold function and place
+its name in the \cs{minQuizResp} macro. See the \textsf{exerquiz}
+source code---in either \textsf{exerquiz.dtx} or
+\textsf{exerquiz.sty}---for the \texttt{highThreshold()} function
+for an example of how to do this.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{manswers} Environment}\label{manswersQuiz}
+
+Beginning with \textsf{Exerquiz} v.6.2, the \texttt{manswers}
+environment is defined to support multiple selection questions.
+(\texttt{manswers} stands for multiple answers). This is in contrast
+with the \texttt{answers} environment in which there is only one
+correct answer; for \texttt{manswers}, there are several correct
+answers.
+
+%\exPDF{manswers} See the example file for this feature is \texttt{manswers.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=903} See the example file for this feature is \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=903}{manswers.pdf}}.
+
+\newtopic\indent The syntax is the same as that of the \texttt{answers} environment,
+\mlNameref{answersQuiz}. Below is example fragment, taken from \texttt{manswers.tex}
+
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\item\PTs{5} Select which people were the President
+             of the United States.
+\begin{manswers}{4}
+    \bChoices[2]
+        \Ans[-1]{0} Henry Clay\eAns
+        \Ans[-1]{0} Ben Franklin\eAns
+        \Ans[1.5]{1} Andrew Jackson\eAns
+        \Ans[1.5]{1} Ronald Reagan\eAns
+        \Ans[-1]{0} George Meade\eAns
+        \Ans[2]{1} Grover Cleveland\eAns
+        \Ans[-1]{0} John Jay\eAns
+        \Ans[-1]{0} Paul Revere\eAns
+    \eChoices
+\end{manswers}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The arguments of the \cs{Ans} command is the same as
+those of \cs{Ans} in the \texttt{answers} environment.
+
+\newtopic When the \cs{ScoreField} is used to display results, a manswers
+question is correct if and only if all correct answers are checked, and none
+of the incorrect answers are checked.
+
+When the \cs{PointsField} is used (see \Nameref{sss:asignPts}), and
+points are assigned, as in the above code fragment, the optional
+argument of \cs{Ans} is used to assign points for each response (if
+there is no optional argument, it defaults to 0). When a student
+selects a choice, the point value in the optional argument is added
+to the point score. In the case of choosing \texttt{Ronald Reagan},
+1.5 points are added to the point score, while -1 point is added to
+the point score for choosing \texttt{John Jay}. The minimal point
+score for each question is zero, unless \cs{negPointsAllowed} command
+is executed in the preamble, see \Nameref{negPtsAllowed}.
+
+
+\subsection{Correcting the Quizzes with JavaScript}\label{ss:correct}
+
+%\makeatletter\eq@nocorrectionsfalse\makeatother
+\CorrectionsOn
+
+Beginning with \textsf{exerquiz}, version 1.2, you can now correct
+quizzes created by the \texttt{quiz} environment.  To correct the
+quizzes, simply include an additional element into your quiz, a
+correction button. The correction button with
+\cs{CorrButton}.
+
+\redpoint The following is a link-style quiz.
+
+%     \begin{center}
+%     \noindent\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{%
+%     \begin{minipage}{.965\linewidth}%
+%     \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Instructions:}} Click on
+%     `\textcolor{webgreen}{Begin Quiz}' to  initialize the quiz.
+%     When finished, click on `\textcolor{webgreen}{End Quiz}'.
+%     Then, click on the `Correct' button.
+% %    To grade your quiz, press the `Correct' button.
+%     \end{minipage}
+%     }%
+%     \end{center}
+
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscr1l} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\par
+\ScoreField{qzdiscr1l}\CorrButton{qzdiscr1l}%
+
+\medskip
+%\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{%
+%    \begin{minipage}{.975\linewidth}%
+    \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Legend:}}
+   A \textcolor{webgreen}{\ding{52}} indicates a
+    correct response; a \textcolor{red}{\ding{56}}, indicates an
+    incorrect response, in this case, the correct answer is marked
+    with a \textcolor{webgreen} {\ding{108}}.
+%  \end{minipage}}
+
+\begin{comment}
+    \begin{center}
+    \fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{%
+    \begin{minipage}{.95\linewidth}
+    \noindent\textcolor{red}{\textbf{Legend:}}
+    A \textcolor{red}{\ding{52}} indicates that the student gave the
+    correct response; a \textcolor{red}{\ding{56}}, indicates an
+    incorrect response, in this case, the correct answer is marked
+    with a \textcolor{webgreen} {\ding{108}}.
+    \end{minipage}}
+    \end{center}
+\end{comment}
+
+\medskip
+A partial verbatim listing of this quiz follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz}{qzdiscr1l} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+............................
+............................
+............................
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}
+
+\ScoreField{qzdiscr1l}\CorrButton{qzdiscr1l}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\redpoint The macro \cs{CorrButton} is used to create a nice
+``correction'' button.  JavaScript is used to correct the quiz.
+The only required argument is the field label that uniquely
+defines the field in which the total score is placed. See the
+section entitled \mlNameref{sss:CorrButton} for more details on how
+to use this macro.
+
+\redpoint The \cs{CorrButton} will not work until the user has
+clicked on `End Quiz'.  The user can re-take the quiz simply by
+clicking on `Begin Quiz', the form fields and JavaScript variables
+will be cleared.
+
+\redpoint It is possible to take this form data and submit it to a
+CGI script for processing. (The data can be saved to a database,
+for example.)  However, there is no built-in capability for this
+in the \textsf{exerquiz} package.
+
+\symbolchoice{check}
+
+\medskip
+
+\noindent The same quiz can be written in form-style simply by inserting the
+\texttt*-option.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textcolor{red}{Instructions.} You must click on
+`Begin Quiz' to  initialize the quiz.  Not doing so, brings forth
+an error message.  When finished, click on `End Quiz'.
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscr1f} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $x^2-4x + 3$ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Yes &\Ans1 No
+\end{answers}
+\item Is the quadratic polynomial $2x^2 - 4x + 3 $ irreducible?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Yes &\Ans0 No
+\end{answers}
+\item How many solutions does the equation $2x^2 - 3x - 2= 0$ have?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 none &\Ans0 one &\Ans1 two
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\redpoint In the partial verbatim listing that follows, notice the field
+name has been changed from \texttt{qzdiscr1l}, which is the name of the
+quiz previous to his one, to \texttt{qzdiscr1f}.  Different quizzes must
+have unique field names.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{qzdiscr1f} Using the discriminant, $b^2-4ac$,
+respond to each of the following questions.
+\begin{questions}
+............................
+............................
+............................
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Notice that in this example, the \cs{ScoreField} and the
+\cs{CorrButton} are positioned following the `End Quiz'; this makes
+the design more compact and nicer looking.
+
+\subsubsection{The
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\texttt{nocorrections}}{nocorrections}
+Option}\label{sss:nocorrections}
+
+Including the corrections adds quite a bit more JavaScript code to
+the \texttt{.pdf} document, this feature is `on' by default. If
+you have a document in which you do not want to have the option of
+offering corrected quizzes, then just specify
+\texttt{nocorrections} in the option list of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+There are also a couple of macros you can use to override the option switch, they are
+\cs{CorrectionsOn} and \cs{CorrectionsOff}.  Each remains in
+effect until the other is invoked.
+
+\redpoint If the \texttt{nocorrections} option is taken, then the \cs{CorrButton}
+does not appear for a quiz.
+
+\subsubsection{Showing Partial Credit Markup}\label{showcreditmarkup}
+
+When a quiz is corrected, it is possible to show how much credit was given.
+
+%\exPDF{pc_test} The demo file for this feature is \texttt{pc\_test.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=881} The demo file for this feature is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=881}{pc\_test.pdf}}.
+
+
+%\exPDF{pc_test1} The example file \texttt{pc\_test1.tex} illustrates
+%how to have a multiple selection problem and a grouped problem with
+%no partial credit. The student must get all parts correct to get
+%full credit for that problem, otherwise, no credit is assigned.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=884} The example file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=884}{pc\_test1.pdf}} illustrates
+how to have a multiple selection problem and a grouped problem with
+no partial credit. The student must get all parts correct to get
+full credit for that problem, otherwise, no credit is assigned.
+
+
+\newtopic Place the command \Com{showCreditMarkup} before a quiz you want the
+partial credit markup. The command \Com{hideCreditMarkup} hides this
+markup (it switches off the previous \cs{show\-Credit\-Mark\-up}); place
+this command before a quiz for which you don't want the markup. The
+default is not to show any partial credit markup.
+
+When a question item introduces a series of question, but poses no question itself,
+place \Com{multipartquestion} prior to that item, for example
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\multipartquestion
+\item\PTs{6} Answer each of these questions
+\begin{question}
+  \item\PTs{3} Answer this
+  \item\PTs{3} Answer that
+\end{question}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Other relevant commands are \cs{aeb@creditmarkup} and
+\cs{aeb@creditmarkupfmt}; the first one defines a little text field to
+hold the partial-credit data and the second one sets the placement of the
+text field. These can be redefined if the default definitions are not to
+your liking. The markup in red that appears in the left margin shows the
+number of points the student received for that problem, for example
+\texttt{\textcolor{red}{3\,pts}}. The string \texttt{pts} (and its singular
+counterpart, \texttt{pt}) is language dependent, in English it refers to
+``points'' (or ``point''). You can change this string to an abbreviation
+of points (point) using the commands commands \Com{ptsLabel} and
+\Com{ptLabel}. The default definitions are \verb!\ptsLabel{pts}! and
+\verb!\ptLabel{pt}!, respectively.
+
+\newtopic\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Important:}} Adobe Reader 5.0 or
+later is required for this feature.
+
+\subsection{Quizzes with Solutions}
+
+In addition to scoring and marking the quizzes, you can also
+(optionally) provide solutions as well. To enter a solution to a
+multiple choice question, use a \texttt{solution} environment, and
+attach a named destination to the \texttt{answers} environment.
+A partial verbatim listing follows the next example.
+
+%\ifeqforpaper\else\NoPeeking\fi
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXl} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\hfuzz=2pt
+
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}[knuth]{4}%
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Donald Knuth was the creator of \TeX.
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}[lamport]{4}
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Leslie Lamport was the creator of \LaTeX.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\AllowPeeking
+
+After the quiz is completed and the corrections button is pressed,
+the corrections appear.  The correct answer has a green filled
+circle or a green check; this circle is now outlined by a green
+rectangle to indicate that this is a link to the solution. Click on
+the green dot and jump to the solution!
+
+Solutions do not have to appear. Some problems can have solutions,
+while others do not. The ones with the solutions have the green
+boundary to indicate a link to the solution.
+
+Here is a partial listing of the above example.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXl} Answer each of the following.
+Passing is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}[knuth]4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Donald Knuth was the creator of \TeX.
+\end{solution}
+....
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Notice that in the \texttt{answers} environment, an
+optional parameter \texttt{[knuth]} appears. The value of this
+parameter is a unique name for the solution to the quiz. Notice as well that
+the \texttt{solution} environment follows, and is not nested
+within the \texttt{answers} environment.
+
+
+\subsection{How to Modify the \texttt{quiz} Environment}
+
+There are four ways the appearance of the quizzes can change:
+
+\begingroup
+\def\mylabel#1{\hfil\hyperref[#1]{\large$\bullet$}\ }
+\begin{list}{}
+%{\normalfont\bfseries\arabic{questionno}.\ }%
+{\usecounter{questionno}\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\makelabel}{\mylabel}
+\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\normalfont\bfseries00.\ }%
+\setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{0pt}}%
+\item[sss:quiztitles] change the titles
+\item[sss:ckappear] change the `check' appearance
+\item[sss:scorefield] change the text field in which the score appears,
+\item[sss:CorrButton] change the appearance of the `Correction' button.
+\end{list}
+\par\endgroup
+
+\noindent This section discusses each of these four in turn.
+
+\subsubsection{The Quiz Titles}\label{sss:quiztitles}
+
+It is possible to redefine the quiz titles and other labels if
+desired.
+
+\redpoint Locally:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\bqlabel{Begin Exam}
+\renewcommand\eqlabel{End Exam}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Globally:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand\eq@bqlabel{Begin Exam}
+\renewcommand\eq@eqlabel{End Exam}
+\makeatother
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{The check appearance}\label{sss:ckappear}
+
+The appearance of the `check' can be chosen using the
+\cs{symbolchoice} macro of the \textsf{exerquiz} package. The
+permissible values for the argument of \cs{symbolchoice} are
+\texttt{check} (the default), \texttt{circle}, \texttt{cross},
+\texttt{diamond}, \texttt{square}, and \texttt{star}.
+
+This quiz was generated by inserting
+\verb+\symbolchoice{diamond}+ before the quiz. The multiple choice field
+is actually a radio button field. The appearance of these radio buttons can
+be modified using the command \cs{everyqRadioButton}.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\symbolchoice{diamond}
+\everyqRadioButton{\textColor{0 0 1}
+    \BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\symbolchoice{diamond}
+\everyqRadioButton{\symbolchoice{diamond}\textColor{0 0 1}\BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeX} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField{qzTeX}\CorrButton{qzTeX}
+
+\noindent If desired, we can return to the defaults:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\symbolchoice{check} % restore the default
+\everyqRadioButton{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\symbolchoice{check} % restore the default
+\everyqRadioButton{}
+
+\redpoint The \cs{symbolchoice} can also be introduced into the flow of the code through
+the \cs{every\-qRadio\-Button}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everyqRadioButton{\symbolchoice{diamond}\textColor{0 0 1}
+    \BC{.690 .769 .871}\BG{.941 1 .941}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent After the quiz, we could return to the defaults by
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\everyqRadioButton{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint See the document \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first argument, and
+how to use the ``every'' command.\footnote{eforms manual on Web:
+\url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}\xdef\fnEFormi{\thefootnote}
+
+\subsubsection{Change color of Correction Marks}
+
+The colors used to mark the quiz can be changed by redefining the
+commands \cs{check\-Color}, \cs{crossColor} and \cs{correctColor} in
+the \textit{preamble} or before. Below are the
+defaults:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\checkColor{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]}
+\renewcommand\crossColor{color.red}
+\renewcommand\correctColor{["RGB", 0, .6, 0]} % webgreen
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The colors are inserted into the field using JavaScript, so the color definitions
+are in the color space of the JavaScript object model.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The `Correction' Button}\label{sss:CorrButton}
+
+The `Correction' button is defined by the \cs{CorrButton} has two
+parameters.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\CorrButton[mod_appear]{field_name}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The second parameter is the field name that contains the total score for the
+quiz (see the above examples).  It also has one optional argument that can be
+used to modify the appearance of the button.
+
+Also defined is the \cs{eqButton} command, which performs the same function as
+\cs{CorrButton}; use of \cs{eqButton} is discouraged in favor of \cs{CorrButton}.
+
+In addition to the optional parameter to modify the appearance of
+\cs{CorrButton}, there is also a ``global'' mechanism for modifying the
+appearance of the button field. These are
+
+\paragraph*{Global Modification:} \cs{everyButtonField} and \cs{everyCorrButton}
+
+\newtopic The first one modifies the appearance of every quiz button field, the second can be used
+to modify all \cs{CorrButton}s.
+
+\redpoint See the document \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first argument, and
+how to use the ``every'' command.${}^{\text{\fnEFormi}}$\def\fnEFormi{\thefootnote}
+
+
+
+% \begin{table}[hbt]
+% \setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+% \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+% \begin{center}
+% \makeatletter
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn1{|l|}{Local}   &
+% \multicolumn1{l|}{Global}   &
+% \multicolumn1{l|}{Default}  &
+% \multicolumn1{l|}{Description}\\
+% \hline
+% \cs{BC} &\cs{eq@BC} & 1 0 0 & border color\\
+% \cs{BG} &\cs{eq@BG} & .7529 .7529 .7529 & face color\\
+% \cs{CA} &\cs{eq@CA} & Correct & button text\\
+% \cs{RC} &\cs{eq@RC} & My Answers! & rollover\\
+% \cs{AC} &\cs{eq@AC} & Please! & pushed text \\
+% \cs{DA} &\cs{eq@DA} & /Helv 10 Tf 0 g & text format\\
+% \cs{BS} &\cs{eq@BS} & /W 1  /S /B &  button spec\\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \caption{\protect\cs{CorrButton} Parameters}\label{table:CorrButton}
+% \end{center}
+% \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+% \end{table}
+%
+%
+% The macros listed in the first column of \autoref{table:CorrButton}
+% are permitted in the optional parameter field of
+% \cs{CorrButton}---there is not parameter checking, \TeX\ or
+% Distiller/Reader will find the errors.
+%
+% The meaning of these values is beyond the scope of this manual.
+% Refer to the internet article ``Pdfmarks: Links and Forms'',
+% \cite{article:Story:Pdfmarks}, for details; in particular, see the
+% ``Forms'' article.
+
+\subsubsection{The Score Field}\label{sss:scorefield}
+
+The score field is the text field to which the quiz (and its
+underlying JavaScript) reports the score. This field can be
+constructed using the \cs{ScoreField} macro
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ScoreField[mod_appear]{field_name}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent In the simplest case, \cs{ScoreField} takes one argument, as above,
+the \texttt{field\_name} of the associated quiz.  The expansion of \cs{ScoreField}
+produces a \texttt{read-only} text field  that is 1.5 inches in
+width with a red border.  The initial text that appears in the
+field is the expansion of the macro \cs{eqScore}. The expansion of
+\cs{eqScore} depends on the language option: \cs{eqScore} expands
+to `Score:' by default, to `Punkte:' for the \texttt{german}
+option and to `Score :' for the \texttt{french} option.
+
+The macro \cs{ScoreField} also has an optional parameter that can
+be used to modify the appearance of the text field. Should the
+document author want to change the basic look of the text field produced
+by \cs{ScoreField}, just introduce the changes through this
+optional parameter.
+
+In addition to the optional parameter for modifying the appearance of
+the text field, \cs{Score\-Field}, there is also a ``global'' mechanism for
+modifying the appearance of the button field. These are
+
+\newtopic\textbf{Global Modification:} \cs{everyeqTextField} and \cs{everyScoreField}
+
+\newtopic The first one modifies the appearance of every quiz text field, the second can be used
+to modify all \cs{ScoreField}s.
+
+\redpoint See the document \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first argument, and
+how to use the ``every'' command.${}^{\text{\fnEFormi}}$\def\fnEFormi{\thefootnote}
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXc} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Thomas Esser maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans1 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Fabrice Popineau maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans1 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Christian Schenk maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad%
+\ScoreField[\BC{0 0 1}]{qzTeXc}%
+   \CorrButton[\BC{0 0 1}%    blue border color
+   \CA{TeX}%                Button text
+   \RC{Users}%              rollover text
+   \AC{Group}%              pushed text
+   \textFont{TiRo}%         text font: Times Roman
+   \textSize{10}%           text size: 10 point
+   \textColor{0 0 1}%       times roman, 10 pt, blue text
+   \W{1}\S{I}%              border width 1, inset button
+   ]{qzTeXc}
+
+\noindent The new part is the customized scoring and correction button. Here
+is a verbatim listing of the \cs{ScoreField} and \cs{CorrButton}
+macros.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ScoreField[\BC{0 0 1}]{qz:TeXc}%
+   \CorrButton[\BC{0 0 1}     % blue border color
+   \CA{TeX}                 % Button text
+   \RC{Users}               % rollover text
+   \AC{Group}               % pushed text
+   \textFont{TiRo}          % text font: Times Roman
+   \textSize{10}            % text size: 10 point
+   \textColor{0 0 1}        % blue text
+   \W{1}\S{I}               % border width 1, inset button
+   ]{qz:TeXc}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{webeqtst} This example---as well as others---appears in
+%\texttt{\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#webeqtst}{webeqtst.tex}}, a
+%test file that accompanies the \cAcroB.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=803} This example---as well as others---appears in
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=803}{webeqtst.pdf}}, a demo file from the
+{\AcroBlog}
+
+
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}
+    and \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}\label{titleQuiz}
+
+%\exPDF{title_quiz} The demo file for these features is \texttt{title\_quiz.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=908} The demo file for these features is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=908}{title\_quiz.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{titleQuiz}}{\CMD{titleQuiz}}}
+
+To assign a title to your quiz use \Com{titleQuiz}. This title appears just after
+the `Begin Quiz' button
+
+\fancyQuizHeaders
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{quiz}{MyMCQuiz}\label{MyMCQuiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Math is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+  The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Statistics is fun.
+\begin{answers}*{4}
+\Ans0 True & \Ans1 False\\
+\end{answers}
+\begin{solution}
+  The answer is false, statistics is interesting but not fun.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\noindent The partial verbatim code for the above quiz follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\titleQuiz{Two Question MC}
+\begin{quiz}{MyMCQuiz}\label{MyMCQuiz}
+Answer each of these to the best of your ability.
+\begin{questions}
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\restoreDefaultQuizHeaders
+
+\noindent The format of the title is controlled by the command \Com{titleQuizfmt},
+the default definition is \verb!\newcommand\titleQuizfmt{\bfseries}!. The value
+of the \cs{titleQuiz} command can act as an argument for \cs{titleQuizfmt} if you redefine
+\cs{titleQuizfmt} to have an argument. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt[1]{\bfseries(#1)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, the title will appear in a set of parentheses. The title and formatting are enclosed
+in a \cs{mbox}, so font and style changes are localized to that  \cs{mbox}.
+
+\newtopic If a quiz does not have a title, as defined by \cs{titleQuiz}, the title defaults to
+an empty title.
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{titleQuiz} is such that the command \cs{makeatletter} is executed
+before the argument for \cs{titleQuiz} is read. This means that the special character
+`\texttt{@}' can be used within the argument of \cs{titleQuiz}.  For example, the \texttt{quiz}
+environment maintains a text macro \cs{\@quizCnt} which contains the current quiz
+count number. Thus you can say \verb!\titleQuiz{Quiz \@quizCnt}!, the title of
+the quiz will include a short quiz number as well.
+
+
+\newtopic The \cs{titleQuiz} is used for short quizzes as well as
+with quizzes. It is possible to have different formatting for each
+of these two environments by using the \Com{ifQuizType} command. The
+command takes two arguments:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\ifQuizType{!anglemeta(quiz_code)}{!anglemeta(shortquiz_code)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+For example, we could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\titleQuizfmt{\ifQuizType{\bfseries}{\slshape}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or with an argument, as mentioned above, you could define \cs{titleQuizfmt} with an argument,
+like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\titleQuizfmt}[1]{%
+    \ifQuizType{\bfseries(#1)}{\slshape[#1]}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing}
+
+Quizzes and short-quizzes conform to the cross-referencing system
+of {\LaTeX}. For example, we used the label \verb!\label{MyMCQuiz}! in the last quiz, the one
+on page~\pageref{MyMCQuiz}. The title of the quiz is \nameref{MyMCQuiz}. The code for the past
+two sentences is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+For example, we used the label \verb!\label{MyMCQuiz}! in the
+last quiz, the one on page~\pageref{MyMCQuiz}. The title of the
+quiz is \nameref{MyMCQuiz}.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent If the quiz does not have a title, as defined by the \cs{titleQuiz} command, a generic label of
+`Quiz' is generated. The default label name is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\eq@defaultQuizLableName{Quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This definition can be change using \cs{renewcommand}.
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{fancyQuizHeaders}}{\CMD{fancyQuizHeaders}}}\label{fancyQuizHeadersQ}
+
+The \Com{fancyQuizHeaders} command, a companion feature to \Com{titleQuiz}, enhances
+the labeling of the quiz in the solutions section of the document. If
+\cs{fancyQuizHeaders} is executed in the preamble, or prior to a quiz, the solution header has the
+following default format:
+
+\begin{quote}
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.} The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\newtopic The above assumes the title of the quiz is the one given in the previous section.
+
+\newtopic When a quiz has no title, the header reverts to
+\textcolor{blue}{Solution to Quiz:} followed by the question number.
+
+\redpoint You can turn off fancy quiz headers by using
+\Com{restoreDefaultQuizHeaders}.
+
+\newtopic You can modify the fancy headers with a combination of setting \Com{setsolnspace}
+and/or redefining the command \Com{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt}. First
+\cs{setsolnspace}: This is a hook into the space immediately
+following the header. To insert a \cs{medskip} after the header, for example, you
+can say \verb!\setsolnspace{\par\medskip\noindent}! a
+\cs{medskip} is created after the solution header and the solution
+above appears as
+
+\begin{quote}
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC: Question 1.}\par\medskip\noindent The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{quote}
+
+
+\newtopic The definition of \cs{eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt{{\protect\color{blue}\protect
+    \textbf{\ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty\ifnum\@eqquestiondepth>0
+        Solution to Quiz:\fi\else
+        \aebTitleQuiz:\protect\
+        \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth=0\else
+            Question\fi
+        \fi\space
+    \ifcase\@eqquestiondepth
+        \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty Solution to Quiz:\fi\or
+        \arabic{eqquestionnoi}.\or
+        \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})\or
+        \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})%
+            (\roman{eqquestionnoiii})%
+    \fi}}%
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Ugly isn't it.  We need to set the header in all cases: with or without a title;
+multiple questions within a \texttt{questions} environment, or a single question
+with no \texttt{questions} environment.
+
+\newtopic A simple re-definition might be
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\eq@fancyQuizHeadersfmt{{\protect\color{blue}\protect
+    \textbf{\ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty
+        \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth>0
+            Solution to Quiz\fi\else
+            \aebTitleQuiz\protect\
+            \ifnum\@eqquestiondepth=0\else\\Question%
+        \fi\fi\space
+     \ifcase\@eqquestiondepth
+        \ifx\aebTitleQuiz\@empty Solution to Quiz\fi
+        \or\arabic{eqquestionnoi}.\or
+        \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})\or
+        \arabic{eqquestionnoi}(\alph{eqquestionnoii})%
+            (\roman{eqquestionnoiii})%
+    \fi}}%
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The colons (\texttt{:}) are removed and a \verb!\\! inserted in the fourth
+line; that line now reads, in part, \verb!\else\\Question\fi!, instead of
+\verb!\else Question\fi!.
+
+\newtopic The results of these changes, in combination with the earlier
+change of
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\setsolnspace{\par\medskip\noindent}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent are
+
+\begin{quote}
+\newtopic{\color{blue}Two Question MC\\Question 1.}\par\medskip\noindent The answer is true, of course, math is fun!
+\end{quote}
+
+\newtopic Other (minor) changes such as color, style, font can be done in this way.
+
+\newtopic As a reminder, you can use the web package's switch, \Com{ifeqforpaper} to further
+refine these headers. You can have one style of solution headers for paper, and another
+style for the screen.
+
+\subsection{Adding Points to a Quiz}\label{sss:asignPts}
+
+%The discussion of this topic can be found in \Nameref{sss:asignPts}.
+
+%\subsubsection{Assigning Points}\label{sss:asignPts}
+
+The questions on a quiz, especially a quiz meant for credit, may
+not have the same weight. A point scheme, therefore, has been
+created; several additional text fields in support have also been
+defined.
+
+Here is a simple two question example to illustrate:
+
+\begin{quiz*}{mathquiz} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.\hfill\smash{\GradeField[\rectH{30bp}\rectW{30bp}\textSize{0}]\currQuiz}
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\PTsHook{($\eqPTs^{\text{pts}}$)}
+
+\item\PTs{4} If $\lim_{x\to a} f(x) = f(a)$, then we say that $f$ is\dots
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans0 differentiable &\Ans1 continuous &\Ans0 integrable
+\end{answers}
+
+\item\PTs{6} Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized as a founder of
+Calculus.\\[1ex]
+\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}%
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\noindent
+Answers: \AnswerField\currQuiz
+
+\medskip\noindent
+Points: \PointsField\currQuiz\ Percent: \PercentField\currQuiz
+
+%\exPDF{quizpts} See the sample file
+%\href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#quizpts}{quizpts.tex} for a more
+%elaborate version of this question, as well as the source code.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1054} See source file for the PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1054}{quizpts.pdf}} for a more elaborate
+version of this question, as well as the source code.
+
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item \verb+\PTs#1+: This macro takes one argument, the number of
+points to be assigned to the current problem. Place this command
+immediately after the \cs{item} in the \textsf{questions} environment.
+For example, in the above quiz we had
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\item\PTs{6} Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized
+             as a founder of Calculus.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\item \verb+\PTsHook#1+: This macro, which takes one argument, can
+be used to typeset the points assigned. and is called by
+\cs{PTs}. The argument is what is to be typeset. The value
+assigned the current problem by \cs{PTs} is contained within the
+macro \cs{eqPTs}. In the quiz above, we had
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\PTsHook{($\eqPTs^{\text{pts}}$)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\item There are three other commands that create text fields to
+display results from a quiz with points assigned:
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item \verb+\PointsField[#1]#2+: The number of points earned for the quiz, the
+    total points are also reported. The parameter \texttt{\#2} is the base name
+    of the quiz.
+    \item \verb+\PercentField[#1]#2+: The percentage score for the
+    quiz. The parameter \texttt{\#1} is the base name of the quiz.
+    \item \verb+\GradeField[#1]#2+: The letter grade of the
+    performance on the quiz. The parameter \texttt{\#2} is the
+    base name of the quiz. The values placed in this field are determined
+    by the macro \cs{eqGradeScale}.
+\end{itemize}
+\item \cs{eqGradeScale}: This macro sets the grade scale of a quiz, the default
+definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\eqGradeScale{"A",[90, 100],"B",[80,90],
+    "C",[70,80],"D",[60,70],"F",[0,60]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The ways things are defined now, there can be only one grade scale
+per document.  The value of \cs{eqGradeScale} is a matrix with an
+even number of elements. The odd numbered elements are the grades;
+the even number elements are intervals of percentages (percentages
+of the total number of points on the quiz). If the percentage of
+the score falls into a particular range, the corresponding grade
+is assigned.
+
+\item[] Note, obviously, you can redefine this command. The
+letter grades do not actually have to be grades, they can be little
+messages to the student upon completion of the quiz.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\eqGradeScale{%
+    "Excellent Work.",[90, 100],
+    "Solid Effort.",[80,90],
+    "Fair.",[70,80],
+    "Needs improvement, better work expected.",[60,70],
+    "Learning still in progress.",[0,60]
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{questions}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{negPointsAllowed}}{\CMD{negPointsAllowed}}}\label{negPtsAllowed}
+
+The \texttt{answers} and \texttt{manswers} environments allow for partial credit,
+and even assigning of negative points for wrong answers (see \Nameref{manswersQuiz});
+consequently, it is possible for a student taking a quiz to get a
+negative points for the quiz. By default \textsf{exerquiz} reports a point score of zero
+to \cs{PointsField} if the points are negative.
+
+If you want exerquiz to report the true point score, use the command
+\cs{neg\-Points\-Allowed} in the preamble. This will allow the reporting
+of a negative point total.
+
+%\exPDF{manswers} See the example file for this feature \texttt{manswers.tex}.
+%Compare the results of when the default behavior is used, versus
+%the results when \cs{negPointsAllowed} is used in the preamble.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=903} See the source file for the PDF \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=903}{manswers.pdf}}.
+Compare the results of when the default behavior is used, versus
+the results when \cs{negPointsAllowed} is used in the preamble.
+
+\subsection{Floating a Quiz}\label{floatQuiz}
+
+The quiz structure is to have a `Begin Quiz' button or link at the
+beginning of the quiz and an `End Quiz' button or link at the end.
+In some settings, you might want to place the `Begin Quiz' button on
+another page, with, perhaps, some instructions. For this purpose
+\textsf{exerquiz} defines five commands \Com{DeclareQuiz},
+\Com{floatQuiz}, \Com{startQuizHere}, \Com{endQuizHere} and
+\Com{dockQuiz}.
+
+The \cs{DeclareQuiz} command takes one argument, which is the name
+of the quiz, for example \verb!\DeclareQuiz{myQuiz}!. This command
+takes it argument and creates a text macro \cs{currQuiz}, which
+expands to the quiz name. \cs{currQuiz} can then be used in the
+\texttt{quiz} environment command argument for the quiz name. This
+makes it easy to change the names without having to search through
+and make all changes.
+
+The command \cs{floatQuiz} declares the current quiz, as set by the
+\cs{DeclareQuiz} command, is floating, which means the `Begin Quiz' and
+`End Quiz' link-text or buttons are separated from their usual placement
+and are allowed to ``float.'' The third command \cs{startQuizHere}
+inserts the `Begin Quiz' link text or form button, while the
+\cs{endQuizHere} command inserts the `End Quiz' link or form button.
+
+\newtopic For example,
+
+\DeclareQuiz{myQuiz}
+\useBeginQuizButton[\CA{Start}\RC{the}\AC{Quiz}\BC{}\W0]
+\useEndQuizButton[\CA{End}\RC{the}\AC{Quiz}\BC{}\W0]
+\floatQuiz
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{\begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+Solve each of the following problems. To begin the quiz,
+click on the \startQuizHere\space button.
+\end{minipage}}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\begin{quiz}{\currQuiz}
+Answer these questions truthfully.
+\begin{questions}
+  \item Do you understanding the concept of \cs{floatQuiz}?
+  \begin{answers}{4}
+    \Ans1 Yes & \Ans0 No
+  \end{answers}
+  \item Do you understanding the concept of \cs{dockQuiz}?
+  \begin{answers}*{4}
+    \Ans0 Yes & \Ans1 No
+    \begin{solution}
+      You can't understand it until I explain it!
+    \end{solution}
+  \end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+\fcolorbox{blue}{webyellow}{\begin{minipage}{.67\linewidth}
+After you have finished the quiz, click on the
+\endQuizHere\space button. Click the\ \smash[b]{\CorrButton[\CA{Correct}\RC{the}\AC{Quiz}\S{S}\BC{}\W0]\currQuiz}\ button
+if you
+wish and your quiz will be marked. Click on the choice with
+the green border to jump to the solution.
+\end{minipage}}
+\end{flushleft}
+\dockQuiz
+
+\newtopic To return to the default behavior of the quiz environment
+place  \cs{dockQuiz} following the quiz. Quizzes that come
+after the \cs{dockQuiz} will then have the standard quiz format.
+
+%\exPDF{floatquiz} See the example file \texttt{floatquiz.tex} for the {\LaTeX} code of the above example.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=897} See the source file for the PDF
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=897}{floatquiz.pdf}} for the {\LaTeX} code
+of the above example.
+
+
+\section{Objective Style Questions}\label{s:oQ}
+
+Beginning with version~2.0 of \textsf{exerquiz}, objective style
+questions can be posed. Single questions can be posed in the
+\texttt{\hyperref[ss:oquestion]{oQuestion}} environment,
+multiple questions can be placed in either the \texttt{shortquiz}
+or the \texttt{quiz} environments. This section discusses this
+type of question and all of its supporting commands.
+
+
+\subsection{Math and Text Questions}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} distinguishes between two types of open ended or objective
+questions:
+\begin{questions}
+\item A mathematical question that requires a mathematical expression
+as the answer.
+\item A question that requires a text answer.
+\end{questions}
+
+\redpoint The demo file \texttt{jquiztst.tex} is an important
+source of examples and instruction for the mathematical type
+question; additionally, the file \texttt{jtxttst.tex} has many
+examples for the text type question.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The Mathematical Question}
+
+At this stage in the development of \textsf{exerquiz}, a
+(mathematical) question can be posed that requires an answer that
+is a function of one or more declared variables $x$, $y$, $z$, etc.
+Thus, when the declared variables $x$, $y$, $z$ are given a value,
+the answer is reduced to a number.
+%\begin{questions}
+%\item A question that has a numerical value.
+%\item A question that has a symbolic answer in one variable, $x$.
+%The symbolic answer must reduce, however, to a numerical value
+%when $x$ is given a numerical value.
+%\end{questions}
+%Thus, only questions whose answers can be reduced to numerical
+%values can be posed.
+
+For example, the answer to the question ``Differentiate $\frac
+d{dx} \sin^2(x)$'', is a function in one variable $x$, it can be
+evaluated numerically and can, therefore, be posed:
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{ex1}
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =
+$\space\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\smallskip
+See \Nameref{ss:respbox} for details.
+
+In contrast, consider the question: ``Name the probability
+distribution popularly referred to as the `bell-shaped curve' ''.
+The answer to this question cannot be reduced to a numerical
+value. This question can be posed as an \hyperref[sss:oTxtQ]{text
+objective question}, or, it does lend itself to a multiple choice
+question, however.
+
+\subsubsection{The Text Question}\label{sss:oTxtQ}
+
+You can also pose questions that require a text answer:
+
+\redpoint\begin{oQuestion}{exTxt2}
+Name the probability
+distribution popularly referred to as the ``bell-shaped curve''.\\
+\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+See \Nameref{ss:respboxtxt} for details.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{oQuestion} Environment}\label{ss:oquestion}
+
+The \texttt{oQuestion} environment is a very simple environment
+for posing a \textit{single} question and will be used in this
+section to discuss in detail the macros for posing mathematical
+and text open questions.
+
+The syntax for the \texttt{oQuestion} environment is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{oQuestion}{!ameta(field_name)}
+    !ameta(A math or text open ended question.)
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The environment takes one required argument, a unique name for the question.
+This name, \texttt{field\_name}, is used by other supporting
+macros.
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxMath}}
+{\textbackslash RespBoxMath}: The Math Question}\label{ss:respbox}
+
+%\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBox},
+%\protect\cs{Resp\-BoxNT}}{\textbackslash RespBox, \textbackslash
+%RespBoxNT}}
+
+The \cs{RespBoxMath} command is used for posing an objective
+question. This command must appear in the \texttt{oQuestion},
+\texttt{short\-quiz} or \texttt{quiz} environments. In this
+section we discuss only the \texttt{oQuestion} environment.
+
+The following is a \hypertarget{minExample}{minimal example}.
+Additional enhancements will be discussed in subsequent sections.
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine1}
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\par\medskip\noindent
+The code for the above example is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine1}
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The \cs{RespBoxMath} need not appear in math mode. The definition
+of the \cs{redpoint} command, a command written for this document follows.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\redpoint{\par\removelastskip\vskip\medskipamount
+  \noindent\makebox[\parindent][l]{\large
+    \color{red}$\blacktriangleright$}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic You can also pose multivariate questions as well, for example
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{multivariate}
+\redpoint $\dfrac{\partial}{\partial y} {4 x^2 y^3 }
+    = \RespBoxMath{12*x^2*y^2}(xy){4}{.0001}{[0,1]x[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\par\medskip\noindent
+The code for the above example is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{multivariate}
+\redpoint $\dfrac{\partial}{\partial y} {4 x^2 y^3 }
+    = \RespBoxMath{12*x^2*y^2}(xy){4}{.0001}{[0,1]x[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent See the file \texttt{multivar.tex} for more examples
+quizzes involving multivariate problems.
+
+The algorithm used for determining the correctness of the answer
+entered by the user is very simple: The user's answer and the
+correct answer are evaluated at randomly selected points in an
+interval, then compared. If any of the comparisons differ by more
+than a pre-selected amount, an $\epsilon$ value, if you will, the
+user's answer is declared incorrect; otherwise, it is considered
+correct.\footnote{The idea for evaluating user input in this way
+comes from  Drs.\ Wlodzimierz Bryc and Stephan Pelikan of The
+University of  Cincinnati.}
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{RespBoxMath} takes ten parameters,
+five optional and five required:%\hypertarget{respboxargs}{}
+\begin{dCmd}{.67\linewidth}
+\RespBoxMath[#1]#2(#3)[#4]#5#6#7#8[#9]*#10
+\end{dCmd}
+\paragraph*{Parameters:}\label{paraRespBox}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
+    text field. See the section entitled \nameref{sss:CorrButton} for examples, and \textsf{exerquiz.dtx}
+    for a listing of all controlling macros.
+\item[\ttfamily\#2 :] The correct answer to the question.
+    This must be a numerical value, or a function of one or more variable(s).
+
+\item[\ttfamily\hypertarget{paraRespBoxThree}{\#3} :] An optional parameter, \textit{delimited by
+parentheses}, that defines the independent variable; \texttt{x},
+is the default value. Note that this parameter is set off by
+parentheses.  For a multivariate question, just list the variables
+in juxtaposition, \texttt{(xyz)}.
+
+Beginning with version 5.5 of \textsf{exerquiz}, an alternate
+method is to delimit with commas \texttt{(x,y,n)} and include the
+type of the variables \texttt{(r:x,r:y,i:n)}, where \texttt{"r"}
+means a real variable and \texttt{"i"} means an integer variable.
+When a type is not specified explicitly, \texttt{"r"} is assumed.
+The variables must be either of the old style (no commas, no
+typing) or the new style. Do  not mix the styles.
+
+See the \hyperlink{exofT}{example} in \Nameref{enhancements}
+of the section below and see the demo file \texttt{integer\_test.tex} to
+demonstrate the new method for specifying variables, found in the
+\texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder.
+
+\textbf{Multi-letter variables.} Beginning with v8.0 (2017/08/08) support for
+multi-letter variables and appearance replacement is added. Within the
+\texttt{\#3}, use the following notation:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(x\rpl{alpha}{y}z)
+\end{Verbatim}
+This declares three variables, \texttt{x}, \texttt{alpha}, and \texttt{z}.
+What in fact is taking place is that \texttt{alpha} is replaced by \texttt{y}
+and processing continues from there.
+
+\textbf{Alternate appearances.} Additionally, there is  now a scheme for
+replacing the variables with alternate appearances.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(x\rpl{alpha->\\u03B1}{y}z)
+\end{Verbatim}
+The arrow notation (\texttt{->}) tells \pkg{exerquiz} to replace
+\texttt{alpha} with the unicode character \verb~\u03B1~ (note the double
+backslash above), which is the Greek letter alpha ($\alpha$). You can
+separate the variables with commas and use the type specification as well.
+But as noted above, use either the old style (no commas) or the new style
+(with commas), \emph{never mix the two together in one argument.}
+
+Below is a simple example of multi-letter variables with appearance replacement. Enter
+\texttt{alpha} for $\alpha$ and \texttt{theta} for $\theta$.
+\begin{oQuestion}{oQ2}
+\begin{equation*}
+    \dfrac{\partial}{\partial\theta}\alpha \sin(\theta)=
+    \RespBoxMath[\rectW{1.5in}]{alpha cos(theta)}(\rpl{alpha->\\u03B1}{x}\rpl{theta->\\u03B8}{y})
+    {3}{0.0001}{[0,3.14]x[0,3.14]}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+The verbatim listing for this question follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\begin{oQuestion}{oQ2}
+\begin{equation*}
+  \dfrac{\partial}{\partial\theta}\alpha \sin(\theta)=
+  \RespBoxMath[\rectW{1.5in}]
+    {alpha cos(theta)}
+    (\rpl{alpha->\\u03B1}{x}\rpl{theta->\\u03B8}{y})
+    {3}{0.0001}{[0,3.14]*2}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1330} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1330}{ml-vars.pdf}} for a demonstration of
+multi-letter variables and alternate appearances.
+
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#4 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution to the
+    question. There are two forms: the \texttt{[mydest]} an explicit
+    destination for the solution to the problem, or a `\texttt*', in which
+    case, the name is \texttt{[\string\curr@quiz.\string\thequestionno]} is
+    automatically assigned.
+
+If this parameter appears, a solution must follow the
+question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment.
+
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#5 :] The number of samples points to be used, usually 3 or 4 is
+sufficient.
+\item[\ttfamily\#6 :] Precision required, a \emph{non-negative}
+    ``$\epsilon$'' value, if you will. If the precision is set to zero,
+    \texttt{reldiffCompare} is used as the default compare, and the precision
+    is set to a small positive value, \text{1E-14}, by default. The small
+    value is may reset with \cs{defaultRDPrecision}. The default definition,
+    \verb!\defaultRDPrecision{1E-14}!.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#7 :] Parameters \#7 and \#8 are  used to define the interval
+    from which to draw the sample points. There are two forms: (1) \#7 is the
+    left-hand endpoint of the interval and \#8 is the right-hand endpoint
+    (the use of \#7 and \#8 in this form is deprecated); (2) the interval is
+    defined by standard interval notation, \texttt{[a,b]}. For a multivariate
+    question---one where parameter \#2 lists more than one variable---separate
+    the intervals for each variable by a `\texttt{x}',
+    \texttt{[0,2]x[1,2]x[3,4]}.
+
+
+\textbf{Interval repetition.} Beginning with v8.0 (2017/08/08),
+\pkg{exerquiz} allows \emph{interval repetition}. It is not unusual that the
+cartesian product of the same interval is needed, eg,
+\texttt{[0,1]x[0,1]x[0,1]}; rather than typing those repetitive interval
+specifications, you can simple use the notation \texttt{[0,1]*3}. The general
+syntax for an interval is now \texttt{\ameta{interval}*\ameta{num}}; the
+`\texttt{*\ameta{num}}' portion is optional, \ameta{num} is an positive
+integer. Note that `\texttt{*\ameta{num}}' follows the interval
+specification, this is \emph{vitally important} for the correct parsing of
+the expression.
+
+The notation may be mixed in with additional interval
+    specifications; thus, for example, `\texttt{[0,1]*3x[1,2]x[2,3]*2}' expands to
+    `\texttt{[0,1]x[0,1]x[0,1]x[1,2]\penalty0x\penalty0[2,3]x[2,3]}'.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1330} See the file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1330}{ml-vars.pdf}} for a demonstration of
+interval repetition.
+
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#8 :] (1) \#8 is the right-hand endpoint of the interval (the
+    use of this parameter is deprecated); (2) in the second case, \#8 is not
+    used.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#9 :]\label{paraRespBoxNine} This optional parameter is the name of a customized
+comparison function.
+
+Beginning with version 5.5 of \textsf{exerquiz}, this argument can also be
+a JavaScript object with at most two properties: \texttt{priorParse} and
+\texttt{comp}. \texttt{priorParse} is used to insert additional JavaScript
+into \texttt{ProcResp} prior to processing the user's answer; this allows
+additional ``filtering'' of the user's response. The value of
+\texttt{priorParse} can either be a single function, or an array of
+functions. These functions take \texttt{UserAns} as its argument and
+return either \texttt{null}, if \texttt{UserAns} is not acceptable, or
+\texttt{true}, if it is ok for processing. The value of \texttt{comp} is
+the name of the function to be used to compare answers.
+
+See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex} for examples of usage.
+
+%There is a built-in filter function, \texttt{requireForm}, that may be quite useful
+%for filtering out responses that that are not of a specified form. See
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#10:] (Only detected if following an asterisk, `\texttt*')
+The name of a JavaScript function that is to be used to process the user input.
+\end{description}
+
+\redpoint For the above example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent no optional parameter is specified. The correct answer written in
+valid JavaScript is given by \verb+2*sin(x)*cos(x)+; evaluation of the
+user's answer is done by randomly selecting 4 points from the
+interval $[\,0,1\,]$; if the evaluation at any of the 4 points
+differs from the evaluation of the correct answer at the same
+point by more than $\epsilon=0.0001$, the user's answer is
+considered wrong.
+
+Once you choose the question to ask, you must then select the
+values of the parameters for \cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\noindent\redpoint \textbf{Some Comments}:
+\begin{questions}
+\item The correct answer can be written either with valid JavaScript,
+or in the same syntax a user would enter the answer with. The
+functions and operators are pretty much as expected. See the
+demo file \textsf{jquiztst.tex} for some discussion how authors
+and users should enter their answers.
+
+\item The interval from which the sample points are taken
+needs to be chosen with care. The interval must, obviously, be a
+subset of the domain of the answer function. Choose an interval
+away from any singularities the answer may have.
+
+%\item The JavaScript of Acrobat 5.0 does have exception
+%handling, but this has not been incorporated into the code yet.
+%Taking advantage of this new capability will be my next project.
+%Exception handling will give the code protection against user's
+%entering spurious answers. For example, based on the correct
+%answer, the author chooses the interval $[\,0,1\,]$, but the user
+%enters a function whose domain does not contain the interval, such
+%as \verb=(x-1)^(1/2)=.
+\end{questions}
+
+%\exPDF{jquiztst} See the file \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#jquiztst}
+%{jquiztst.pdf} for various examples of the math questions.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=810} See the PDF file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=810}{jquiztst.pdf}} for various examples of
+the math questions.
+
+\newtopic\indent
+By using the optional first parameter, you can modify the appearance
+of the field ``locally.'' There is also a ``global'' mechanism as well:
+
+\newtopic\textbf{Global Modification:} \cs{everyeqTextField}, \cs{everyRespBoxMath}
+
+\newtopic The first one modifies the appearance of every quiz text field,
+and the second can be used to modify all fields created using
+\cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\redpoint See the document \href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}  for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first
+argument, and how to use the ``every'' command.\footnote{eforms manual on Web: \url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxTxt}}%
+    {\textbackslash RespBoxTxt}: The Text Question}\label{ss:respboxtxt}
+
+You can also pose a question that takes a simple text response. The
+basic command for posing this type of question is
+\cs{RespBoxTxt}. Consider the example given
+earlier:
+\begin{oQuestion}{exTxt1}
+\redpoint Name the probability
+distribution popularly referred to as the ``bell-shaped curve''.\\
+\mbox{\strut\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}%
+{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}}
+%\raisebox{-3bp}{\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}%
+%{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+The underlying JavaScript compares the user's response against
+acceptable alternatives, as supplied by the author of the
+question. If there is a match, the response is deemed correct.
+
+The code for this example is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{exTxt1}
+\redpoint Name the probability distribution popularly
+referred to as the ``bell-shaped curve''.\\
+\RespBoxTxt{0}{0}{4}{Normal}{Normal Distribution}%
+{Gaussian}{Gaussian Distribution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The command \cs{RespBoxTxt} takes five or more parameters.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\RespBoxTxt[#1]#2#3[#4]#5!ameta(list of alternatives)
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent\textbf{\hypertarget{paraRespBoxTxt}{Parameters:}}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\ttfamily\#1 :] Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
+    text field. See the section entitled \nameref{sss:CorrButton},
+    page~\pageref*{sss:CorrButton} for examples, and
+    \textsf{exerquiz.dtx} for a listing of all controlling macros.
+\item[\ttfamily\#2 :] This required parameter is a number that indicates
+the filtering method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
+\begin{description}
+    \item[\ttfamily -1: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are not filtered
+    in any way. (Spaces, case, and punctuation are preserved.)
+    \item[\ttfamily 0: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+    lower case, any white space and non-word characters are removed.
+    \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+    lower case, any white space is removed.
+    \item[\ttfamily 2: ] The author's and user's answers are stripped of any
+    white space.
+\end{description}
+See the JavaScript function \texttt{eqFilter} in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} for the
+program code details.  Additional filtering options may be added.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#3 :] This parameter a number that indicates the compare
+method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
+\begin{description}
+    \item[\ttfamily 0: ] (The default) The author's and user's answers are
+    compared for an exact match. (These answers are filtered before they are
+    compared.)
+    \item[\ttfamily 1: ] The user's response is searched in an attempt to
+    get a substring match with the author's alternatives. Additional comparison
+    methods may be added.
+\end{description}
+See the JavaScript function \texttt{compareTxt} in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} for the
+program code details.
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#4 :] Optional, a named destination to the solution
+to the question. If this parameter appears, then a solution must
+follow the question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution} environment. If
+the fourth parameter is a `\texttt*', then an automatic naming scheme
+is used instead.
+\item[\ttfamily\#5 :] This required parameter is the number of alternative
+answers that are acceptable. The alternative answers are listed
+immediately after this parameter. (The example above specified
+that 4 alternatives follow.)
+\end{description}
+
+%\exPDF{jtxttst} See the file \href{\bUrl/webeq_ex.html\#jtxttst}
+%{jtxttst.pdf} for examples of the differences between various combinations
+%of filtering rules and comparison methods.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=813} See the PDF file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=813}{jtxttst.pdf}}  for examples of the
+differences between various combinations of filtering rules and comparison
+methods.
+
+
+\newtopic By using the optional first parameter, you can modify the appearance
+of the field ``locally''. There is also a ``global'' mechanism as well:
+
+\newtopic\textbf{Global Modification:} \cs{everyeqTextField} and \cs{everyRespBoxTxt}
+
+\newtopic The first mechanism modifies the appearance of every quiz text
+field, the second can be used to modify all fields created using
+\cs{RespBoxTxt}.
+
+\redpoint See the document \href{eformman.pdf}{eFormMan.pdf} on
+\textit{\href{eformman.pdf}{eForm Support}} for complete
+documentation on how to modify a field using the optional first
+argument, and how to use the ``every'' command.\footnote{eforms manual on Web: \url{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}}
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxTxtPC}}%
+    {\textbackslash RespBoxTxtPC}: The Text Question with Partial Credit}\label{ss:respboxtxtpc}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} can now create text fill-in questions that awards
+credit each time one of the key words are found in the student's input string.
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} is the one that creates a text fill-in question. Its
+syntax is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]
+\RespBoxTxtPC[#1]#2[#3]#4[!meta(num1)]{!meta(word1)}...[!meta(num_n)]{!meta(word_n)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The new command \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} behaves differently than \cs{RespBoxTxt}.
+JavaScript performs a regular expression search for each word listed (the word,
+can be a regular expression), if the word is found (the search is successful), the total credit
+for this problem is incremented by the amount associated with the word.
+
+\medskip\noindent\textbf{\hypertarget{paraRespBoxTxtPC}{Parameters:}}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item[\ttfamily\#1:]Optional parameter used to modify the appearance of the
+    text field.
+\item[\ttfamily\#2:]This required parameter is a number indicating
+the filtering method to be used. Permissible values of this parameter are
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item[\ttfamily-1:] (The default) The author's and user's answers are not filtered
+    in any way. (Spaces, case, and punctuation are preserved.)
+    \item[\ttfamily0:] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+    lower case, any white space and non-word characters are removed.
+    \item[\ttfamily1:] The author's and user's answers are converted to
+    lower case, any white space is removed.
+    \item[\ttfamily2:] The author's and user's answers are stripped of
+    white space.
+    \item[\ttfamily 3:] Same as -1, but a case insensitive search is performed.
+    \emph{This is the recommended value for this function.}
+\end{enumerate}
+See the JavaScript function \texttt{eqFilter} in \texttt{exerquiz.dtx} for
+program code details.  Additional filtering options may be added.
+
+\textbf{Recommendation:} For \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}, use either~-1
+(case sensitive search) or~3 (case insensitive search).
+
+\item[\ttfamily\#3:] Optional, a named destination to the
+solution to the question. If this parameter appears, then a
+solution must follow the question, enclosed in a \texttt{solution}
+environment.  If the third parameter is a `\texttt*', then an automatic
+naming scheme is used instead.
+\item[\ttfamily\#4:] This required parameter is the
+number of alternative answers that are acceptable. The alternative
+answers are listed immediately after this parameter.
+\item[]The parameters that follow \texttt{\#4} are of the form
+\texttt{[\meta{num}]\darg{\meta{word}}}. The \texttt{[\meta{num}]} is the amount of credit
+the user gets if his answer contains \meta{word}. Actually,
+\texttt{\meta{word}} can be a regular expression so that a more sophisticated
+search criteria can be set up. This is illustrated in the examples above,
+and explained below.
+
+A \cs{RespBoxTxtPC} question is deemed correct (and marked with a green rectangle,
+in the case of a quiz) if at least one of the words is found.
+
+If a word does not have a partial credit \texttt{[\meta{num}]} before it, that word has a partial
+credit of zero, and may as well not be included in the list of words.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+%\exPDF{jtxttst_pc} The demo file for this section is \texttt{jtxttst\_pc.tex}.
+%The file contains extensive examples, and discusses techniques of searching
+%using regular expressions.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=296} The demo file for this section is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=296}{jtxttst\_pc.pdf}}.  The file contains
+extensive examples, and discusses techniques of searching using regular
+expressions.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Some Enhancements}\label{enhancements}
+
+There are several enhancements to the math (using \cs{RespBoxMath})
+and text (using \cs{Resp\-Box\-Txt}) open-ended question beyond the
+minimal examples given earlier. These enhancements can be used
+within the \texttt{oQuestion}, the \texttt{shortquiz}, and the
+\texttt{quiz} environments.
+
+\subsubsection{Including an Answer Key with \texorpdfstring
+{\protect\cs{CorrAnsButton}}{\textbackslash CorrAnsButton}}
+
+The correct solution can be included in the question as well; just include
+the command \cs{Corr\-Ans\-Button}. This command takes one parameter, the correct
+answer that will be viewed when the user clicks on the button.
+
+The example below also illustrates the (optional) third parameter of
+\cs{RespBoxMath}. Here we pose the question in the variable $t$ rather
+than the default variable of $x$.
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine2}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t){4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine2}\\[1ex]
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t){4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The \cs{CorrAnsButton} takes one parameter, the correct answer.
+This answer is (usually) the same as the one given as the second
+argument (the optional argument is the first) in the \cs{RespBoxMath}
+command.
+
+\redpoint The \cs{CorrAnsButton} also controls access to the (optional) solution, see
+the next section.
+
+\subsubsection{Including a Solution}\label{inclsoln}
+
+In addition to a correct answer, you can also include a solution
+to the question. Insert the optional fourth parameter---fourth for both
+\cs{RespBoxMath} and \cs{RespBoxTxt}---into the parameter list giving the name of
+the destination to the solution.  Follow the question by a \texttt{solution}
+environment containing the solution.
+
+The user \texttt{Shift-Click}s on the \cs{CorrAnsButton} button to jump
+to the solution.
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine3}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t)[sine3]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+    \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine3}\\[1ex]
+\redpoint Differentiate $\dfrac d{dt} \sin^2(t) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}(t)[sine3]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(t)*cos(t)}
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+    \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The \cs{CorrAnsButton} works the same way for the \texttt{shortquiz} and
+the \texttt{quiz} environments.
+
+\newtopic Actually, \cs{CorrAnsButton} has an optional argument. The full syntax is
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{CorrAnsButton\darg{\meta{display\_answer}}*\darg{\meta{JS\_function}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\CorrAnsButton{!meta(display_answer)}*{!meta(JS_function)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic When the \texttt* is detected following the \meta{display\_answer}, the \meta{JS\_function}
+is used to evaluate \meta{display\_answer}, before displaying it.  There is
+one built-in function called \texttt{EvalCorrAnsButton}, the definition of
+which is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+function EvalCorrAnsButton(fieldname,theanswer)
+{
+    theanswer = eval(theanswer);
+    DisplayAnswer(fieldname,theanswer);
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Other JavaScript functions may be defined using the \texttt{insDLJS} environment, then
+passed to \cs{CorrAnsButton} with the optional argument.
+
+An example of this optional parameter is
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{add1}
+\redpoint Perform the indicated operation, and enter
+result into the box.\\[1ex]
+$ \text{9} + \text{8} =$
+\RespBoxMath{9 + 8}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{9 + 8}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{add1}
+\redpoint Perform the indicated operation, and enter
+result into the box.\\[1ex]
+$ 9 + 8 = $
+\RespBoxMath{9 + 8}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}\kern1bp
+    \CorrAnsButton{9 + 8}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Including a Tally Box}
+
+The macro \cs{sqTallyBox} is used to keep a running total of the
+number of wrong answers a user has entered into the response box.
+
+For example,
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine4}
+\redpoint \hypertarget{exofT}{Differentiate}\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine4}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The tally box can be used within the \texttt{oQuestion}
+and \texttt{shortquiz} environments; in the \texttt{quiz}
+environment, no tally box is used.
+
+\subsubsection{Clearing the Fields}
+
+For the \texttt{oQuestion} and the \texttt{shortquiz}
+environments, you can clear the response box fields by placing
+insert \cs{sqClearButton}.
+
+
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine5}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox\kern1bp\sqClearButton
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{sine5}
+\redpoint Differentiate\\[1ex]
+$\dfrac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}\kern1bp
+\sqTallyBox\kern1bp\sqClearButton
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Notice that I've inserted a \cs{kern1bp} to separate the
+two fields \cs{sqTallyBox} and \cs{sq\-Clear\-Button}. This is to keep
+their borders from overlapping.
+
+\subsection{More on Math Fill-in Questions}\label{s:moremath}
+
+This section covers rules for author and user input into a math fill-in question.
+
+\subsubsection{Comments on Authoring}\label{s:mathauthoring}
+
+When authoring a math fill-in, that is, when using \cs{RespBoxMath} to
+construct a question, several things must be kept in mind.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item The \hyperref[paraRespBox]{second parameter} of \cs{RespBoxMath},
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\RespBoxMath[#1]#2(#3)[#4]#5#6#7#8[#9]*#10
+\end{Verbatim}
+    is the correct answer parameter. You need not compute the
+    correct answer, you can let the JavaScript of exerquiz do that.
+    For example, if the answer is $\sqrt{2}$ you can enter
+    \texttt{sqrt(2)}. All the rules of entering user input outlined
+    in the next section on
+    \begin{NoHyper}`\nameref{ss:userinput}'\end{NoHyper} holds for
+    this second parameter as well.
+
+    \item[] If you choose to restrict user input in some way, perhaps using the \texttt{limitArith}
+    option of \textsf{dljslib}, these limitations only apply to the user input, not to the author's
+    input in parameter \texttt{\#2}. See \Nameref{limitArith} for more information on how to limit
+    arithmetic operations.
+
+    \item The question must posed so as to make it clear to the student what is expected
+    by way of input into the text field, an expression, an equation, and so on.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsubsection{Comments on User Input}\label{ss:userinput}
+
+When responding to a Math Fill-in question, the student responds by typing
+in an answer.  The following notation is expected by \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use \texttt{*} to indicate multiplication: Type \texttt{4*x} for $4x$.
+
+\item[] If the \texttt{ImplMulti} option of the \textsf{dljslib} package is taken, then the
+    student need only type in \texttt{4x} for $4x$. Exerquiz attempts to
+    insert the multiplication symbol \texttt{*} by parsing the user input.
+    For information on, see the section on \Nameref{ImplMulti}.
+
+\item Use \verb|^| to indicate powers: Type \verb|4*x^3| for
+$4x^3$; \verb|12*x^-6| for $12x^{-6}$. Again, if the \texttt{ImplMulti} option is taken,
+entering \verb|12x^-6| is sufficient.
+
+\item Use parentheses to delimit the argument of a function; that is, type
+\texttt{sin(x)}, rather than \texttt{sin~x}.
+
+\item Use parentheses to define the \textit{scope} of an operation: Type \verb|4*x*(x^2+1)^3| for $4x(x^2+1)^3$;
+    \verb|4^(2*x+1)| for $4^{2x+1}$; \verb|(sin(x))^2| for $(\sin(x))^2$. \textit{Do not} type an expression like
+    \verb|sin^2(x)| for $\sin^2(x)$, type \verb|(sin(x))^2| instead.
+
+\item[] If the \texttt{ImplMulti} option of the \textsf{dljslib} package is taken,
+    the use of \texttt{*} is unnecessary, but also the simplified notation for powers
+    of functions is supported, now you can  type \verb|sin^2(x)| for $\sin^2(x)$.
+
+\item Brackets \texttt{[ ]} or braces \texttt{\{ \}} can be used
+to delimit mathematical expressions.
+
+\item Functions that are recognized:
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item Trig: \texttt{sin}, \texttt{cos}, \texttt{tan}, \texttt{cot}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{csc}.
+    \item  Inverse Trig: \texttt{arcsin} (or \texttt{asin}) , \texttt{arccos} (or \texttt{acos}),
+           \texttt{arctan} (or \texttt{atan}).
+    \item  Logarithms: \texttt{ln} for natural logs, and  \texttt{log} for common logs.
+           For example, \texttt{ln(x)} or \texttt{log(x)}.
+    \item  Exponential: The natural exponential function, $e^x$,
+           can be entered as \texttt{exp(x)} or as \verb|e^x|.
+    \item  The absolute function, \texttt{abs($\cdot$)} can also be written
+           in the usual way \texttt{|$\cdot$|}; thus, you can type either
+           \texttt{abs(x)} or \texttt{|x|}.
+    \item  Misc.: \texttt{sqrt}, usage \texttt{sqrt(x)} for $\sqrt{x}$ (or, use
+           exponential notation: \verb|x^(1/2)|).
+    \item[] When the \texttt{combinatorics} option of \textsf{dljslib} is taken, the binomial coefficient function
+            \texttt{C(n,r)}, the permutation function \texttt{P(n,r)}, and the factorial function
+            \texttt{fact}, are defined. See \Nameref{combinatorics} for additional details.
+\end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+A variation of these listings should appear as instructions to the student on how to enter
+math fill-in questions.
+
+\newtopic When a user enters a response, some attempt is made to
+determine whether the response is a valid mathematical expression.
+For example, if \texttt{san(x)} is entered, the function `\texttt{san}' will
+not be recognized as a valid mathematical function; an error
+message is generated, and the user is not penalized for a possible
+typing error. The JavaScript routines will also check for
+unbalanced parentheses; thus, \verb|((x^4+1) + sin(x)^2| will be
+flagged as a syntax error.
+
+\Important The student must use the variables declared for the
+problem when entering mathematical expressions. If the problem
+statement involves the variable $x$, then \texttt{x} must be used;
+if the problem statement uses $t$, then \texttt{t} must be used.
+To enter an expression using $t$ when an expression with variable $x$ is expected will,
+no doubt, result in missed problem.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{shortquiz} Environment}\label{s:oQsq}
+
+The objective question (with or without the presence of a
+correction box, \cs{corr\-Ans\-Button} or a tally box \cs{sqTallyBox})
+can be mixed in with multiple choice questions.
+
+Solutions to the questions can also be included using a
+\texttt{solution} environment. Click on the ``Ans'' button to get
+the answer to a question; shift-click on the ``Ans'' button to get
+the solution.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}[oQsq]
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}\hfill\sqTallyBox
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}[sinsqx]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+    \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized as a founder of
+Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[newton]{5}%
+{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{questions}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered founders of
+Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+\end{shortquiz}%\hfill
+%\begin{flushright}
+%\sqClearButton\kern1bp\sqTallyTotal
+%\end{flushright}
+
+\redpoint When using objective questions within a
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment, you must give a unique field name
+as an optional argument of the environment. The listing of this
+example follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}[oQsq]  % <-- unique field name
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}\hfill\sqTallyBox
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}[sinsqx]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+    \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized
+as a founder of Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[newton]{5}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}%
+{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}%
+\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered
+founders of Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\begin{flushright}
+\sqClearButton\kern1bp\sqTallyTotal %<-- total tally
+\end{flushright}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent\textbf{Example Notes:}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Note the optional argument gives this collection of
+questions a common base name. All supporting macros use this name.
+\item The named destination to the solution is entered with parameter
+\texttt{\#5} of the command \hyperref[paraRespBox]{\cs{RespBoxMath}}, and with parameter
+\texttt{\#4} of \hyperlink{paraRespBoxTxt}{\cs{RespBoxTxt}}.
+\item In this example, another built-in macro,
+\cs{sqTallyTotal} was used. This macro creates a text field that
+accumulates the totals of all the tally boxes.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{shortquiz} environment can also be used for
+a single objective question. Just don't use the
+\texttt{questions} environment within.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}[anExample]
+    !ameta(an objective style question)
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{quiz} Environment}\label{s:oQquiz}
+
+Objective questions can be mixed in with multiple choice questions
+within the \texttt{quiz} environment.  When posing an objective
+style question in the \texttt{quiz} environment, use
+\cs{RespBoxMath} and \cs{RespBoxTxt}, and optionally include
+the \cs{CorrAnsButton} button and the \cs{AnswerField} text field.
+
+Since the evaluation of the quiz is delayed until the user has
+finished the quiz, the \cs{sqTally\-Box} macro is not applicable here.
+
+\begin{quiz*}{oQq}
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}[sinsqx2]{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+\begin{solution}
+\[
+    \frac d{dx}\sin^2(x) = 2\sin(x)\cos(x) = \sin(2x)
+\]
+\end{solution}
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized as a founder of
+Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[leibniz]{5}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered
+founders of Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField{oQq}\CorrButton{oQq}
+
+\noindent Answers: \AnswerField{oQq}
+
+\redpoint The buttons created by \cs{CorrAnsButton} are hidden
+until the user ends the quiz (and gets scored) and clicks on the
+corrections button (\cs{CorrButton}).  The \cs{Corr\-Ans\-Button} should
+not be included if there is no \cs{CorrButton}.
+
+\redpoint Pressing on the ``Ans'' button populates the text
+field created by \cs{AnswerField} with the author's correct answer.
+If there is a solution to the problem, the ``Ans'' button
+is outlined in green. Shift-click on the ``Ans'' button to jump to
+the solution.
+
+\redpoint The \texttt{quiz} environment requires a field name.
+This same name is used by the objective style question as well.
+
+\medbreak
+
+The listing for the above example follows.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{quiz*}{oQq}
+Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item If $f$ is differentiable, then $f$ is continuous.
+\begin{answers}{4}
+\Ans1 True & \Ans0 False
+\end{answers}
+
+\item $\displaystyle\frac d{dx} \sin^2(x) =$
+\RespBoxMath{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{0}{1}%
+\hfill\CorrAnsButton{2*sin(x)*cos(x)}%
+
+\item Name \emph{one} of the two people recognized
+as a founder of Calculus.\vadjust{\kern3pt}\newline
+\RespBoxTxt{2}{0}[leibniz]{5}{Isaac Newton}{Newton}{I. Newton}%
+{Gottfried Leibniz}{Leibniz}\hfill
+\CorrAnsButton{Isaac Newton or Gottfried Leibniz}
+\begin{solution}
+Yes, Isaac Newton and Gottfried Leibniz are considered
+founders of Calculus.
+\end{solution}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField{oQq}\CorrButton{oQq}
+
+\noindent Answers: \AnswerField{oQq}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The \cs{AnswerField} has the following syntax:
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{AnswerField[\anglemeta{field\_opts}]\darg{\meta{base\_name}}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\AnswerField[!anglemeta(field_opts)]{!meta(base_name)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\noindent The parameter \anglemeta{field\_opts} is the typical optional
+parameter for all \textsf{eform} fields; it is used to change the appearance
+of the field. The parameter \meta{base\_name} is the (base) name of the quiz
+this field will hold the answers for.
+
+You may have \cs{AnswerField} commands on several pages---possibly for
+different quizzes. By using the command \cs{resetAnsFieldOnClose}, the
+answer field for the current quiz will be cleared when the page containing
+it closes. You can revert back to the default behavior (answer fields not cleared) by executing
+\cs{noResetAnsFieldOnClose}.
+
+\redpoint There are some additional grade reporting and statistical fields
+defined: \textsf{exerquiz} defines \cs{PointsField}, \cs{PercentField}, and \cs{GradeField}.
+The demo file \texttt{quizpts.tex} illustrates these commands; see also
+the section below entitled \nameref{sss:asignPts}.
+
+\subsubsection{The Prompt Button}
+
+In addition to the \cs{CorrAnsButton}, the document author can
+provide a prompt button (probably not the best descriptive term).
+
+For some quizzes, the author might want to ask a series of
+questions where the answer to one question depends on the correct
+answer of a previous question. In this situation, you'd like to
+provide the correct answer so the student can make a good run at
+the next question. The \cs{@PromptButton} not only provides the
+answer to the question but it also makes the corresponding math
+fill-in read only, so that the student cannot change the answer
+already provided.
+
+Ideally, the student first enters an answer, and once satisfied
+with the answer, can then get the correct answer for future
+questions.
+
+%\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{prompt\_tst.tex} for an example of usage.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=888} See the demo file  \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=888}{prompt\_tst.pdf}} from the {\AcroBlog}
+for an example of usage.
+
+\subsubsection{Grouped Math/Text Fill-in Questions}\label{grouped}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} defines a grouping environment, \texttt{mathGrp},
+for math fill-in and \emph{text fill-in} questions where the response to the question
+might require entering text into multiple math fill-in fields.
+
+When you use the \texttt{mathGrp} environment to enclose a set of
+related math questions, you need to use the \cs{CorrAnsButtonGrp}
+button, instead of the \cs{CorrAnsButton} button. The required
+argument for this button is a comma delimited list of the answers
+that appear within the grouped questions. The answers should be
+listed in the same order {\TeX} processes the math (or text)
+questions. The group of questions is processed as if it were a
+single question.
+
+\redpoint For example\dots
+
+\noindent \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+\useBeginQuizButton[\textColor{0 0 1}\CA{Begin}\AC{}\RC{}\rectW{}]
+\useEndQuizButton[\textColor{0 0 1}\CA{End}\AC{}\RC{}\rectW{}]
+\begin{quiz*}{grpExample}\PTsHook{($\eqPTs^{\text{pts}}$)}\PTs{3}
+Compute the following cross product:
+\begin{equation*}
+\def\vi#1{\setlength{\fboxrule}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxsep}{1bp}
+\fbox{\RespBoxMath[\rectW{11bp}\Q{1}\textSize{0}]{#1}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}}}
+%
+    (3\vec i - 2\vec j) \times (\vec i + 5\vec k) = \begin{mathGrp}\PTs*{1}
+            \vi{-10}\,\vec i + \vi{-15}\, \vec j + \vi{2}\,\vec k
+    \end{mathGrp}\tag*{\CorrAnsButtonGrp{-10,-15,2}}
+%
+\end{equation*}
+\end{quiz*}\ $\underset{\text{ScoreField}}{\underbrace{\ScoreField[\DV{}\V{}\rectW{1in}]\currQuiz}}$%
+    \kern1bp$\underset{\text{PointsField}}{\underbrace{\PointsField[\rectW{1in}]\currQuiz}}$\CorrButton[\CA{Correct}\AC{}\RC{}]\currQuiz
+    \hfill Ans: \AnswerField[\rectW{.5in}]\currQuiz
+\end{minipage}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+\textbf{Notes:}
+\begin{questions}
+\item[\color{blue}\ding{042}] If you miss any one of the three
+answers, the \texttt{ScoreField} reports back `\texttt{Score: 0
+out of 1}'. There is only one question there, to get it correct,
+you must answer all three inputs correctly.
+
+\item[\color{blue}\ding{042}] Points can be assigned to the individual
+    responses and a score is given based on the validity of the inputs and
+    the corresponding points. There is a default JavaScript function that
+    scores the results. The author can define a custom JavaScript function
+    to have a more ``exotic'' method of evaluating the group.  See the
+    test file \texttt{grp\_test.tex} for details.
+
+\item[\color{blue}\ding{042}]Notice that after you take the quiz
+and click on ``Correct'' button, the ``Ans'' button appears (as
+usual). If you click repeatedly on this ``Ans'' button, you can
+cycle through all answers to this question; the response box is
+highlighted (or put in focus) and the answer appears in the answer
+field provided.
+\end{questions}
+
+\redpoint See the demo file \texttt{grp\_test.tex} for the source
+code of this example, as well as more technical details of the
+\texttt{mathGrp} environment.
+
+\subsection{Modifying Form Elements}
+
+All form elements have a first optional parameter for modifying their appearance,
+and they have an associated ``every'' command for global modifications as well.
+
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+\begin{longtable}{|>{\ttfamily}l|>{\PBS\raggedright}p{.5\linewidth}|}
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{\bfseries Global Modification Commands} \\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{\bfseries Global Modification Commands} \\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{For the \texttt{shortquiz} Environment} \\
+\hline
+\cs{Ans} & \cs{everysqRadioButton}\\
+\cs{sqTallyBox} &\cs{everysqTallyBox}\\
+\cs{sqTallyTotal}& \cs{everysqTallyTotal}\\
+\cs{sqClearButton}&\cs{everysqClearButton}\\\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{For the \texttt{quiz} Environment} \\ \hline
+\cs{useBeginQuizButton}&\cs{everyBeginQuizButton}\\
+\cs{useEndQuizButton}&\cs{everyEndQuizButton}\\
+\cs{Ans} & \cs{everyqRadioButton}\\
+\cs{ScoreField}&\cs{everyScoreField}\\
+\cs{CorrButton}&\cs{everyCorrButton}\\
+\cs{AnswerField}&\cs{everyAnswerField}\\
+\cs{PointsField}&\cs{everyPointsField}\\
+\cs{PercentField}&\cs{everyPercentField}\\
+\cs{GradeField}&\cs{everyGradeField}\\\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{For Both Environments} \\ \hline
+\cs{RespBoxMath}&\cs{everyRespBoxMath}\\
+\cs{RespBoxTxt}&\cs{everyRespBoxTxt}\\
+\cs{CorrAnsButton}&\cs{everyCorrAnsButton}
+\end{longtable}
+\end{center}
+
+\handpoint In additional to these, there are other ``every'' commands that effect
+the appearance of the various buttons and text fields. The two commands
+\cs{everyCorrButtonField} and \cs{every\-eqText\-Field} are executed before every
+\texttt{exerquiz} button and text field (respectfully).  These can be used to give
+a general uniform appearance for all the short quiz or quiz form elements; use
+the more specific version, as listed in the above table, to make additional refinements
+in appearance.
+
+\redpoint See the document \href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf} (relative link
+\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}) for complete documentation on how to
+modify a field using the optional first argument, and how to use the
+``every'' mechanism.
+
+\subsection{Inserting additional action and format scripts}\label{ss:AddActScripts}
+
+Global changes in \emph{appearance}, as just discussed, is accomplished using
+any of the \cs{every\ameta{cmdname}} family of commands; however, that device
+cannot, by design, change any of the actions \pkg{exerquiz} has defined.
+S everal key-value pairs are used to insert JavaScript code into response
+boxes, multiple choice, and multiple selection fields.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{addToAction*\darg{\ameta{key}}\darg{\ameta{code}}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\AddAAFormat{!ameta(code)}
+\AddAAKeystroke{!ameta(code)}
+\AddAAMouseUpMC{!ameta(code)}
+\AddAAMouseUpMS{!ameta(code)}
+\setActionKeys{!ameta(KV-pairs)}
+\addToAction*{!ameta(key)}{!ameta(code)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic
+The command \cs{setActionKeys} is a special command used to process the
+KV-pairs of the \pkg{eforms} package. It only accepts these four keys:
+\cs{AddAAFormat}, \cs{AddAAKeystroke}, \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}, and
+\cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}.
+
+
+\begin{description}
+  \item[\cs{AddAAFormat\darg{\ameta{code}}}] This is an \pkg{eforms} KV,
+      discussed an some detail on page~\pageref{para:ProcRespSetNum} that can be
+      specified in the optional argument of any response boxes to affect the
+      field locally, or globally through the \cs{setActionKeys} command.
+  \item[\cs{AddAAKeystroke\darg{\ameta{code}}}] Text fields have a keystroke
+      event (or trigger) that executes JavaScript each time a keystroke is
+      made into the field. The \pkg{exerquiz} key \cs{AddAAKeystroke} adds
+      its argument (\ameta{code}) to the keystroke event of all response boxes
+      (\cs{RespBoxMath}, \cs{RespBoxTxt}, and \cs{RespBoxTxtPC}).
+
+      To distinguish between \env{shortquiz} (and \env{oQuestions}) and
+      \env{quiz} environments, use the methods explained below in the
+      description of the \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC} key.
+
+      Should you want code that is specialized to these individual types, you can use
+      some internal macros to distinguish these three cases.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!(),fontsize=\small]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAKeystroke{%
+  \ifx\annot@subtype\annot@subtype@rbm!ameta(rbm-code)\else
+    \ifx\annot@subtype\annot@subtype@rbt!ameta(rbt-code)\else
+      \ifx\annot@subtype\annot@subtype@rbtpc!ameta(rbtpc-code)\fi
+  \fi\fi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+  Within the argument of \cs{setActionKeys} the character `\texttt{@}' is an ordinary letter,
+  so it can be used freely.
+
+  Within this keystroke event, script executed prior this additional
+  \ameta{code} defines a JavaScript variable \texttt{retn}, which has a value
+  of \texttt{true} (if the response is judged correct), \texttt{false} (if
+  the response is judged incorrect), or \texttt{null} (if there is a syntax
+  error). The \ameta{code} may use this variable.
+
+  \item[\cs{AddAAMouseUpMC\darg{\ameta{code}}}] This key adds its
+      \ameta{code} to the mouse up event of items (\cs{Ans}) of a multiple
+      choice (MC) question. Both \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz} environments
+      are affected.
+
+      You can distinguish between the \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz}
+      environments by comparing \cs{eqQuizType} with \cs{isSQZ} or \cs{isQZ}.
+      For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAMouseUpMC{%
+    \if\eqQuizType\isQZ!ameta(qz-code)\else!ameta(sqz-code)\fi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+  \item[\cs{AddAAMouseUpMS\darg{\ameta{code}}}] This key adds its
+      \ameta{code} to the mouse up event of items (\cs{Ans}) of a multiple
+      selection (MS) question. Both \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz}
+      environments are affected. As with \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}, distinguish
+      between the environments \env{shortquiz} and \env{quiz} by comparing
+      \cs{eqQuizType} with \cs{isSQZ} or \cs{isQZ}, as shown above.
+\end{description}
+    In the case of both \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC} and \cs{AddAAMouseUpMS}, you
+    can distinguish between a correct response and an incorrect response
+    using the command \cs{Ans@choice}, which expands to 1 when correct
+    alternative (radio button or check box) is pressed, and expands to 0
+    otherwise. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAMouseUpMC{%
+    \if\Ans@choice1!ameta(true-code)\else!ameta(false-code)\fi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\cs{AddAAKeystroke}, \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC}, and \cs{AddAAMouseUpMC} don't work
+as local arguments of \cs{RespBoxMath}, \cs{RespBoxTxt}, and
+\cs{RespBoxTxtPC}; however, \cs{AddAAFormat} can be passed within the option
+list of these response box commands, the local option command over rights the
+global command.
+
+Remove any of the actions earlier declared by passing the empty argument,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\setActionKeys{\AddAAMouseUpMC{}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now, there is no added code to the mouse up action of the multiple choice
+fields that appear afterwards.
+
+The only command yet to be discussed is \cs{addToAction*}. Suppose we earlier
+declared,
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+\cs{setActionKeys\darg{\string\AddAAFormat}\darg{\ameta{code\SUB1}}}
+\end{quote}
+and later in the document we want to \emph{append}
+additional script (\ameta{code\SUB2}). To accomplish this, expand the command,
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+\cs{addToAction\darg{\string\AddAAFormat}\darg{\ameta{code\SUB2}}}
+\end{quote}
+Now the code executed for each response box
+is \ameta{code\SUB1}\ameta{code\SUB2}. However, if you wish to \emph{prepend} the \ameta{code\SUB2}, then
+expand \cs{addToAction} using the star-option,
+\begin{quote}\ttfamily
+\cs{addToAction*\darg{\string\AddAAFormat}\darg{\ameta{code\SUB2}}}
+\end{quote}
+The code executed for any response box is \ameta{code\SUB2}\ameta{code\SUB1}.
+
+It should ever be kept in mind that changing the value of a key with
+\cs{setActionKeys} is \cs{addToAction} affects all response boxes thereafter,
+\emph{unless these changes occur in a group}. Thus, the following change,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{oQuestion}{oQ1}
+\addToAction{\AddAAFormat}{\r!ameta(code)}%
+It is well known that
+  $ 1 + 16 = \RespBoxMath{17}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}$
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+only affects that problem, and none other.
+
+\newtopic
+\textbf{Important/A little beg.} Any changes to the action script passed to
+the component elements of the \env{oQuestion}, \env{shortquiz}, and
+\env{quiz} environments \emph{should not impact} the basic functionality of the
+environments.
+
+\subsection{The correct-type math problem}
+
+The traditional way of posing a mathematical objective-style question is to use
+the \cs{RespBoxMath} command, which presents an empty text field for the student to enter
+the answer. However, an alternate approach is to pre-populate the field and ask the student
+to edit the expression provided to obtain a correct answer.
+\collectboxto{\aebbox}{}\bgroup
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth-\mathindent}
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,commandchars={!@$}]
+\RespBoxMath[!textbf@\DV{cos(4x)}\V{cos(4x)}$]
+  {4xcos(2x^2)}{2}{.001}{[0,1]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\egroup
+
+\medskip\noindent\begin{oQuestion}{}
+Edit the expression to obtain the correct answer:
+\begin{align*}
+  &\dfrac{d}{dx}\sin(2x^2)=\RespBoxMath[\DV{cos(4x)}\V{cos(4x)}]{4xcos(2x\string^2)}{2}{.001}{[0,1]}\\[3pt]
+  &\usebox{\aebbox}
+\end{align*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+The field is initially populated by an incorrect answer (a very common mistake), the student needs to
+correct the answer.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1335} Refer to the {\AcroTeX} Blog article
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1335}{Correcting a math problem} for additional
+examples. The article also discusses the use of multi-letter variables in
+this context of a correct-type question.
+
+\subsection{Evaluating Equivalent Expressions}
+
+The \hypertarget{EquivExpr}{\cs{RespBoxMath}} macro, and its underlying JavaScript code, is designed to
+determine the correctness of an answer, numerical or symbolic. We can pose
+such questions as ``find the derivative'' of this function or ``find the (definite or
+indefinite) integral'' of that function, and so on. This is all accomplished
+by randomly choosing numbers from a specified interval and evaluating both
+the user's and author's answer to the question; if they are close to each
+other, then the user's answer is called correct. The system works pretty well.
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} scheme does not perform well with such questions as
+``fully simplify the radical \verb!sqrt(72)!,'' or ``factor the polynomial
+\verb!2x^2-4x+2!;'' in both cases, the student can simply type in
+the given expression and \textsf{exerquiz} will call them equal. Indeed
+it is true that \verb!sqrt(72)! equates to \verb!sqrt(72)! and the polynomial \verb!2x^2-4x+2!
+equates to \verb!2x^2-4x+2!, as is shown by evaluating randomly
+selected numbers from an interval, \textsf{exerquiz}-style!
+
+\newtopic To illustrate, we use the problem of simplifying
+\verb!sqrt{72}!.
+
+\begin{shortquiz}[simplfyIllus]
+Simplify the following radial expression by factoring out all perfect squares.
+
+\newcommand{\Msgi}{"We are expecting a simplification of the radical."}
+\newcommand{\Msgii}{"Write the simplification in standard form, numerical constants first."}
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item Simplify $\sqrt{72}$ by factoring out all perfect squares.
+\begin{equation*}
+    \sqrt{72} = \RespBoxMath{6sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+        priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+            \preDenyForm(%
+                /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+            \preReqForm(%
+                /\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/,\Msgi)%
+        ),%
+        postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/)%
+        )%
+    }]\CorrAnsButton{6sqrt(2)}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{equation*}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\noindent\texttt{Exerquiz} performs its magic by a combination of the
+usual \textsf{exerquiz} processing and new pre- and  post-parsing
+techniques, where appropriate code is passed through of the ninth
+parameter of \cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\newtopic The verbatim listing follows.\label{verbReqForm}
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\item Simplify $\sqrt{72}$ by factoring out all perfect squares.
+\begin{equation*}
+    \sqrt{72} = \RespBoxMath{6sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+        priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+            \preDenyForm(%
+                /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+            \preReqForm(%
+                /\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/,\Msgi)%
+        ),%
+        postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/))%
+    }]\CorrAnsButton{6sqrt(2)}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{equation*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+It becomes a bit complicated here. \verb!:-)! The ninth parameter can take a
+JavaScript object as its value (The object is opened on line~(3) with a left
+brace (\verb!{!) and is closed in line~(11) with a right brace (\verb!}!).
+This object has three properties: \texttt{comp} for defining the compare function
+(not used in this example); \texttt{priorParse}, which is used to inspect the
+user's input to filter out unwanted responses prior to evaluation; \texttt{postParse} is used
+to look at the user's answer \emph{after} the \textsf{exerquiz}
+evaluation of random points stage. At the \texttt{postParse} stage, it has already
+been determined if the user's answer is correct or incorrect, \texttt{postParse} only applies
+to answers that are \emph{correct}.
+
+\paragraph*{The \texttt{priorParse} property.} See also the (brief) description
+of \texttt{priorParse} as part of the \hyperref[paraRespBoxNine]{ninth parameter},
+page~\pageref*{paraRespBoxNine}. There are new two built-in filter functions which
+are accessed through the helper commands \cs{preDenyForm} and \cs{preReqForm}. As shown
+in the verbatim text, they are both enclosed in \cs{Array()}.
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \cs{preDenyForm}: The idea behind this filter function is to define regular expressions
+  which if the pattern is present, processing would stop for the user input, and an alert
+  message would appear; that is, we \emph{deny} the user the use of certain defined patterns.
+  There is no penalty, the user has a chance to change his/her
+  answer. \cs{preDenyForm} takes up to two arguments, enclosed in parentheses:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\preDenyForm(regexp|array_regexps, cMsg)
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first argument is a regular expression or an array of regular expressions.
+The second argument, \texttt{cMsg}, is a string that will be displayed in the alert
+box if the pattern or patterns appear in the user's answer.
+
+When the first argument is an array of regular expressions, the same
+message (\texttt{cMsg}) will appear if any one of the patterns is present.
+The command may be repeated using additional regular expressions with different
+warning messages.
+
+Let's have a look at the above example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,firstnumber=4,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+    \preDenyForm(%
+        /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+    \preReqForm(%
+        /\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/,\Msgi)%
+),%
+\end{Verbatim}
+In line~~(4) we begin with \cs{Array} followed by \textsf{dljslib} filter function
+\texttt{nodec}, this function denies the use of decimal numbers, it is important
+in this problem but not our central focus. In line~(5) we begin with \cs{preDenyForm},
+the arguments are on line~(6). The correct answer is \texttt{6sqrt(2)}, we want
+to force the student write the answer in this form, not, for example, as
+\texttt{sqrt(2)6} or \texttt{sqrt(2)*6}, while correct, it bad form. (We will deny them bad form!)
+This will deny them even if not correct, for example, if the student enters
+\texttt{sqrt(3)4}.
+
+To make it easier on the document author, I've defined a series of ``helper commands,''
+and oh, by the way, you should know how to use regular expressions. Let's now examine
+line~(6). First argument is a single regular expression, the second is a command that defines
+the string message to be exhibited if this pattern is found (try it on the working example above
+to see what the message is).
+
+Let's now look at the regular expression (\texttt{/.../} in line~(6).
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,firstnumber=6,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+/sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/
+\end{Verbatim}
+We take each in turn.
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item \texttt{sqrt\cs{refac(\cs{reany+)}}}: we search for the string \texttt{sqrt}
+    followed by the pattern \cs{refac(\cs{reany+)}}. \cs{refac} defines literal parentheses, within
+    these parentheses can by anything \cs{reany+}. The whole sequence expands
+    to the pattern `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{sqrt\refac{\reany+}}}'.
+    \item \cs{redigit+}: This command is a macro for one or more digits, it expands
+    to `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{\redigit+}}'.
+    \item Summarizing, we deny the student from typing in a square root of
+    anything followed by one or more digits.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\item \cs{preReqForm}: This is the positive version of \cs{preDenyForm}. It uses
+the same syntax
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\preReqForm(regexp|array_regexps, cMsg)
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first argument is a regular expression or an array of regular expressions, the patterns
+are ones that we wish to see in the user's answer. If the user's answer does not
+fit into any of the patterns, an alert is emitted using the optional string
+declared in the second argument, \texttt{cMsg}. The second argument is option, there
+is a default, generic string message that will be shown.
+
+As with \cs{preDenyForm}, let's take a close look at the regular expression.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}/
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item \cs{rechrclass(+-)*} defines a character class consisting of the characters
+    `\texttt{+-}' the \texttt{*} means zero or more occurrences. (Probably I should use \texttt{?} instead of
+    \texttt{*},
+    meaning 0 or 1 occurrences.) It expands to
+    `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{\rechrclass{+-}*}}'.
+    \item \cs{redigit+} describes one or more digits, this would expand to
+     `{\def\\{\eqbs\eqbs}\texttt{\redigit+}}'.
+    \item sqrt\cs{refac(\cs{reany+)}} is the same as before,  it describes
+    the square root of anything expression.
+\end{itemize}
+\item[] The \cs{preReqForm} only searches for the specified patterns. For example,
+the responses \texttt{sin(PI/2)6sqrt(2)} and \texttt{6sqrt(2)x} pass both the
+\cs{preDenyForm} (no digits follow the square root),
+and pass the \cs{preReqForm} because both answers have (or do not have) the patterns;
+in the former case, the answer is judged correct, and in the latter case, incorrect.
+You can try to improve the pattern like so
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+/\rebstr\rechrclass{+-}*\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}\reestr/
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \cs{rebstr} (begin string anchor) expands to `\texttt{\^}' and
+represents the beginning of the line, while \cs{reestr} (end string anchor)
+expands to `\texttt{\$}' represents the end of the line. In this case, the user's answer
+is required to begin with an optional plus or minus, followed by one or
+more digits, followed by a square root, followed by the end of the line.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic Here is that same short quiz with the above changes (and \texttt{*} replaced by
+\texttt{?}).
+
+\begin{shortquiz}[simplfyIllus1]
+Simplify the following radial expression by factoring out all perfect squares.
+
+\newcommand{\Msgi}{"We are expecting a simplification of the radical."}
+\newcommand{\Msgii}{"Write the simplification in standard form, numerical constants first."}
+
+\begin{questions}
+\item $\sqrt{72}$
+\begin{equation*}
+    \sqrt{72} = \RespBoxMath{6sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+        priorParse:\Array(nodec,%
+            \preDenyForm(%
+                /sqrt\refac{\reany+}\redigit+/,\Msgii),%
+            \preReqForm(%
+                /\rebstr\rechrclass{+-}?\redigit+sqrt\refac{\reany+}\reestr/,\Msgi)%
+        ),%
+        postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/)%
+        )%
+    }]\CorrAnsButton{6sqrt(2)}\kern1bp\sqTallyBox
+\end{equation*}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+Now try \texttt{sin(PI/2)6sqrt(2)} or \texttt{6sqrt(2)x}, and other aberrant variations.
+
+\paragraph*{The \texttt{postParse} property.} After the
+\texttt{priorParse} stage, \texttt{exerquiz} checks the answer for correctness,
+against the author's answer, using randomly selected numbers. After that comes
+the \texttt{postParse} event. The syntax is the same except there is no warning
+message.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\preReqForm(regexp|array_regexps)
+\end{Verbatim}
+If the user's \emph{answer is correct} at this stage \textit{and} fits
+into one of the patterns as defined by the regular expressions, the answer
+will then be marked wrong.
+
+Let's look at the post parse code for this example, from line~(10)
+on page~\pageref*{verbReqForm}, we see,
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,firstnumber=10,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+postParse:\Array(\postDenyForm(/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/))%
+\end{Verbatim}
+Even though there is not an array of filter functions, a filter function
+with arguments must always be enclosed in an array.
+
+Within the array, we execute our \cs{postDenyForm}, it has only one
+argument, a single regular expression:
+\verb!/sqrt(\refac{72}|\refac{8})/!.\footnote{The use of alternation here is
+not needed, an answer involving \texttt{sqrt(72)} would have been filtered out by the
+\cs{preReqForm} filter, do you know why?} There are three ``correct
+answers'' to this problem, they are \texttt{sqrt(72)}, \texttt{3sqrt(8)},
+and \texttt{6sqrt(2)}, this latter one being the only correct answer to
+this question, for the instructions were to factor out \emph{all} perfect
+squares. The regular expression here catches any answer containing
+\texttt{sqrt(72)} or \texttt{3sqrt(8)} and marks it wrong. \verb!:-(!
+
+\paragraph*{List of RegExp helper macros.}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\refac#1{\\(#1\\)}\def\rediv{\\/}\def\repow{\\^}
+\def\redigit{\\d}\def\rechrclass#1{[#1]}\def\reany{.}
+\def\remul{[\\*]}\def\rebstr{\\^}\def\reestr{\\$}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1020} Refer to the source file of
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1020}{equiv\_expr.pdf}} for working
+examples. Additional examples will (eventually) appear on the
+\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}.
+
+
+\section{Randomizing the Multiple Choices}\label{s:random}
+
+Beginning with version~6.1 of \textsf{exerquiz}, the choices of a
+multiple choice question can be randomized. The \texttt{random.tex}
+macro file by Donald Arseneau is used for this purpose.
+
+%\exPDF{randomize} The demo file for this section is \texttt{randomize.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=901} The demo file for this section is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=901}{randomize.pdf}}.
+
+\newtopic The randomization is only allowed if the \texttt{allowrandomize}
+option of \textsf{exerquiz} is used; otherwise, no randomization
+can occur.
+
+The randomization is only defined for choices listed between the
+pair \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} (see \Nameref{bChoices}). The
+command \cs{bChoices} now takes two optional key-value arguments:
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \texttt{nCols=\anglemeta{num}}: The number of columns to create, as described
+  on page~\pageref{bChoices}. You can also use the old style by specifying just
+  \anglemeta{num}. Thus,  \cs{bChoices[nCols=2]} and \cs{bChoices[2]}
+  are equivalent.
+  \item \texttt{random=\anglemeta{\upshape true|false}}: Specify this option to randomize choices.
+  You can use the key word \texttt{random} instead of
+  \texttt{random=true}. For example, the following commands will randomize the
+  choices, \cs{bChoices[random]}, \cs{bChoices[nCols=2,random]}, or
+  \cs{bChoices[2,random]}. The default is to not randomize the
+  choices.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newtopic The following is an example of the \texttt{random} option of \cs{bChoices}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{shortquiz}
+This is a quiz.
+\begin{questions}
+    \item Try to guess the correct answer.
+    \begin{answers}{3}
+    \bChoices[nCols=2,random]
+        \Ans0 1 a choice\eAns
+        \Ans1\label{eq} 2 another choice\eAns
+        \Ans0 3 still another choice\eAns
+        \Ans0 4 another\eAns
+        \Ans0 5 incoming\eAns
+        \Ans0 6 more choices\eAns
+        \Ans0 7 another still\eAns
+        \Ans0 8 too many\eAns
+        \Ans0 9 choices\eAns
+    \eFreeze
+        \Ans0 10 None of these\eAns
+    \eChoices
+    \end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{shortquiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Note the presence of the command \Com{eFreeze}.  Any of
+the items listed after \cs{eFreeze} are not randomized, and are
+placed at the end of the list. So, for the example above, the first
+nine items will be randomized, whereas, the last item (None of
+these) will placed at the end of the list.
+
+\newtopic Additional, there are five other commands that support the
+randomization feature.\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\ttfamily\string\saveRandomSeed\quad\string\inputRandomSeed}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\saveRandomSeed!quad\inputRandomSeed
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic A pseudo-random sequence of numbers requires an initial \emph{seed
+value}. The example file \texttt{random.tex} creates, by default, a
+seed value based on the date and time (the number of minutes since
+midnight); consequently, after every minute, the random sequence
+will change. By setting the value of the count register \cs{randomi},
+the document author can also set the initial seed of the pseudo-random
+sequence.
+
+The command \cs{saveRandomSeed} will write the last seed used in the
+source file to an auxiliary file (\cs{jobname\_rt.sav}), while the
+command \cs{inputRandomSeed} inputs the seed stored in the
+\cs{jobname\_rt.sav} back into the beginning of the source file.
+These two commands should be placed in the preamble.
+
+By invoking both of these commands, a new pseudo-random sequence will be generated
+each time the source file is compiled.
+
+Assuming a \cs{jobname\_rt.sav} has already been created, by
+invoking the command \cs{inputRandomSeed} only (and not
+\cs{saveRandomSeed}), the seed already saved will be used for every
+subsequent compiling of the source document. Using the same seed is
+necessary in two situations:
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item When the quiz contains one or more \cs{label} commands, using the same
+  seed gives you the same sequence every time you latex the document. This will
+  give the auxiliary files a chance to come up to date so that any referencing of the label
+  will be accurate.
+
+  \item When creating an online (or paper) quiz with randomization, which later you publish
+  the solutions to, it is important that the randomization for the
+  quiz document is the same as that for the solution document. By
+  using \cs{inputRandomSeed} (rather than \cs{save\-Ran\-dom\-Seed}), you
+  get the same sequence for the solution document (unless you modify the
+  source file, adding or removing questions that have randomization).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Things to look for:} If \textsf{exerquiz} is not rearranging the order
+of the choices as you expect it to, it could be that
+\textsf{exerquiz} is reading an old \texttt{.sav} file. Either delete that file
+in your source folder, or comment out \cs{inputRandomSeed} in your document.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{useRandomSeed\darg{\meta{number}}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\useRandomSeed{!meta(number)}
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic\indent You may have several sections of the same class take a quiz with the
+questions rearranged for each.  Save the seed value used by
+\textsf{exerquiz} to randomize the choices for the class by opening the
+\texttt{.sav} and by copying and pasting the line you see into your document;
+for example, it could read \cs{randomi=132088850}, then use
+\cs{useRandomSeed} with that seed value for that class as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\useRandomSeed{132088850}   % 11:00 class
+% \useRandomSeed{634952429} % 12:30 class
+\end{Verbatim}
+Of course comment out \cs{inputRandomSeed}.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{obeyLocalRandomize}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\turnOnRandomize
+\obeyLocalRandomize
+\end{dCmd}
+
+\newtopic\indent The command \cs{turnOnRandomize} overrides all local settings of \cs{bChoices}
+and causes all choice lists to be randomized. While \cs{obeyLocalRandomize}
+returns control to the local settings. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\turnOnRandomize
+...
+\bChoices
+    \Ans...\eAns
+    \Ans...\eAns
+    ...
+\eChoices
+\end{Verbatim}
+will cause the choice list to be randomized, even though the
+\texttt{random} option was not specified. Whereas, in this code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\turnOnRandomize
+...
+\obeyLocalRandomize
+...
+\bChoices
+    \Ans...\eAns
+    \Ans...\eAns
+    ...
+\eChoices
+\end{Verbatim}
+the choices will not be randomized, because the \texttt{random}
+option was not specified; or they will be randomized if the
+\texttt{random} option is used.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Limitations:} There are natural limitations on the use
+of \cs{bChoices} and \cs{eChoices} and consequently, there are
+limitations on the randomization.  The content between \cs{Ans} and
+\cs{eAns} cannot have any verbatim text. This is usually not a
+problem for mathematical content, but could be a limitation for
+computer science where questions about syntax may be posed. I have
+in mind a work-around, but haven't pursued the problem as of yet.
+
+\section{Creating a Quiz Summary Table}\label{s:sumrytbl}
+
+This feature is designed for a \texttt{quiz} (as opposed to a
+\texttt{shortquiz}) and is probably most useful for a long quiz, spanning
+several pages. The \cs{displaySumryTbl} command creates a table that summarizes
+the user's effort for the quiz; \cs{displaySumryTbl} must follow the final
+\verb!\end{questions}! and \emph{must be on a separate page} from the last question of the quiz.
+An example of the generated table is shown below in \hyperref[fig:qzSumryTbl]{Figure~\ref*{fig:qzSumryTbl}}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=377} The demo file for this section is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=377}{sumry\_tbl.pdf}}, found
+at the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}.
+
+
+\Important The code for these commands are only input when the \textsf{exerquiz} option
+\texttt{usesumrytbls} is taken.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{quiz*}{!ameta(quiz_name)}
+Solve each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+\item...
+...
+\item...
+\end{questions}
+
+\newpage    %<--start new page
+Before you complete your quiz by pressing `End Quiz', review the
+list below. A check mark indicates that you responded to that
+question; otherwise, you did not respond to the question.
+
+\begin{center}
+\displaySumryTbl{\currQuiz}
+\end{center}
+
+If you are satisfied with your answers, press `End Quiz' to
+complete the quiz.\medskip
+
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\begin{center}
+\includegraphics{figures/sumrytbl}
+\caption{Quiz Summary Table}\label{fig:qzSumryTbl}
+\end{center}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+The table (as seen in \hyperref[fig:qzSumryTbl]{Figure~\ref*{fig:qzSumryTbl}}) shows a check mark for each question to
+which the student gave a response. The student
+can review the table, and optionally return to questions that had no response.
+
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{displaySumryTbl[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{quiz\_name}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\displaySumryTbl[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(quiz_name)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\textbf{Parameter Description:} The second parameter is the quiz name of the quiz this table represents,
+in most cases, \cs{currQuiz} is used. The first parameter consists of key-value pairs, these
+are described below.
+
+\KVP The first parameter takes key-value pairs
+\begin{enumerate}
+       \item\texttt{ntables} is a key that has a value of 1 or 2, the
+           default is determined by command \cs{smrytbl@ntables}, which is set to 2 in
+           this package. If \texttt{ntables=1} only one table is created, and
+           if \texttt{ntables=2} two tables are created, each containing half
+           the information, as seen in \hyperref[fig:qzSumryTbl]{Figure~\ref*{fig:qzSumryTbl}}.
+       \item \texttt{showmarkup}: If this switch is true, then markup fields are
+             created that will hold the number of points the student received for
+             each problem. The default is that there is no markup. Entering
+             \texttt{showmarkup} in the option list will generate the markup fields.
+             The code
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\displaySumryTbl[ntables=1,showmarkup]{\currQuiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+            produces a single table with the points markup.
+       \item \texttt{nocorrections}: If this switch is true, corrections will not
+             be shown when the user presses the `End Quiz' button. Because of the
+             way this key is implemented, if \texttt{nocorrections} is true, then
+             it will be true for any ``duplicate table,'' that is, any table that
+             references the same quiz.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic When the user presses the `Corrections' button, the borders of the checkboxes
+are colored, and if \texttt{showmarkup} is used, the points earned for each
+problem are shown as well.
+
+When corrections are made, a red border indicates the answer is
+wrong, a green border means the answer is correct, and a
+blue border the question was answered incorrectly, but partial credit was
+given. The colors are determined by the commands \cs{correctColor}, \cs{wrongColor},
+and \cs{partialColor}. These are ``global color'' that need to set in the preamble;
+the quiz and shortquiz system uses the first two, change them will yield changes everywhere.
+However, you can change the \cs{partialColor} as this is the only place it is used.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\partialColor{color.blue}
+\end{Verbatim}
+This is a JavaScript color, if you redefined it to be a nonstandard color, for example,
+this redefinition makes the partial credit color yellow.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\partialColor{["RGB", 1, 1, 0]}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\Important The table must be on a different page from the questions
+because there is an open page action that activates and populates the table
+based on the user's responses.
+
+\newtopic Other related commands are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblQ}{Question}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblR}{Responded}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblP}{Page}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above three commands form the column titles of the table.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand{\sumrytablesep}{\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Sets the separation between the tables, in the case that two tables are generated.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\sumryTblProbFmt}[1]{\textbf{\textcolor{blue}{#1}}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above command sets the {\LaTeX} formatting of the problems, the
+default is bold and blue, but may be redefined.
+
+\subsection{Placing the Quiz Summary Table Elsewhere}
+
+You may want the Quiz Summary Table in a
+place other than the default location (after the final
+\verb!\end{questions}! and before the `End Quiz'). There is no problem
+putting it after the quiz and\emph{ before the next quiz};
+however, if you want to put the table up front (that is, in front of the quiz) for
+whatever reasons, you need additional commands.
+
+\newtopic In the area just after \cs{end\darg{questions}} and before `End
+Quiz,' place the command
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{writeProListAux}}
+\begin{dCmd}{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\writeProListAux
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\indent This command saves to the auxiliary file the two pieces of information the
+\cs{dis\-playSumryTbl} needs to build the table. Then, in the location of
+your choice---usually outside of any quiz environment---enclose
+\cs{displaySumryTbl} in the \texttt{sumryTblAux} environment.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{displaySumryTbl[\ameta{KV-keys}]\darg{\ameta{quiz\_name}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\begin{sumryTblAux}{!meta(quiz_name)}
+\displaySumryTbl[!ameta(KV-keys)]{!ameta(quiz_name)}
+\end{sumryTblAux}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\indent Here, \ameta{quiz\_name} is the name of the quiz that this table represents. An example
+of this environment follows.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{sumryTblAux}{\currQuiz}\small %<--make a little smaller
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblQ}{\sffamily\bfseries Question}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblR}{\sffamily\bfseries Answered}
+\renewcommand{\sumryTblP}{\sffamily\bfseries Page}
+\begin{center}
+    {\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries Quiz Summary Table}\\[3pt]
+    \displaySumryTbl[showmarkup]{\currQuiz}
+\end{center}
+\end{sumryTblAux}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+%sumryTblAux
+
+\section{Bookmarking Exercises and Quizzes}\label{bmExQz}
+
+It is unlikely that anyone would use this feature: Bookmarking exercises
+and quizzes.
+
+%\exPDF{bkmrk_eq} The demo file for this feature is  \texttt{bkmrk\_eq.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=906} The demo file for this feature is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=906}{bkmrk\_eq.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsection{For Exercises}
+
+This ``intelligent'' bookmarking system requires
+the minimum of effort to use. For exercises, the command for bookmarking
+is \Com{expdfbookmark},
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{expdfbookmark\darg{\ameta{bookmark\_title}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic and should be placed immediately following the beginning of an
+exercise environment, like so,\def\OR{\hspace*{-\amtIndent}\normalfont or,}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{exercise}\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+!OR
+\begin{exercise*}\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or, in the case of exercises with parts, and you want to bookmark an
+individual part to a question, place \cs{expdfbookmark} immediately
+after the \cs{item}, like so
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\item\expdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Every bookmark title, \ameta{bookmark\_title}, has a
+suffix defined with \Com{exbookmarkfmt} or
+\Com{partbookmarkfmt}, depending on whether
+the entry is for the top-level exercise, or one of its parts.
+The default definitions are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\exbookmarkfmt}{\exlabel\space\theeqexno.\space}
+\newcommand{\partbookmarkfmt}{(\thepartno)\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The command \cs{exlabel} expands to the language
+dependent word for `Exercise', while \cs{theeqexno} expands to
+the exercise number, and \cs{thepartno} to the part
+letter. These commands can be redefined.
+
+\subsection{For Quizzes}
+
+To bookmark a \texttt{shortquiz} or \texttt{quiz}, use \Com{quizpdfbookmark}.
+\settowidth{\aebdimen}{\cs{quizpdfbookmark\darg{\ameta{bookmark\_title}}}}
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\aebdimen+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\quizpdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\newtopic\indent It should be placed immediately following the beginning of the environments,
+\def\OR{\hspace*{-\amtIndent}\normalfont or,}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{shortquiz}\quizpdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+!OR
+\begin{quiz}{!ameta(quiz_name)}\quizpdfbookmark{!ameta(bookmark_title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Unlike bookmarking for exercises, the bookmark command for quizzes does not
+support bookmarking individual questions within the quiz.
+
+\newtopic Every bookmark title, \meta{bookmark\_title}, for a
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment has a suffix defined with the
+\Com{sqbookmarkfmt} command, the default definition is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\sqbookmarkfmt}{Short Quiz \@shortquizCnt.\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{@shortquizCnt} is a macro (not a counter)
+that contains the current short quiz count. This command can be redefined.
+
+\newtopic Every bookmark title, \ameta{bookmark\_title}, for a \texttt{quiz} environment  has a
+suffix defined with the \Com{qzbookmarkfmt} command, the
+default definition is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\qzbookmarkfmt}{Quiz \@quizCnt.\space}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic The command \cs{@quizCnt} is a macro (not a counter)
+that contains the current quiz count. This command can be redefined.
+
+\redpoint \cs{quizpdfbookmark} interacts with the command \Com{titleQuiz}.
+(for more information on this, see \hyperref[titleQuiz]{Section~\ref*{titleQuiz}}
+and \hyperref[titleQuizSQ]{Section~\ref*{titleQuizSQ}}, pages~\pageref*{titleQuiz}
+and~\pageref*{titleQuizSQ}, to learn about \cs{title\-Quiz} for quizzes and short quizzes, respectively.) When a quiz has
+a defined title, as defined
+by the \cs{titleQuiz}, and the argument of \cs{quizpdfbookmark} is left empty,
+the value passed to \cs{titleQuiz} is used as the bookmark text. Thus, the code
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\titleQuiz{Differentiation Quiz}
+\begin{quiz}{MyDiffQuiz}\quizpdfbookmark{}
+...
+\end{quiz}
+\end{Verbatim}
+will bookmark the quiz under the name ``Differentiation Quiz.''
+
+
+\subsection{Final Note}
+
+If the bookmarks for exercises, or parts of the exercises, or quizzes do not appear,
+you may have to increase the \texttt{tocdepth}. Exerquiz sets this at
+\verb!\setcounter{tocdepth}{5}!.
+
+\section{Extending \AcroT{} with  \texttt{dljslib} and \texttt{insdljs}}
+
+The \textsf{exerquiz} Package, especially the math fill-in question, is quite
+programmable. In this section, we discuss two methods of extending the
+capabilities of the \AcroB: (1) through the use of the package \texttt{dljslib},
+which is a JavaScript library of extensions; (2) by writing your own custom
+extensions using the \texttt{insdljs} package for inserting JavaScripts into the
+PDF document.
+
+\subsection{Using the \texttt{dljslib} Package}\label{sss:dljslib}
+
+The \texttt{dljslib} Package is actually a ``library'' of JavaScript
+functions. At the time of this writing, the library has JavaScripts that can
+process answers to math fill-in questions where an \textit{equation}
+or a \textit{vector} answer is expected. There is also a JavaScript compare
+function that properly evaluates an answer when an indefinite integral is
+expected.  See the documentation that accompanies the package (by latexing
+\texttt{dljslib.dtx}) for details of how to use the library.
+
+\redpoint For full documentation of \textsf{dljslib} package, see \Nameref{part:dljslib}.
+
+%\redpoint \textbf{Equation handling.}  See the sample file \texttt{jqzequat.tex} for examples
+%of posing and evaluating questions that expect an equation as the response.  Below is
+%a portion of the preamble of that file; basically, to use one or more of the JavaScripts in
+%the JavaScript library, you specify that option \cs{usepackage} command for \texttt{dljslib}
+%package. In this case, we want to process equations so type\dots
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{amsmath,amscd}
+%\usepackage[tight,pdftex,designi,nodirectory]{web}
+%\usepackage{exerquiz}
+%\usepackage[equations]{dljslib}  % <--choose equations
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%
+%\redpoint \textbf{Vector Handling}  There are also JavaScript functions for processing
+%vector answers.  See the sample file \texttt{jqzspec.tex}. Actually this file does not
+%use the JavaScript library, but is more of a tutorial on how to use \cs{insdljs} to
+%write custom JavaScripts to process \textsf{exerquiz} math fill-in questions.
+%
+%The preamble of that document could actually be replaced with\dots
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{amsmath,amscd}
+%\usepackage[tight,dvipdfm,designi,nodirectory]{web}
+%\usepackage{exerquiz}
+%\usepackage[vectors,indefIntegral]{dljslib}
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%\noindent The \texttt{vectors} option specifies JavaScripts for processing
+%vector questions. The option \texttt{in\-def\-In\-te\-gral} is also
+%specified. This is because that in the file \texttt{jqzspec.tex} a
+%comparison function is developed for properly evaluating questions
+%in which an indefinite integral is expected.
+%
+%\redpoint \textbf{Comma Delimited Answers and Sets} The
+%\texttt{setSupport} option of the \textsf{dljslib} Package
+%provides basic support for math fill-in questions requiring a
+%(unordered) list of comma delimited numerical or symbolic answers,
+%or for a set. The demo and tutorial file is
+%\texttt{set\_test.tex}. See that file for more details.
+%
+%\redpoint In addition to the two above mentioned sets of JavaScripts there are
+%a couple of comparison functions, one for processing indefinite integrals (see
+%\texttt{dljs\_ex.tex}), and the other for using relative absolute error rather
+%than absolute error. Again, see the documentation of \texttt{dljslib.dtx} and
+%the sample file \texttt{jqzspec.tex}.
+
+\subsection{Using the \texttt{insdljs} Package}
+
+With the \texttt{insdljs} package you can write your own JavaScript functions
+right in the \LaTeX{} source file.  These custom JavaScripts are then inserted
+into the section of the PDF document where the document level JavaScripts
+reside. This package is a stand-alone package, and does not need \textsf{exerquiz},
+though \textsf{exerquiz} now uses this package to insert its JavaScripts into
+the document.
+
+\redpoint Refer to \href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}
+(relative link \href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}) for the \textsf{insdljs} and the \textsf{eforms}
+documentation. Also, see the sample file \texttt{insdljs\_ex.tex}
+for examples that do not use \textsf{exerquiz}, and the file
+\texttt{jqzspec.tex}, for examples that does use \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+\section{Submitting a \protect\texttt{quiz} to a Web Server}
+
+Quizzes created by the \texttt{quiz} environment are entirely self-contained.
+They function within the Web browser (or from within the Adobe Reader) and
+do not communicate with any server. This kind of quiz is ideal for a
+do-it-yourself tutorial system, read by a well-motivated student who has the
+discipline to read the material and to take the quizzes in the spirit in which
+they are given.
+
+However, some educators, myself included, may wish to use the quizzes created
+by the \texttt{quiz} environment for classroom credit. It is necessary,
+therefore, for the student to be able to submit quiz results to a Web server
+which, in turn, should store the results to a database.
+
+In this section we discuss techniques of turning the quiz into something that
+can be submitted to a server.
+
+\redpoint I have released the \textsf{eq2db} Package, a {\LaTeX} macro package and
+server-side script to process \textsf{exerquiz} quizzes. See \Nameref{eq2db}.
+
+\subsection{Technical Info for ``Do It Yourself''}\label{DIY}
+
+All one really has to do is to redefine the `End Quiz' link or button to
+submit the results of the quiz to the Web server and CGI of your choice. Since
+the quiz itself is scored, (optionally) marked, with (optional) answers and
+solutions provided, the CGI simply stores the quiz results to a database.
+
+\subsubsection{Redefining `End Quiz'}
+
+I've written the `End Quiz' link (button) to have various
+programming hooks available to the developer.
+The following code is common to both \cs{eq@EndQuizLink} and
+\cs{eq@EndQuizButton}, the macros that control the action of
+the end quiz link and button, respectively.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+if (\minQuizResp(\thequestionno)) {\r\t
+    var f = this.getField("ScoreField.\curr@quiz");\r\t\t
+    if ( f != null )\r\t\t\t
+        this.getField("ScoreField.\curr@quiz").value
+            =(\eq@QuizTotalMsg);\r\t\t
+    \eq@submitURL
+    resetQuiz("\curr@quiz")\r\t
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint The code is a mixture of \LaTeX{} macros and JavaScript.
+You can see from this code, that there is a submit hook macro
+provided, \cs{eq@submitURL}. Normally, this macro has a definition
+of \cs{@empty}. A developer needs only redefine this macro
+accordingly; one would use the Acrobat JavaScript method
+\texttt{this.submitForm()} to do this. See the \textit{Acrobat JavaScript
+Scripting Reference} \cite{tech:AcroJS} for more detail about this
+method.
+
+\redpoint The code flow above is as follows: (1) Execute this code if the
+threshold has been met. (See \nameref{threshold}.) The text macro
+\cs{curr@quiz} holds the base name of the current quiz.
+
+(2) If the field \texttt{"ScoreField.\cs{curr@quiz}"} exists, then
+write the student's score to that field. (This is the ``Score: 2
+out of 3'' that you see in the demo quizzes.)
+
+(3) We then submit with the macro \cs{eq@submitURL}. (This would
+do nothing if its value is \cs{empty}, the default value.) At this
+point we call a \texttt{resetQuiz("\cs{curr@quiz}")} which
+sets some values in an array to indicate the state of this quiz.
+
+\subsubsection{Gathering ID Information with
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{textField}}{\textbackslash textField}}
+
+\redpoint What kind of information would one submit to a CGI?
+Well, there is the usual information concerning the identity of
+the student (Name, SSN, etc.) and the course, section and so on.
+
+This basic information can be gathered from the student by
+inserting text fields into the document to be filled in. \textsf{Exerquiz}
+provides the macro \cs{textField}\footnote{You can also use hyperref's
+\cs{TextField} command for this purpose as well.} for this purpose.
+For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\FirstName[2]{\textField
+    [\DV{First Name}\textFont{TiRo}\textSize{10}\textColor{0 0 1}]
+    {IdInfo.Name.First}{#1}{#2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This defines a text field with a name of \texttt{"IdInfo.Name.First"}, the two
+arguments are the width and height of the field that you want to create. E.g.,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\FirstName{100pt}{10pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent creates a text field 100pt wide and 10pt high.
+
+The \cs{textField} macro takes four parameters.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\textField[#1]#2#3#4
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The first (optional) parameter can be used to custom
+design the field; the second is the name of the field; the third
+and fourth are the width and height of the field desired.
+
+\redpoint See the file \texttt{eqformman.tex} on {\cAcroT} \textsf{eForm}
+support for complete documentation on
+\cs{textField}.
+
+\subsubsection{Gathering Quiz Specific Information with
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{eqSubmit}}{\textbackslash eqSubmit}}
+
+In addition to ID information on the one taking the quiz,
+specific information about what quiz is being taken and where the
+results of the quiz are to be stored are needed as well.
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} provides a basic macro, called \cs{eqSubmit}
+that can be used to gather basic formation of this type. The definition
+of it and related commands are given below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\databaseName[1]{\def\db@Name{#1}}\def\db@Name{}
+\newcommand\tableName[1]{\def\db@Table{#1}}\def\db@Table{}
+\newcommand\eqCGI[1]{\def\eq@CGI{#1}}\def\eq@CGI{}
+\newcommand\eqSubmit[3]
+    {\eqCGI{"#1"}\databaseName{#2}\tableName{#3}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The meaning of the parameters are self-explanatory.
+
+Just prior to the quiz you can type:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\eqSubmit{http://www.myschool.edu/cgi-bin/myCGI.cgi}%
+    {CalcIII}{Quizzes}
+\begin{quiz*}{Quiz3} Answer each of the following.
+\begin{questions}
+...
+...
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\ScoreField\currQuiz\CorrButton\currQuiz
+
+\noindent
+Answers: \AnswerField\currQuiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\redpoint Any redefinition of \cs{eq@submitURL} would then
+include the values of some or all of these text parameters:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\eq@CGI, \db@Name, \db@Table, \curr@quiz
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The last text macro is not gathered by \cs{eqSubmit}, it
+is known, however, at the time \cs{eq@submit\-URL} is expanded.
+
+\subsubsection{Some Variables to Submit}
+
+When you submit a quiz to a server, the values of \textit{all}
+fields are also submitted, unless you define specifically which
+fields are to be submitted.
+
+In addition to the ID info, you would like also to submit the results
+of the quiz itself. The relevant variables are as follows:
+\begin{questions}
+    \item The JavaScript variable \texttt{Score} has the number of
+    correct responses as its value.
+    \item The \LaTeX{} counter variable \cs{thequestionno} has the count
+    of the total number of questions in the quiz.
+    \item The JavaScript array \texttt{Responses} contains the responses of
+    the student: multiple choice and fill-in responses. The contents of this
+    array can be converted to a comma-delimited string by using the
+    \texttt{toString()} method, \texttt{Responses.toString()}.
+\end{questions}
+
+\noindent Now, how does one submit these values?  The \cs{eq@submitURL}
+command can be used not only to submit the data, but to also
+populate certain \textit{hidden} fields with this information. The
+hidden data is submitted along with the ID info to be processed.
+You can use the \cs{textField} to create hidden text fields for
+this purpose. See the next section for a discussion of how to create
+hidden text fields.
+
+\subsection{Features \protect\textit{apropos} to Submitting}
+
+%\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{RespBoxEssay}}
+%{\textbackslash RespBoxEssay}: The Essay Question}
+%
+%Some disciplines make heavy use of the essay question. In an effort to
+%expand \textsf{exerquiz} to this question type, the \cs{RespBoxEssay}
+%question has been defined.
+%
+%The syntax is
+%\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+%\RespBoxEssay[<commands to modify the appearance>]
+%\end{Verbatim}
+%The default width of is \cs{linewidth} and the default height is
+%\verb+6\baselineskip+.  For example,
+%
+%\begin{oQuestion}{bioNewton}
+%\redpoint Sketch the biography of Isaac Newton:\par
+%\RespBoxEssay[\rectH{3\baselineskip}]\par\smallskip
+%\end{oQuestion}
+%
+%This type of question is not evaluated by JavaScript, but is meant
+%to be submitted to a CGI for storage in a database. Later, the
+%instructor can review the essay answer.
+
+\subsubsection{Assigning Points}
+
+See \Nameref{sss:asignPts} for information on this subject.
+
+\subsubsection{\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{NoPeeking}}
+{\textbackslash NoPeeking}}\label{sss:nopeek}
+
+If you execute the command \cs{NoPeeking} in the preamble of your
+document, or prior to a \texttt{quiz}, then any quiz question with
+solution will be protected somewhat from prying eyes.
+
+In this case, an open page action is placed on the first page of
+each solution. If the user (student) tries to view a quiz solution
+before doing the quiz, the \textcolor{blue}{Adobe Reader} will
+automatically change the page to the page containing the quiz and
+place an alert box on the screen saying that viewing the solution
+before taking the quiz is not permitted.
+
+To resort to the default behavior, use the \cs{AllowPeeking}
+command.
+
+The previous \texttt{quiz} has been surrounded with a
+\cs{NoPeeking}/\-\cs{AllowPeeking} pair. If you go to one
+of the \hyperlink{knuth}{solutions} to that quiz, you will see
+what happens.  If nothing interesting happens, read the next
+red point.
+
+\redpoint Protection is removed when you click on `End Quiz' and
+restored when you click on some `Begin Quiz'.
+
+\section{Functions and Syntax supported by \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+
+In addition to the JavaScript built in math functions, exerquiz defines a number
+of other functions useful in mathematical work. These functions are typically input
+in a math question created by \cs{RespBoxMath}, for example, or in the function input
+field of an {\AcroFLeX} document.\footnote{The {\AcroFLeX} Graphing Bundle,
+\url{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acroflex.html}}
+
+Exerquiz also has its own syntax for entering algebraic expression in the
+\cs{Resp\-Box\-Math} field, these are document here as well.
+
+\subsection{Functions supported by \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+
+The following functions are built-in to JavaScript:
+
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+
+\noindent\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{2.8in}>{\PBS\raggedright}p{1.5in}}
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+abs\textrm{, }|$\cdot$| & absolute value function, preferred form, \texttt{|$\cdot$|} & \texttt{|-3|=3}, \texttt{|x|}\\
+sin & the sine function & \texttt{sin(pi/2)=1}, see the definition of \texttt{pi} below\\
+cos & the cosine function & \texttt{cos(1.5)}, \texttt{cos(2*x)}\\
+tan & the tangent function & \texttt{tan(pi/4)=1}\\
+asin& inverse sine function   & \texttt{asin(x)}\\
+acos& inverse cosine function & \texttt{acos(.2)}\\
+atan& inverse tangent function& \texttt{atan(-4)}\\
+exp & the natural exponential function, this function is also implemented as a \verb!e^x!,
+      where \texttt{e} is the natural number & \texttt{exp(-.5)}, \texttt{exp(-x\string^2)}\\
+log & the common logarithm. In JavaScript log is the natural logarithm, \textsf{exerquiz}
+    redefines this to be the common logarithm, use \texttt{ln} for natural logarithm & \texttt{log(10)=1}\\
+sqrt & the square root function & \texttt{sqrt(4.5)}\\
+ceil & the \texttt{ceil} function, \texttt{ceil(x)} is the smallest integer greater than or equal to \texttt{x} &
+\texttt{ceil(4.5)=5}\\
+floor&the \texttt{floor} function, where \texttt{floor(x)} is the largest integer less than or equal to \texttt{x} &
+\texttt{floor(4.5)=4}\\
+max & the maximum between two numbers & \texttt{max(2, 3.4) = 3.4}\\
+min & the minimum between two numbers & \texttt{max(2, 3.4) = 2}\\
+random & a pseudo-random number generator, this function is used internally by \textsf{exerquiz}, and is
+    available to users, \texttt{random()} returns a number between  0.0 and 1.0 & \texttt{random()}\\
+round & a rounding function, rounds a number to the nearest integer
+      & \texttt{round(4.5)= 5}, \texttt{round(-3.3)=-3}
+\end{longtable}
+
+\bigskip
+
+\newtopic The next set of functions are defined by \textsf{exerquiz}.
+
+\noindent\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{2.8in}>{\PBS\raggedright}p{1.5in}}
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn{1}{@{}l}{Function}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Description}&\multicolumn{1}{l}{Usage}\\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+cot & the \texttt{cotangent} function & \texttt{cot(1)}\\
+sec & the secant function & \texttt{sec(2)}\\
+csc & the \texttt{cosecant} function & \texttt{csc(2)}\\
+arcsin & the inverse sine function, same as \texttt{asin} & \texttt{arcsin(.5)}\\
+arccos &  the inverse cosine function, same as \texttt{acos} & \texttt{arccos(-.5)}\\
+arctan & the inverse tangent function, same as \texttt{atan} & \texttt{arctan(1)}\\
+ln & the natural logarithm & \texttt{ln(3.4)}\\
+sinh & the hyperbolic sine function & \texttt{sinh(0)}, \texttt{sinh(x)}\\
+cosh & the hyperbolic cosine function & \texttt{cosh(0)}, \texttt{cosh(x)}\\
+tanh & the hyperbolic tangent function & \texttt{tanh(x)}\\
+coth & the hyperbolic cotangent function & \texttt{coth(x)}\\
+sech & the hyperbolic secant function & \texttt{sech(x)}\\
+csch & the hyperbolic cosecant function & \texttt{csch(x)}\\
+asinh & the inverse hyperbolic sine function & \texttt{asinh(0)}, \texttt{asinh(x)}\\
+acosh & the inverse hyperbolic cosine function & \texttt{acosh(0)}, \texttt{acosh(x)}\\
+atanh & the inverse hyperbolic tangent function & \texttt{atanh(x)}\\
+acoth & the inverse hyperbolic cotangent function & \texttt{acoth(x)}\\
+asech & the inverse hyperbolic secant function & \texttt{asech(x)}\\
+acsch & the inverse hyperbolic cosecant function & \texttt{acsch(x)}\\
+sgn & the sign function, \texttt{sgn(x)} is -1 if \texttt{x} is negative, 1 if \texttt{x} is positive, and 0 of
+\texttt{x} is zero
+    & \texttt{sgn(-3.2) = -1} \\
+cis & the polar representation of a complex number,
+      $\operatorname{cis}(\theta)=\cos(\theta)+\imath\sin(\theta)$. This function
+      is only defined if the \texttt{complex} option of \textsf{dljslib} is used.
+      & \texttt{cis(pi/3)}
+\end{longtable}
+
+\bigskip
+
+\newtopic There are several other \textsf{exerquiz}-defined
+functions that are available through options of the
+\textsf{dljslib}, these are \texttt{C} (combinations), \texttt{P}
+(permutations), and \texttt{fact} (permutations). See the section
+titled \Nameref{extNumerFuncs} for details.
+
+\paragraph*{Recognized Constants.} \textsf{Exerquiz} recognizes
+\texttt{PI} and \texttt{pi} as symbols for the mathematical constant
+$\pi\approx \text{3.14159}$. The letter \texttt{e} is recognized as
+the natural number, which is approximately 2.7182818285.
+
+\subsection{Syntax supported by \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+
+\textsf{Exerquiz} attempts to make entering mathematics as easy and
+as natural as using a modern calculator. The following paragraphs
+outline the syntax of \textsf{exerquiz}. Authors should reproduce
+some form of these rules to their students, and perhaps some
+practice documents for them to test themselves with.
+
+\paragraph*{Grouping.} Algebraic expressions are grouped with
+matching parentheses~\texttt{(\,)}, brackets~\texttt{[\,]}, or
+braces~\texttt{\{\,\}}.
+
+\paragraph*{Spaces.} When the user enters a math expression, all
+spaces are removed before parsing of the expression begins.
+Students can write \texttt{1+(2+3)} or \texttt{1 + ( 2 + 3 )}, these
+are the same.
+
+\paragraph*{Addition and Subtraction.} These operations are
+performed using \texttt{+} and \texttt{-}, as expected. For example,
+\texttt{(x+1)-(x-2)}, \texttt{x+sin(x-pi)}
+
+\paragraph*{Multiplication and Division.} These operations are
+performed using \texttt{*} and \texttt{/}, as expected. For example,
+\texttt{2*x*(3*x+1)} and \texttt{(2*x-1)/(2*x+1)}.
+
+The use of the multiplication (\texttt{*}), is required, by default,
+and its use can be very tedious to the student. If you include the
+\textsf{dljslib} package with the \texttt{ImplMulti} option,
+\texttt{exerquiz} automatically inserts the multiplication symbol
+(\texttt{*}). The examples above, can be written as
+\texttt{2x(3x+1)} and \texttt{(2x-1)/(2x+1)}; it is recommended,
+therefore, that the \texttt{ImplMulti} option should normally be
+used. (Note: The use of \texttt{*} is still correct even when
+\texttt{ImplMulti} option is in effect.)
+
+\paragraph*{Powers and Exponents.} \textsf{Exerquiz} uses
+\texttt{\string^} to indicate exponents, for example,
+\texttt{x\string^2} means $x^2$. Other examples are \verb!17^(x+1)!,
+\verb!(x^2+1)^3!, \verb!(sin(x))^3!, and \verb!(x+1)^(2x+1)!.
+
+Recall that the letter \texttt{e} is recognized as the natural
+number, so \verb!e^{-x^2}! is the same as \verb!exp(-x^2)!.
+Normally, the use of \texttt{e} is preferred by students over the
+use of \texttt{exp}. For work in elementary mathematics, the
+existence of \texttt{exp} need not be even mentioned to the
+students.
+
+The difficulty of entering powers of functions is another issue for
+students. As illustrated above, in entering \verb!(sin(x))^3! or
+more complex expression, students find a source of difficulty, pain,
+and anguish. \textsf{Exerquiz} allows entering powers in the
+calculator style, the student can enter \verb!sin(x)^3! for
+$(\sin(x))^3$ (often written as $\sin^3(x)$) or \verb!3^sin(x)! to
+mean $3^{\sin(x)}$. Expressions like \verb!2^2^3! are interpreted as
+\verb!(2^2)^3! (the typeset version is $(2^2)^3$), which evaluates
+to 64. The use of parentheses is needed if the desired expression is
+$2^{2^3}$; this expression needs to be typed as \verb!2^(2^3)!,
+which evaluates to 256.
+
+If the \texttt{ImplMulti} option of the \texttt{dljslib} package is
+in effect, powers of functions can be entered in a more
+mathematically traditional, for example \verb!sin^2(x)! is
+recognized as the same as \verb!sin(x)^2!, or \verb!(sin(x))^2!;
+consequently, \verb!sin^2(x)^2! is the same as \verb!sin(x)^4!!
+
+\part{The \protect\textsf{eq2db} Package}\chgCurrLblName{The \textsf{eq2db} Package}\label{eq2db}
+
+\newtopic
+As the name suggests, Converts a self-contained exerquiz quiz to one that is
+submitted to a server-side script. The {\LaTeX} package itself does very
+little other than to define some useful commands that make it easy to convert
+a self-contained quiz into one that is submitted to server-side script.
+
+The \texttt{eq2db} currently has several options, including \texttt{eqRecord}, \opt{eqText},
+\opt{eqEmail}, and \opt{submitAs}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[eqText,submitAs=!anglemeta(!upshape(FDF|HTML))]{eq2db}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The option \texttt{eqText} and \texttt{submitAs=FDF} sets up the quiz to use
+an ASP (Active Server Page) that I have written. This ASP, named naturally,
+\texttt{eqRecord.asp}, takes the data and stores it to a database, such as
+Microsoft Access.
+
+%You can also submit your form data as HTML, as the two websites
+%demonstrate.\footnote{These websites were prepared as a script demonstration
+%site that is referenced in my yet-to-be submitted book \AEBBook~\cite{book:AEBB}.}
+%\begin{quote}
+%\url{http://faculty.nwfsc.edu/web/math/storyd/dps/}
+%\end{quote}
+%The above web page is on a \app{Windows} server hosted by Northwest Florida State
+%College (NWFSC). The server-side
+%script is written as ASP pages using VBScript.
+
+There is a website that you can experience submitting form data from a
+PDF.\footnote{This website was prepared as a script demonstration site that
+is referenced in my yet-to-be submitted book \AEBBook~\cite{book:AEBB}.}
+\begin{quote}
+\url{http://www.acrotex.net/dps/}
+\end{quote}
+This web page is on a \app{Linux} server hosted by {\AcroTeX.Net}. The
+server-side script is written with PHP.
+
+\redpoint In recent years, the browser technology has evolved in an unwelcome
+direction. Most web browsers do not support the Adobe Reader plug-in, hence,
+Reader no longer appears in the browser window, so essential for a good user
+experience. Most browsers use their own `native' PDF viewer, which does
+respond to links, but knows nothing about JavaScript. The only browser, as of
+this writing, that still supports the Adobe Reader plug-in (or ActiveX) is
+Microsoft Internet Explorer~11. For online, interactive work with PDF, the
+document consumer must use Microsoft Internet Explorer~11.
+
+\redpoint For more details, see the package documentation,
+\texttt{eq2dbman.pdf}.\footnote{The absolute URL is
+\url{\bUrl/acrotex/eq2dbman.pdf}} The \textsf{eq2db} package is available
+from CTAN (\url{ctan.org/pkg/eq2db}).\endredpoint
+
+
+\part{{\AcroT} \protect\textsf{eForm} Support}
+
+\newtopic
+In this document, we describe the support for form elements in an
+{\cAcroT} document. The PDF Specifications indicate there are four
+different categories of fields for a total of seven types of
+fields.
+
+\begin{questions}
+\setbox0=\hbox{(d)}
+\def\I#1{\makebox[\wd0]{\color{blue}(\hfil#1\hfil)}\ }
+
+    \item \textbf{Button Fields}
+        \begin{description}
+            \item[\I{a}] \textbf{Push Button}
+            \item[\I{b}] \textbf{Check Box}
+            \item[\I{c}] \textbf{Radio Button}
+        \end{description}
+    \item \textbf{Choice Fields}
+        \begin{description}
+            \item[\I{a}] \textbf{List Box}
+            \item[\I{b}] \textbf{Combo Box}
+        \end{description}
+    \item \textbf{Text Fields}
+    \item \textbf{Signature Fields}
+
+\end{questions}
+The {\cAcroB} does not support \textit{signature fields}, this
+leaves six types of fields. Commands for creating each of the
+remaining six types will be discussed.
+
+The \pkg{hyperref} Package (Rahtz, Oberdiek \textit{et al})
+provides support for the same set of form fields; however, not all
+features of these fields can be accessed through the
+\pkg{hyperref} commands.  I was determined to write my own set
+of commands which would be sufficiently comprehensive and
+extendable to suit all the needs of the \cAcroB.  All the quiz
+environments have been modified to use this new set of form
+commands, in this way, there is a uniform treatment of all form
+fields in \cAcroB.
+
+\redpoint The documentation for \textsf{eForm} support is too voluminous
+to include in this already voluminous document. See
+\href{\bUrl/eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf} (relative link
+\href{eformman.pdf}{eformman.pdf}) for complete details.
+
+
+\part{The AeB JavaScript Library}\label{part:dljslib}
+
+\newtopic
+The \textsf{dljslib} package---document level JavaScript
+library---is a companion to \textsf{exerquiz} and utilizes
+\textsf{insdljs} package. It is a library of JavaScript code that
+can be referenced in the preamble of a {\LaTeX} document, the code
+is then extracted from the package files, and inserted into the {\LaTeX}
+source using the \texttt{insDLJS} environment.
+
+The code belonging to the library supports the processing
+of the quizzes and short quizzes produced by \textsf{exerquiz}; they
+extend the capabilities of the core features of the
+\textsf{exerquiz} quizzes. Many of the JavaScript functions in the
+library were contributed by  users of AeB.
+
+\newtopic My deep appreciation goes out to the contributors to the AeB JavaScript library.
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item The options \texttt{unordered}, \texttt{factors},
+        \texttt{point} and \texttt{intervals} were written by Dr. Bruce Wagner
+        for an online grading system developed by Drs.\ Bruce Wagner and David
+        Arnold, and Mr.~Jacob Miles-Prystowsky. Dr. Robert Marik contributed to the \texttt{intervals} option, as well.
+    \item The options \texttt{nodec}, \texttt{noBinFact} and \texttt{combinatorics} were contributed by
+    Ross Moore and Frances Griffin, and were developed for their
+    \href{http://rutherglen.ics.mq.edu.au/~macqtex/}{MacQ\TeX}
+    online testing system.\footnote{\url{http://rutherglen.ics.mq.edu.au/~macqtex/}}
+\end{itemize}
+The AeB JavaScript library continues to accept contributions from AeB developers.
+
+\section{Usage and Options}
+
+As with all {\LaTeX} package, you use \textsf{dljslib} as follows,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\usepackage[!ameta(options)]{dljslib}
+\end{Verbatim}
+where \ameta{options} is a comma-delimited list of options. With each of the
+\ameta{options}, the associated JavaScript code is brought into the {\LaTeX}
+source document. The JavaScript functions, then, are available to your
+\textsf{exerquiz} quizzes.
+
+A list of the \ameta{options} of the \textsf{dljslib} package are listed below,
+and each are described in detail in the sections that follow.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item \texttt{ImplMulti}: Use this option to allow implied multiplication, e.g., the user can input
+    \texttt{2xsin(x)} instead of \texttt{2*x*sin(x)}. See \Nameref{ImplMulti}.
+\item \texttt{equations}: Use this option to process questions that take an equation as an answer.
+    See \Nameref{equations}.
+\item \texttt{vectors}: Use this option to process questions that take a vector as an answer.
+    See \Nameref{vectors}.
+\item \texttt{setSupport}: Use this option to process questions that take a set as an answer.
+    See \Nameref{setSupport}.
+\item \texttt{unordered}: Use this option to process questions that take an unordered list as an answer.
+    See \Nameref{unordered}.
+\item \texttt{factors}: Use this option to process questions that take a factored form of a polynomial.
+    See \Nameref{factors}.
+\item \texttt{point}: Use this option to process questions that take an ordered pair $(x,y)$ as an answer.
+    See \Nameref{point}.
+\item \texttt{intervals}: Use this option to process questions that take an interval, or a union of intervals
+    as an answer. See \Nameref{intervals}.
+\item \texttt{indefIntegral}: Use this compare function when evaluating the response to an indefinite integral.
+    See \Nameref{indefIntegral}.
+\item \texttt{nodec}: Use this filter function to deny the use of decimal numbers in an answer.
+    See \Nameref{nodec}.
+\item \texttt{noBinFac}: User this filter function to deny the use of \texttt{combinatorial} functions.
+    See \Nameref{noBinFac}.
+\item \texttt{limitArith}: Use any of this collection of filter functions to limit the use of arithmetic operations
+    in an answer. See \Nameref{limitArith}.
+\item \texttt{combinatorics}: Use this option to add combinatorial functions. The user may use these in an answer,
+    unless denied by the \texttt{noBinFact} filter.
+    See \Nameref{combinatorics}.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newtopic For a document author that is building a system of quizzes and who regularly
+uses a subset of these options, sets of options can be grouped
+together into a custom option. Use the \texttt{libcusopt.opt} file
+to declare your own sets of options. These declarations should be a
+combination of existing options. For example, The declarations in the
+\texttt{libcusopt.opt} file
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\DeclareOption{procrespgrp}{\includeOptions{%
+        vectors,setSupport,equations,intervals,limitArith,%
+        unordered,point,factors,ImplMulti}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+creates a new option for \textsf{dljslib} called
+\texttt{procrespgrp} which bundles together all frequently used
+options. The file \texttt{libcusopt.opt} can be placed in the
+{\LaTeX} search path, but it's perhaps best to put it in your source
+file, so that the options are local to that folder. The command
+\cs{includeOptions} is defined in the \textsf{insdljs} package.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw} A sample \texttt{libcusopt.opt} is distributed with the {\AEB},
+%this sample file consists of the example given above, and is used
+%by the sample file \texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}, which can be found in the folder \texttt{dljslib\_examples}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} A sample \texttt{libcusopt.opt} is distributed with the
+{\AEB}, this sample file consists of the example given above, and is used by
+the sample file \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+
+
+\newtopic The JavaScript functions are organized into five categories:
+\begin{questions}
+    \item \nameref{piExt} are support functions whose capabilities are built
+    into the core \textsf{exerquiz} package. When \textsf{exerquiz} detects the presence of these
+    support functions, it utilizes them seamlessly.
+    \item \nameref{respfunc} are functions the take over the task of processing the user input. Discussion
+    of these functions begins on page~\pageref*{respfunc}.
+    \item \nameref{compareFuncs} are functions that perform the comparison between the author's answer
+    and the student's answer. Based on this comparison, the student's answer is judged correct or not.
+    Refer to page~\pageref*{compareFuncs} for the compare functions.
+    \item \nameref{filterUserResp} are functions that are called immediately after the user
+    commits the response. A filter function can examine the response before passing it on to
+    the response function.  The filter function can cancel the user input if the input does not
+    meet certain criterion. The filter functions begin on page~\pageref*{filterUserResp}.
+    \item \nameref{extNumerFuncs} extend the collection of built-in functions that perform
+    numerical calculations. These numerical functions are discussed beginning on page~\pageref*{extNumerFuncs}.
+\end{questions}
+
+\def\respBoxPara{%
+\texttt{\hyperref[paraRespBox]{\string\RespBoxMath[\#1]\#2(\#3)[\#4]\#5\#6\#7\#8[\#9]*\#10}}}
+
+\subsection{Parse Input Extensions}\label{piExt}
+
+This type of JavaScript functions are support functions whose
+capabilities are built into the core \textsf{exerquiz} package.
+When \textsf{exerquiz} detects the presence of these support
+functions, it utilizes them seamlessly.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{ImplMulti}}\label{ImplMulti}
+
+The default behavior for processing a math fill-in question is to
+require the student to insert `\texttt*' for multiplication and to
+enclose any function being raised to a power in parentheses, e.g.
+\verb+x*(sin(x))^2+. This becomes quite tiresome if the expression to be entered
+is complicated. The \texttt{ImplMulti} option enables the student to use
+\emph{implied multiplication} and \emph{simplified exponentiation}.
+
+The \texttt{ImplMulti} option loads two JavaScript functions, \texttt{Ck4Products}
+and \texttt{Ck4Expo\-nents}. The latter implements the notation, \verb+sin^2(x)+
+for $\sin^2(x)$, and is equivalent to $(\sin(x))^2$. A more complex exponent must be enclosed enclosed
+in parentheses, for example \verb-ln^(x+1)(x)-. The former function, \texttt{Ck4Products},
+inserts the multiplication symbol, `\texttt{*}', wherever multiplication is implied. For example,
+\verb+xysin(xy)+ becomes \verb+x*y*sin(x*y)+.
+
+\newtopic\textcolor{red}{Important:} If loaded, \texttt{exerquiz}
+will automatically use these two functions in any math fill-in question, no further action is needed.
+
+%\exPDF{jquiztst} Many of the demo files that come with AeB use the \texttt{ImplMulti} option, one such
+%representative file is \texttt{jquiztst.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=810} Many of the demo files that come with AeB use the \texttt{ImplMulti} option, one such
+representative file is \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=810}{jquiztst.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsection{Response Functions} \label{respfunc}
+
+For fill-in questions, a response function is one that is called immediately after the user
+enters and commits an answer. The default response function that processes the user's response
+is \texttt{ProcResp}. The $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument of the \cs{RespBoxMath} command,
+\begin{equation*}
+  \text{\respBoxPara}
+\end{equation*}
+is used to specify another response function. This section discusses the alternate
+response functions available in the library, and gives examples of each.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{equations}}    \label{equations}
+
+Use this option to process questions for which an equation is the
+expected answer. This option defines the JavaScript function
+\texttt{ProcRespEq}. When using a math fill-in question (the
+\cs{RespBoxMath} command), this function is placed in the optional
+$\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument, the one that follows \texttt{*}.
+See \Nameref{ss:respbox} for a description of the parameters of
+\cs{RespBoxMath}
+
+\newtopic The following question goes inside a \texttt{quiz} or
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\RespBoxMath{y = 4 * x - 3}(xy){4}{.0001}{[0,1]x[0,1]}*{ProcRespEq}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{jqzequat} The demo file \texttt{jqzequat.tex} includes the
+%above example as well as other in the context of a working
+%\texttt{shortquiz}, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=951} The demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=951}{jqzequat.pdf}} includes the above
+example as well as other in the context of a working \texttt{shortquiz}.
+
+\newtopic Alert box message: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\equationsAlertMsg{"An equation is expected"}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{vectors}}\label{vectors}
+
+Use this option to process questions for which a vector is the
+expected answer. This option defines the JavaScript function
+\texttt{ProcVec}. When using a math fill-in question (the
+\cs{RespBoxMath} command), this function is placed in the optional
+$\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument,
+the one that follows \texttt{*}. See \Nameref{ss:respbox} for a
+description of the parameters of \cs{RespBoxMath}.
+
+\newtopic The following question goes inside a \texttt{quiz} or
+\texttt{shortquiz} environment. The premise of these two questions
+is that the definitions of $\vec a$, $\vec b$ and $f(t)$ are given:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\item $\vec a + \vec b =
+    \RespBoxMath{<4, 4, 4>}{1}{.0001}{[2,4]}*{ProcVec}$
+\item $\vec f'(t) =
+    \RespBoxMath{<e^t, 2*t, cos(t)>}(t){3}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcVec}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first question takes a three component vector of numerical values, the second
+takes a three component vector of function values.
+
+%\exPDF{jqzvector} These two examples were taken from the demo file \texttt{jqzvector.tex},
+%which includes both \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=949} These two examples were taken from the demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=949}{jqzvector.pdf}},
+which includes both \texttt{quiz} and \texttt{shortquiz} environments.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\vectorsErrorMsgi{"I'm looking for a vector.
+    You need to use proper vector notation,
+    try using angle brackets <....>."}
+\newcommand\vectorsErrorMsgii{"Angle brackets are not balanced.
+    Check the expression you typed in."}
+\newcommand\vectorsErrorMsgiii{"Incorrect number of components.
+    The answer requires " + aCorrAns.length + " components."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{setSupport}}   \label{setSupport}
+
+We introduce three JavaScript (response) functions
+for handling a set of answers or a comma delimited list of answers, these
+are \texttt{ProcRespSetNum}, \texttt{ProcRespSetSym}, and
+\texttt{ProcRespListFormula}. The first function is for numerical
+answers, the second for simple symbolic answers. These JavaScript response
+functions are passed to \cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+%\exPDF{set_test} The demo file for these three
+%response functions is \texttt{set\_test.tex}; the examples below
+%were taken from that file, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples}
+%folder.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=953} The demo file for these three
+response functions is \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=953}{set\_test.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic\indent The functions \texttt{ProcRespSetNum}, \texttt{ProcRespSetSym} can
+handle (math fill-in) questions whose answers are a \textit{set of
+numbers (symbols)} or a comma delimited \emph{list of numbers
+(symbols)}.
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespSetNum:}\label{para:ProcRespSetNum} The function can handle (math fill-in)
+questions whose answers are a \textit{set of numbers} or a
+comma delimited \textit{list of numbers}.
+
+\newtopic This example takes a comma-delimited
+list as its expected response.  After the student enters the
+response, the answer is formatted as a set, with enclosing braces,
+like so \verb!{ ... }!. The student does not enter the braces, the
+JavaScript does after the comma-delimited list is entered and
+committed.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$(x+1)^2 (x+3) = 0$, $S = \RespBoxMath[\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}
+   \rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]{-1,-3}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetNum}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The formatting of answer is accomplished by passing
+\verb!\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}! as an optional argument of
+\cs{RespBoxMath}. The command \cs{formatAsSet} expands to a
+JavaScript function that is defined when the \texttt{setSupport}
+option is taken. The little-known key \cs{AddAAFormat} is
+defined in \textsf{exerquiz} and is specifically designed for inserting
+special formatting into a math fill-in response. The use of the set
+formatting is optional.
+
+\newtopic This next example again uses \texttt{ProcRespSetNum}. The
+equation has repeated roots. To require the student to enter the
+repeated roots, just list them as part of the answer argument.
+%Here,the set notation is not used (since it would be incorrect
+%\verb~{-1, 1/2, 2, 2, 2} = {-1, 1/2, 2}~).
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$(x+1)(2x-1)(x-2)^3 = 0$, $x = \RespBoxMath[\rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]
+    {-1, 1/2, 2, 2, 2}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetNum}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespSetSym:} The function can handle (math fill-in)
+questions whose answers are a \textit{set of symbols}.
+
+This function can handle simple symbolic answers. The variable list should
+be the ``universal set'' of the problem.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\def\U{a,b,c,d,e,f,g} % define a universal set
+$A \cap B = \RespBoxMath[\AddAAFormat{\formatAsSet}
+ \rectW{.75in}\textSize{0}]{c,d}(\U){1}{.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetSym}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespListFormula:} This function can handle a (math fill-in)
+question whose answer is a comma-delimited list of expressions. Similar to
+\texttt{ProcVec}, but the angle brackets are not used to specify the vector.
+
+\newtopic In this example, taken from \texttt{set\_test.tex}, a
+vector response is required, but without the enclosing angle
+brackets.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$\vec f'(t) = \RespBoxMath{e^t, 2*t,cos(t)}(t){3}
+    {.0001}{0}{1}*{ProcRespListFormula}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+You can also define your own formatting function, to format
+the input.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{unordered}}    \label{unordered}
+
+This option defines the JavaScript (response) function
+\texttt{ProcRespSetFormula} that will grade an \emph{unordered list} of
+formulas, such as \texttt{x}, \verb!x^2!, \verb!x^3!.  For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Some question requiring an unordered list of responses.
+\RespBoxMath{x,x^2,x^3}{10}{.0001}{[1,2]}*{ProcRespSetFormula}
+\end{Verbatim}
+A correct answer is a list of the monomials \verb!x!,\verb!x^2!,\verb!x^3! in any order.
+As usual, this JavaScript response function is passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw} The demo file that uses the \texttt{unordered} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}, which can be found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{unordered} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{factors}}      \label{factors}
+
+The factors option defines \texttt{ProcRespFactors}, passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument. The
+response function \texttt{ProcRespFactors} is used for grading
+polynomial factoring questions. For example, if a polynomial factors
+as \verb!-5x^2(x-4)(x+2)!, then the answer is only unique up to the
+order of factors and a change of sign on an even number of factors.
+The student could respond with \verb!-5x^2(x+2)(x-4)! or
+\verb!5x^2(-x+4)(x+2)! or \verb!-5(x-4)(x+2)x^2!. The function
+should grade all of these variations correctly; however, it will not
+grade \verb!-(x-4)(x+2)5x^2! as correct. The leading coefficient, if
+there is one, must be placed at the beginning, which conforms to our
+usual conventions.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Completely factor the polynomial $x^3-4x^2 + 2x - 8$.
+\RespBoxMath{(x^2+2)(x-4)}{10}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespFactors}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Note that \texttt{ProcRespFactors} is passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw} The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}, which can be found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples} folder
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{point}}        \label{point}
+
+The response function \texttt{ProcPoint} is an almost exact copy of your
+\texttt{ProcVec}, but uses parentheses instead of angle brackets as
+delimiters. Used with questions that have a point $(x,y)$ as the
+answer.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Calculate the derivative of $\vec f(t) = (e^t,e^(t^2))$.
+\RespBoxMath{(e^t,2te^t)}(t){10}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcPoint}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\texttt{ProcPoint} is passed to
+\cs{RespBoxMath} as the $\text{10}^{\text{th}}$ argument.
+
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw}The demo file that uses the \texttt{point} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{point} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\pointErrorMsgi{"I'm looking for a point.
+    You need to use proper point notation."}
+\newcommand\pointErrorMsgii{"Parentheses are not balanced."}
+\newcommand\pointErrorMsgiii{"Incorrect number of components.
+    The answer requires " + aCorrAns.length+" components."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{intervals}}    \label{intervals}
+
+\texttt{ProcRespIntervals} is for grading questions that have an
+interval or union of intervals as the answer. Examples of answers
+supported by this function are listed below:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(2,3)
+[2,3]
+(-inf,4)
+(-inf,4]
+(6,inf)
+[6,inf)
+(2,3)U[8,9)
+(-inf,6)U(9,inf)
+(-inf,6]U[7,8)U(9,inf)
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here \texttt{inf} for infinity and the capital letter \texttt{U} for
+the union symbol. Note also that intervals in a union can appear
+in any order.
+
+The \texttt{ProcRespIntervals} function has been modified by Robert Marik
+to allow intervals with end points \texttt{ln(2)}, \texttt{exp(4)} or \texttt{sqrt(3)}.
+Thus, intervals of the form
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+(ln(2),ln(3)]U(exp(10),inf)
+\end{Verbatim}
+are recognized by this procedure.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\RespBoxMath{(-inf,4]U[5,inf)}{10}
+    {.0001}{\viidna}*{ProcRespIntervals}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\Important Problems with unbalanced parentheses while
+authoring and building the PDF file. The code below
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\intervalbox{(-inf,4)U[5,inf)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+the right parenthesis of the second interval does not have a
+matching left parenthesis. This causes problems with Acrobat
+Distiller. As a work around, escape the odd parenthesis (using
+\cs{eqbs}), like so \verb!\intervalbox{(-inf,4)U[5,inf\eqbs)}!,
+ where \cs{eqbs} is defined in the \textsf{insdljs} package.
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_apw}The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=959} The demo file that uses the \texttt{factors} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=959}{dljslib\_apw.pdf}}.
+
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{complex}}\label{complex}
+
+This option extends the ability of \textsf{exerquiz} to process questions
+that are expecting a complex number as an answer.
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespComplex:} The \texttt{complex} option defines
+the function \texttt{ProcRespComplex}, which is specified in the usual way, as seen below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$(3+3i)+(4+5i) = \RespBoxMath{7+8i}{3}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespComplex}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{complex} option also defines the \texttt{cis} function,
+the definition of which is
+$\operatorname{cis}(x)=\cos(x)+\imath\sin(x)$. When \texttt{complex}
+is not loaded, this function is undefined, and will be caught by the
+parser of exerquiz as a syntax error. If \texttt{complex} is loaded
+and the user enters the \texttt{cis} function in a non-complex
+problem, the user's answer is not flagged as a syntax error and will
+most probably be scored as \emph{wrong}. The exerquiz implementation of the \texttt{cis}
+function, does not, at this time, support powers of the \texttt{cis} function, the parser
+attempts to find expressions of the form \texttt{cis\string^}, flag it, and emit
+an alert message, see below. This implementation does not detect powers of the form
+\texttt{(cis(x))\string^2}, however.
+
+The next two functions are due to Bruce Wagner, with modifications by D. P. Story.
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespListComplex:} This response function evaluates an \emph{ordered} list
+of comma-delimited complex numbers. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+If $z=4(\cos x+i\sin x)$, compute $z^2$ and $z^3$, in that order.
+\RespBoxMath{16*cis(2x),64*cis(3x)}{4}{0.0001}
+    {[0,1]}*{ProcRespListComplex}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\paragraph*{ProcRespSetComplex:} This response function evaluates an \emph{unordered} list
+of comma-delimited complex numbers. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ Find all real and complex solutions of the equation $x^2=-9$.
+ Express your answer(s) in rectangular form $a+bi$.
+ \RespBoxMath{3i,-3i}{4}{0.0001}{[0,1]}*{ProcRespSetComplex}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_complex}The demo file that uses the \texttt{complex} option is
+%\texttt{dljslib\_complex.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=1129} The demo file that uses the \texttt{complex} option is
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=1129}{dljslib\_complex.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\complexPowerAlertMsg}{%
+    "Powers of i (for example, i^2, i^3) are not supported,
+    replace powers of i with their complex equivalents."
+}
+\newcommand{\complexCisAlertMsg}{%
+    "The cis function does not support exponents. Write,
+    for example, cis^3(x) as cis(3*x), instead."}
+\newcommand{\alertNotComplexMsg}{%
+    "The expression is not in the form of a complex
+    number, a+bi"}
+\def\emptyCompComplexMsg(#1){%
+    "You entered nothing for the component "
+     +(#1+1)+" of your answer. Please enter a complex number."
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The latter definition takes a delimited argument, necessary since it executes
+within a verbatim environment where braces \texttt{\{} and \texttt{\}} are
+not grouping delimiters.
+
+\subsection{Compare Functions} \label{compareFuncs}
+
+Compare functions are used to compare the author's answer with the
+student's answer. Based on the comparison, the student's answer is
+judged correct, or not. The \textsf{exerquiz} package has two
+built-in compare functions: \texttt{diffCompare} (the default) and
+\texttt{reldiffCompare}. The former makes the comparison based on absolute differences
+\[
+    \texttt{diffCompare} = |\,\text{Author Ans} - \text{Student Ans}\,|
+\]
+while the latter uses absolute relative differences to make the comparison
+\[
+    \texttt{reldiffCompare} = \frac{|\,\text{Author Ans} - \text{Student Ans}\,|}
+                                    {|\text{Author Ans}|}
+\]
+Comparison functions are passed through the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument of \cs{RespBoxMath},
+if no such argument is passed, \texttt{diffCompare} is used.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{indefIntegral}}\label{indefIntegral}
+
+The answer to an indefinite integral is non-unique; however all
+answers differ by a constant. This compare function is used with
+indefinite integrals. Note the name of the function is
+\texttt{indef\-Com\-pare}, this is the name you use to call the
+function. To use this compare function, insert its name in optional
+$\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument,
+\begin{equation*}
+  \text{\respBoxPara}
+\end{equation*}
+that's the argument that follows the interval specification.
+
+
+An example of usage of this function is found in the sample file
+\texttt{dljslib\_ex.tex}, referenced below; from that file we have:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$\displaystyle\int\sin(x)\,dx =
+    \RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}[indefCompare]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{dljslib_ex} See the demo file
+%\texttt{dljslib\_ex.tex} for an example of indefinite integration
+%comparison.  Numerous other files use indefinite integration as well.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=961} See the demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=961}{dljslib\_ex.pdf}} for an example of
+indefinite integration comparison.
+
+
+\subsubsection{satisfyEq}
+
+The \texttt{satisfyEq} library of procedures supports the type of question where
+the student is asked to enter one or more points that satisfy an equation.
+
+We pose a problem where the student is asked to enter an order pair or triple
+that satisfies an equation. For example
+
+\newtopic\makebox[0pt][r]{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$\enspace}%
+\begin{oQuestion}{satisfyEqQuiz}%
+Enter a point that lies on the line $2x+3y=6$, the answer is an
+ordered pair of numbers, for example $(1,2)$.
+\begin{equation*}
+    \text{A point is }\RespBoxMath[%
+    \rectW{1.5in}\textSize{0}]{2x+3y-6}(xy){1}{.0001}{\viidna}*{ProcRespEvalEq}\kern1bp
+    \CorrAnsButton{various, such as (0,2)}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{oQuestion}
+The verbatim listing follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\RespBoxMath[\rectW{1.5in}\textSize{0}]{2x+3y-6}(xy){1}
+    {.0001}{\viidna}*{ProcRespEvalEq}\kern1bp
+    \CorrAnsButton{various, such as (0,2)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Line~(2) shows the placement of one of the procedures, \texttt{ProcRespEvalEq},
+that is part of \texttt{satisfyEq}.
+
+\newtopic There are four procedures in this set:
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEq}: Supports a single equation, the answer
+        is a single ordered $n$-tuple, the entries are allowed to be zero.
+    \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqNonZero}: Supports a single equation, the
+        answer is a single ordered n-tuple, the entries are \emph{not
+        allowed} to be zero.
+    \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqList}: Supports a single equation, the
+        answer consists of $k$, $n$-tuples, the components of the
+        $n$-tuples are allowed to be zero. Each $n$-tuple is separated
+        by a semi-colon (;).
+    \item \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqListNonZero}: Supports a single equation,
+        the answer consists of $k$, ordered $n$-tuples, the components of the
+        $n$-tuples are \emph{not allowed} to be zero. Each $n$-tuple is separated
+        by a semi-colon (;).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Some Technical Details.} Recall the parameter list for
+\cs{RespBoxMath},
+\begin{equation*}
+  \text{\respBoxPara}
+\end{equation*}
+
+
+\noindent\texttt{ProcRespEvalEq}, \textsl{et al}, are not based on random
+point generation, as are all the other \textsf{exerquiz} functions. Here,
+the user enters numerical data, the function then verifies the data
+entered satisfies the given equation. The role of one of the parameters
+has changed, others are ignored:
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item The role of parameter \texttt{\#2} (the correct answer) has
+        changed. Suppose the equation presented to the user is $ F = G $.
+    \begin{itemize}
+        \item For \texttt{ProcRespEvalEq} and \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqNonZero},
+        pass \texttt{F - G} as parameter \texttt{\#2}.
+        \item For \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqList} and \texttt{ProcRespEvalEqListNonZero},
+        pass \texttt{k;F-G} as the parameter \texttt{\#2}. For this type of
+        problem, the author is asking the user to enter \texttt{k}, $n$-tuples
+        that satisfy the equation. Note \texttt{k} and \texttt{F-G} are delimited
+        by a semicolon (\texttt{;}).
+    \end{itemize}
+    \item The value of \texttt{epsilon} (parameter \texttt{\#6}) is obeyed.
+    \item Parameter \texttt{\#5}, the number of iterations, is not used.
+        Though this parameter is not used, \texttt{\#5} is required by the
+        macro, so just use \texttt{1} as the number of iterations.
+    \item Parameter \texttt{\#7}, the domain of the variables, is not
+        used. Again, since this is a required parameter, use \cs{viidna};
+        \cs{viidna} is a special command that can be used for this
+        parameter, in this context only.
+    \item The optional parameter \texttt{\#9} is not used and is ignored if present.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=} Additional examples will (eventually) appear
+on the \href{\urlAcroTeXBlog}{\AcroTeX{} Blog}.
+
+
+\subsection{Filter User's Responses} \label{filterUserResp}
+
+Filters are JavaScript functions that process the user input before being passed to the response function.
+Filters are passed to \cs{RespBoxMath} through the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$\displaystyle\int\sin(x)\,dx =
+    \RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}{[0,1]}[indefCompare]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+This $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument can take on two formats: (1) the name of the compare function,
+as illustrated in `\nameref{indefIntegral}' above; (2) a JavaScript object. Use a JavaScript object
+as the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument to specify a filter.
+
+The JavaScript object that can be passed in the $\text{9}^{\text{th}}$ argument has two properties
+\texttt{comp} and \texttt{priorParse}. The object has the form
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+{ comp: !ameta(compare), priorParse: !ameta(JS_func) | !ameta(array_JS_funcs) }
+\end{Verbatim}
+The first property is used to specify a compare function, the second
+property specifies a filter or filters. The value of
+\texttt{priorParse} may be a JavaScript function to filter the
+user's response, or an array of JavaScript functions to filter the
+user input. (The array must be specified using the \Com{Array}
+command, illustrated below, see the paragraph
+`\nameref{NoProducts}', on page~\pageref*{NoProducts}.)
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{nodec}}        \label{nodec}
+
+The \texttt{nodec} option defines the JavaScript function
+\texttt{nodec} that attempts to prohibit the use of decimal numbers
+in the response. The function simply searches the user response for
+any occurrence of the decimal point. (The German language uses
+the comma as a decimal point, you can set the decimal point to some
+other symbol that \texttt{nodec} searches for through the command
+\Com{setdecimalpoint}, the default definition is
+\verb!\setdecimalpoint{.}!.)
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+$ 0.75 = \RespBoxMath{3/4}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{priorParse: nodec }] $
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic Alert box message: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\nodecAlertMsg{%
+    "A decimal answer is not acceptable here
+     Please express your answer using fractions, square roots,
+     e, log, etc."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{noBinFac}}     \label{noBinFac}
+
+The \texttt{noBinFac} option defines the JavaScript filter function
+\texttt{noBinFac}, that disallows binomial coefficients and
+factorials in math fill-in questions. Binomial and factorial
+functions are defined through the \texttt{combinatorics} option,
+page~\pageref*{combinatorics}.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+The number of ways to choose four object from a set of ten is
+    \RespBoxMath{C(10,4)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{priorParse: noBinFac}]
+        \CorrAnsButton{C(10,4)}*{EvalCorrAnsButton}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \texttt{noBinFac} filter is used, so the student is not allowed
+to enter binomial coefficients; however, the document author can use
+binomial coefficients, note the use in the answer (first argument)
+and in the \cs{CorrAnsButton}. The special syntax used for
+\cs{CorrAnsButton}, \Nameref{inclsoln}.
+
+%\exPDF{dljs_comb} Illustrations of this filter can be
+%found in the \texttt{dljs\_comb.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=963} Illustrations of this filter can be found in
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=963}{dljs\_comb.pdf}}.
+
+
+\newtopic Alert box messages: May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\noBinFactBinCoeffAlertMsg{%
+    "You may not use this notation here.
+     Please evaluate the binomial coefficient.
+     You may present your answer as a product rather
+     than calculating a very large number."}
+\newcommand\noBinFactPermAlertMsg{%
+    "You may not use this notation here.
+     Please evaluate the permutation.
+     You may present your answer as a product rather
+     than calculating a very large number."}
+\newcommand\noBinFactFactAlertMsg{%
+    "You may not use this notation here.
+     Please evaluate the factorial.
+     You may present your answer as a product rather
+     than calculating a very large number."}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{limitArith}}   \label{limitArith}
+
+The \texttt{limitArith} option defines a number of filter functions:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+DecimalsOnly, NoProducts, NoDivision, NoAddOrSub,
+NoArithAllowed,NoExpAllowed,NoTrigAllowed, NoTrigLogAllowed
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+%\exPDF{limarth} Examples of these filtering functions
+%can be found in the demo file \texttt{limarth.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=947} Examples of these filtering functions
+can be found in the demo file
+\texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=947}{limarth.pdf}}.
+
+
+\paragraph*{DecimalsOnly} The \texttt{DecimalsOnly} is a function
+that takes only numbers, either integer or decimal. Usage
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ $ 2.3 + 4.5 = \RespBoxMath{6.8}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+    [{priorParse: DecimalsOnly }]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoProducts}\label{NoProducts} The function
+\texttt{NoProducts} requires that \texttt{ImplMulti} is taken. An
+example of usage is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 3/4 = \RespBoxMath{.75}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+    [{priorParse: \Array(NoDivision, NoProducts) }]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+In the above example, we first call \texttt{NoDivision} then \texttt{NoProducts}. Several
+filtering functions can be executed by putting them into an array, using the \cs{Array}
+command.\footnote{The \cs{Array} command  was originally named \cs{array}, it has been renamed
+to avoid clashing with the \texttt{amsmath} package.}
+
+\paragraph*{NoAddOrSub} This function, as the name implies, denies the use of both addition and subtraction.
+The algorithm I use here is that if a plus or minus follows anything but a left parenthesis,
+we assume it is a binary operation of addition or subtraction, respectively.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 5.1 - 3.2 =
+    \RespBoxMath{1.9}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{priorParse: NoAddOrSub}]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoArithAllowed} Deny user the use of all arithmetic functions, including exponents.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 6/5 = \RespBoxMath{1.25}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+    [{priorParse: NoArithAllowed}]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoExpAllowed} Deny user the use of exponents.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ 25^2 = \RespBoxMath{625}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+    [{priorParse: NoExpAllowed}]
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoTrigAllowed} Deny user the use all trig functions, as
+well as the constants \texttt{PI} and \texttt{pi}, which are aliases
+for $\pi$. Example:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ \sin(\pi/4) = \RespBoxMath{sqrt(2)/2}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+    [{priorParse: NoTrigAllowed }]$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{NoTrigLogAllowed} Deny the use of trig and log functions.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+$ \ln(e^2)\sin(\pi/4) = \RespBoxMath{sqrt(2)}{1}{.0001}{[0,1]}
+    [{priorParse: NoTrigLogAllowed }]\CorrAnsButton{sqrt(2)}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{sciNotResp} Allow only a response in \emph{normalized} scientific notation:
+\texttt{aE([+]|-)d}, where $1\le|\texttt{a}|\le9$, and \texttt{d} is one or more digits
+(0-9) prefixed by a \texttt{-}, or an optional \texttt{+}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+Convert 123.4 to scientific notation.
+\begin{equation*}
+    123.4 = \RespBoxMath{1.234E+2}*{1}{0}{[0,1]}[%
+        {priorParse: sciNotResp }]\CorrAnsButton{1.234E+2}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{noNegExp} Does not allow negative exponents. For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\item Simplify $\displaystyle\frac{4}{r^4}\cdot\frac{r^3}{12}=
+    \RespBoxMath{1/(3r)}(r)*{3}{.0001}{[0,1]}[{%
+        priorParse:\Array( nodec, noNegExp )
+    }]\CorrAnsButton{1/(3r)}$
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{Alert box messages:} May be redefined.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\DecimalsOnlyErrorMsg{"Enter only an integer,
+    e.g., 17, or a decimal number, e.g. 12.4.
+    Using arithmetic operations or built in function is
+    not acceptable for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoProductsErrorMsg{"Multiplication is not allowed
+    for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoDivisionErrorMsg{"Division is not allowed
+    for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoAddOrSubErrorMsg{"Neither addition nor subtraction
+    is not allowed for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoExpAllowedErrorMsg{"The use of exponents is not
+    allowed for this problem."}
+\newcommand\NoTrigAllowedErrorMsg{"The use of trig functions
+    in this problem is not allowed."}
+\newcommand\NoTrigLogAllowedErrorMsg{"The use of trig and log
+    functions is not allowed in this problem."}
+\newcommand{\sciNotSyntaxError}{"Enter the answer in scientific
+    notation."}
+\newcommand{\sciNotNormalForm}{"The scientific notation entered
+    is not in normalized form."}
+\newcommand{\NoNegExpMsg}{"No negative exponents permitted,
+    keep working!"}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Extending Numerical Functions}  \label{extNumerFuncs}
+
+These JavaScript functions extend the collection of built-in
+functions that perform numerical calculations.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{combinatorics}}\label{combinatorics}
+
+This option defines three JavaScript functions: a binomial
+coefficient function \texttt{ch(n,r)}; a number of permutations
+function \texttt{perm(n,r)}, and a factorial function
+\texttt{fact(n)}.
+
+\paragraph*{User Accessible Functions} The user should use the names \texttt{C}, \texttt{P} and \texttt{fact}
+to access the functions \texttt{ch}, \texttt{perm} and \texttt{fact}, respectively:
+\begin{itemize}
+    \item $ \texttt{C(n,r)} = \texttt{ch(n,r)} = \dbinom{n}{r} = \dfrac{n\,!}{r\,!(n-r)\,!}$
+    \item $ \texttt{P(n,r)} = \texttt{perm(n,r)} = n\cdot(n-1)\cdots(n-r)$
+    \item $ \texttt{fact(n)} = n\cdot(n-1)\cdots3\cdot2\cdot1$
+\end{itemize}
+\textbf{Note: }If you place \verb!\replaceExclPt{true}! in the preamble, the user is allowed to enter factorials using
+the
+traditional exclamation notation: for example, \texttt{17!} is the same as fact(17), and \texttt{(17)!}, \texttt{[17]!}
+or \verb|{17}!|
+are all interpreted as \texttt{fact(17)}.
+
+%\exPDF{dljs_comb} Illustrations of the \texttt{combinatorics} option can be
+%found in the \texttt{dljs\_comb.tex}.
+
+\exAeBBlogPDF{p=963} Illustrations of the \texttt{combinatorics} option can be
+found in \texttt{\href{\urlAcroTeXBlog/?p=963}{dljs\_comb.pdf}}.
+
+
+%------------------------ List of Options ------------------------------------
+\newpage
+\section{List of Options}\label{s:ListofOpts}
+
+%\begin{tabular}{|>{\bfseries\color{red}}l|>{\PBS\raggedright}p{.5\linewidth}|}\hline
+%  \multicolumn1{|>{\bfseries\columncolor{light-blue}}c|}{Component} &
+%  \multicolumn1{>{\bfseries\columncolor{light-blue}}c|}{Brief Description}\\  \hline \rowcolor[gray]{.9}
+
+\def\currentPackage{Web}
+
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1mm}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{2mm}
+\begin{longtable}{|>{\ttfamily}l|>{\PBS\raggedright}p{.5\linewidth}|}
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Web/Exerquiz Packages} \\
+\hline
+\endfirsthead
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Web/Exerquiz Packages (cont.)} \\
+\hline
+\endhead
+\hline
+\endfoot
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Web Package} \\
+\hline
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{dvipsone}         & dvi-to-ps driver by {\Y&Y}, Inc. \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{dvips}            & dvi-to-ps driver \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{pdftex}           & tex-to-pdf application \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{dvipdfm}          & dvi-to-pdf application \\
+\hyperref[sss:driver]{textures}         & the Textures System for Mac \\
+\hyperref[sss:designoptions]
+    {\parbox[t]{.75in+4pt}{designi,\newline
+    designii,\newline designiii,\newline
+    designiv,\newline designv}}         & these set screen design parameters \\
+\hyperref[ss:templates]{usetemplates}   & this option activates mechanism for
+                                            creating colored backgrounds and overlays\\
+\hyperref[ss:templates]{leftpanel}      & creates a left navigation panel\\
+\hyperref[ss:templates]{rightpanel}     & creates a right navigation panel\\
+\hyperref[sss:navibar]{navibar}         & inserts a menu bar at the bottom or each
+           page\\
+\hyperref[sss:latextoc]{latextoc}       & displays the standard toc \\
+%\hyperref[sss:nodir]{nodirectory}       & eliminates the directory listing on the title page\\
+\hyperref[sss:nodir]{usedirectory}      & causes the title page directory to appear on the title page\\
+\hyperref[sss:webforpaper]{forpaper}    & this turns off color, and does not put solutions on
+           separate pages. \\
+\hyperref[forcolorpaper]{forcolorpaper} & Same as \texttt{forpaper}, but
+                                            does not turn off color, useful for color printers.\\
+\hyperref[sss:weblatexlayout]%
+    {latexlayout}                       & \texttt{web} uses page
+                                            layout for \texttt{article} class.
+                                            For use with \texttt{forpaper}.\\
+\hyperref[sss:webtight]{tight}          & Redefines list environment parameters so
+                                            lists don't take up so much space \\
+\hyperref[webpro]{pro}                  & Causes web to input enhanced control
+                                            over various web elements\\
+\hyperref[nobullets]{nobullets}         & Forces the use of numbers for subsubsections,  also executes the
+\texttt{latextoc} option\\
+\hyperref[usesf]{usesf}                 & switches to sans serif as the default font, good for presentations\\
+\hyperref[web:unicode]{unicode}         & Passes the \texttt{unicode} option to \pkg{hyperref}.\\
+\hyperref[web:useui]{useui}             & Passes the \texttt{useui} option to \textsf{eforms}.\\
+\hyperref[web:xhyperref]{xhyperref}     & Causes web not to include the hyperref package.\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{dutch}          & Dutch for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Henny Wilbrink)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{french}         & French for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Jean-Michel Sarlat)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{german}         & German for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Michael Wiedmann)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{italian}        & Italian for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to PierLuigi Zezza)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{norsk}          & Norwegian for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Hans Fredrik Nordhaug)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{russian}        & Russian for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Sergei V. Znamenskii)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{spanish}        & Spanish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Pedro Luis Luque)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{polish}         & Polish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Jerzy Mycielski)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{finnish}        & Finnish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to P\"aivi Porras)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{catalan}        & Catalan for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Ramon Ballester)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{czech}          & Czech for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Robert Marik)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{brazil}         & Brazilian Portuguese for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Koichi
+Sameshima)\\
+\hyperref[web:langopts]{turkish}        & Turkish for web, passed to exerquiz. (Thanks to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak)\\
+\hline
+\multicolumn2{|c|}{Options of the Exerquiz Package\gdef\currentPackage{Exerquiz}} \\ \hline
+%\hyperref[ss:pdftexerquiz]{pdftex}      & tex-to-pdf application \\
+%\hyperref[ss:exbasicusage]{dvipdfm}     & dvi-to-pdf application \\
+\hyperref[sss:nosolutions]{nosolutions} & removes the solutions to the exercises \\
+\hyperref[sss:noquizsolutions]%
+    {noquizsolutions}                   & removes the solutions to the quizzes \\
+\hyperref[sss:nohideopt]%
+    {nohiddensolutions}                 & overrides the `\texttt{h}' (hidden)
+                                            option for the exercises.\\
+\hyperref[sss:noHideopt]%
+    {noHiddensolutions}                 & overrides the `\texttt{h}' and `\texttt{H}'
+                                            (hidden) options for the exercises.\\
+\hyperref[sss:nocorrections]%
+    {nocorrections}                     & removes the ability to correct the quizzes\\
+\hyperref[sss:solutionsafter]%
+    {solutionsafter}                    & solutions to exercises are typeset just after the question\\
+\hyperref[sss:exquizforpaper]{forpaper} & same function as in \pkg{web}.
+                                          Needed when \textsf{exerquiz} is not
+                                          used with \pkg{web}\\
+\hyperref[sss:exquizforpaper]%
+    {forcolorpaper}                     & same function as in \pkg{web}.
+                                          Needed when \textsf{exerquiz} is not
+                                          used with \pkg{web}\\
+\hyperref[sss:preview]{preview}         & shows the outline of all form fields
+                                            in the dvi previewer \\
+\hyperref[sss:nodljs]{nodljs}           & turns off the insertion of DLJS \\
+%\hyperref[sss:acrobativ]{acrobativ}    & equivalent to \texttt{nodljs}\\
+\hyperref[sss:noquizzes]{exercisesonly} & if document has only exercises, no doc level JS needed\\
+%\hyperref[sss:debug]{debug}             & this option is passed on to the \texttt{insdljs} package\\
+\hyperref[sss:proofing]{proofing}       & mark the correct answers for
+                                            \texttt{shortquiz} \&
+                                            \texttt{quiz} for
+                                             proof reading. \\
+\hyperref[showgraylettersOpt]%
+    {showgrayletters}                   & Show gray letters under check boxes\\
+\hyperref[ss:allowrandomize]%
+    {allowrandomize}                    & Allow the randomization of choices in multiple choie questions\\
+\hyperref[eq:unicode]{unicode}          & Passes the \texttt{unicode} option to \pkg{hyperref}.\\
+\hyperref[eq:useui]{useui}              & Passes the \texttt{useui} option to \textsf{eforms}.\\
+\hyperref[eq:usesumrytbls]{usesumrytbls}& Inputs the code used to create quiz summary tables,
+                                         \hyperref[s:sumrytbl]{Section~\ref*{s:sumrytbl}}, page~\pageref*{s:sumrytbl}.\\
+\hyperref[eq:contsolns]{contsolns}      & Places a `continued' message in the right footer on a solution page.\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{dutch}  & JavaScript messages in Dutch (Thanks to Henny Wilbrink)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{french} & JavaScript messages in French (Thanks to Jean-Michel Sarlat)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{german} & JavaScript messages in German (Thanks to Michael Wiedmann)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{italian}& JavaScript messages in Italian (Thanks to PierLuigi Zezza)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{norsk}  & JavaScript messages in Noregian (Thanks to Hans Fredrik Nordhaug)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{russian}& JavaScript messages in Russian (Thanks to Sergei V. Znamenskii)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{spanish}& JavaScript messages in Spanish (Thanks to Pedro Luis Luque)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{polish} & JavaScript messages in Polish (Thanks to Jerzy Mycielski)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{finnish}& JavaScript messages in Finnish. (Thanks to P\"aivi Porras)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{catalan}& JavaScript messages in Catalan. (Thanks to Ramon Ballester)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{czech}  & JavaScript messages in Czech. (Thanks to Robert Marik)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{brazil} & JavaScript messages in Brazilian Portuguese. (Thanks to Koichi Sameshima)\\
+\hyperref[sss:exerquizlangopts]{turkish}& JavaScript messages in Turkish. (Thanks to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak)\\
+\hline
+\end{longtable}
+\end{center}
+
+\includeexersolutions
+
+\includequizsolutions
+
+\newpage
+\markright{References}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[1]}\label{references}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}References}
+\backrefparscanfalse
+\def\srtln{\vskip-\baselineskip\vskip-\parsep}
+\def\lngln{\vskip-\parsep}
+
+\item[] We list cited referenced documents, articles, and webpages, as well as
+    recommended reading. Cited material has the page number where that entry
+    was referenced.
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJS}\hypertarget{references}{}%
+   Acrobat JavaScript Scripting Refernce, Technical Note \#5431, Version~6.0.,
+   Adobe Systems, Inc. \backrefprint
+   \srtln\hfill{\small\url{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/acrobat/docs.jsp}}
+
+\bibitem{book:Lamport}
+   Leslie Lamport, \textit{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation}
+   System (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+   1994, ISBN 0-201-52983-1. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens1}
+   Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
+   Samarin, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Companion}, second ed., Addison-Wesley
+   Publishing Company, 2004, ISBN 0-201-36299-6. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens2}
+   Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank
+   Mittelbach, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion},
+   Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1997, ISBN
+   0-201-85469-4. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens3} Michel Goossens, and Rahtz, Sebastian,
+   with Gurari, Eitan,  Moore, Ross, and Sutor, Robert,
+   \textit{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion},
+   Addison Wesley Longman, Reading, Massachusetts, USA, 1999.
+   ISBN:  0-201-43311-7. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Kopka}
+   Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, \textit{A Guide to
+  \LaTeX2e} (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+  1995, ISBN 0-201-43777-X.
+
+\bibitem{book:Knuth}
+  Donald E. Knuth, \textit{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley
+  Publishing Company, 1987, ISBN 0-201-13448-9. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{book:Merz}
+  Thomas Merz, \textit{Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF},
+  Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York, 1998,
+ ISBN 3-540-63762-1. \backrefprint
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:Pdfmarks}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Pdfmarks: Links and Forms}, AcroTeX Web
+ Site, 1998. \backrefprint
+   \lngln\hfill{\small\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}}
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:LaTeX}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Using \LaTeX\ to Create Quality PDF Documents for the
+ WWW}, Acro\!\TeX\ Web Site, 1998. \backrefprint
+   \srtln\hfill{\small\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}}
+
+\bibitem{book:AEBB}
+    D. P. Story, \textsl{\AEBBook}, in preparation. \backrefprint
+
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
+% \printindex
+\end{document}
+
+\newpage
+
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\section}{%
+   \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{}%
+   \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
+   {-3ex\@plus -1ex \@minus-.2ex}%
+   {1ex\@plus .2ex}% 6pt
+   {\noindent\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\color{aeb}}}%
+\renewcommand\subsection{%
+   \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\textbullet\enspace}%
+   \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+   {-2.5ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+   {1ex \@plus .2ex}%
+   {\noindent\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\color{aeb}}}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{%
+   \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\color{aeb}\large$\bullet$\enspace}
+   \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+     {-2ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+     {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+     {\noindent\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand*\thesection{}
+\renewcommand*\thesubsection{\textbullet}
+%\renewcommand*{\thesubsubsection}{\textbullet}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.8em}{1.2em}}
+%\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{1.2em}}
+\makeatother
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{\string\renewcommand*\string\l@subsection{\string\@dottedtocline{2}{2.8em}{1.2em}}}
+
+\section{What's New}
+
+The following is a brief enumeration of some of the major new
+features of the \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages.
+
+\subsection{Web}
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+    \item (Version 4.1) Added the option \texttt{useui}, which is passed
+    \textsf{eforms}. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+    \textsf{eforms} loads the xkeyval package, and key-value pairs are
+    defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+    See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+    \item (Version 4.1) Added a unicode option. This option is passed to hyperref, if eforms
+    is subsequently loaded, eforms (and exerquiz) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional
+    argument of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+    \item (Version 4.1) Added the \texttt{turkish} language option. I extend my appreciation
+    to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak for this translation.
+
+    \item (Version 4.0g) Added the command \cs{useFullWidthForPaper}, see the discussion
+    in \Nameref{paperoptions}.
+    \item (Version 4.0f) Added \cs{setScreensizeFromGraphic}, see
+    \hyperref[setScreensizeFromGraphic]{Section~\ref*{setScreensizeFromGraphic}},
+    page~\pageref*{setScreensizeFromGraphic}.
+    \item (Version 4.0d) \cs{makeinlinetitle}, see \Nameref{inlinetitle}.
+    \item (Version 4.0c) Added \cs{aboveTopTitleSkip}, the amount of skip above the first
+    line on the title page, so the whole title can be move downwards, if
+    desired. See the section \Nameref{top}.
+    \item (Version 4.0) The pro option with many user-convenient features,
+    see \Nameref{webpro}.
+    \item (Version 4.0) New \Web{} options of \texttt{usesf},
+    \hyperref[usesf]{page~\pageref*{usesf}}  and \texttt{center\-title\-page},
+    \hyperref[centertitle]{page~\pageref*{centertitle}}.
+
+\item[] \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt} Older New Stuff \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt}
+
+    \item (Version 3.3) Made many internal changes for my new package, the
+    \textsf{\textcolor{blue}{Acro\!\TeX{} Presentation Bundle}} (\cAPB), yet
+    to be released, but see \url{http://www.acrotex.net} for details and demos.
+    \item (Version 3.3) Added some commands for running headers
+    and footers, these are \cs{lheader}, \cs{cheader}, \cs{rheader},
+    \cs{lfooter}, \cs{cfooter}, \cs{rfooter}, \cs{clearHeaders} and \cs{re\-store\-Head\-ers}.
+     \item (Version 3.2) Added support for the Dr. Uwe Kern's \textsf{xcolor}
+        package. Unrecognized options are passed to the color package,
+        in particular, the \textsf{(x)color} option \texttt{dvipsnames} is passed
+        from \Web{} to the color package.
+    \item[] If available, \textsf{xcolor} is used, otherwise
+        \pkg{web} uses the standard \textsf{color} package.
+     \item[] There is a \texttt{noxcolor} which should be used as a
+        global option, that is passed as an option of the class. Thus,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\documentclass[noxcolor]{article}
+\end{Verbatim}
+        will cause \pkg{web} (and other packages such as
+        \textsf{PSTricks}) to use the \textsf{color} package, even
+        though \textsf{xcolor} may be present.
+     \item (Version 3.2) Added a \texttt{nobullets} option. When taken, the bullets
+        that traditionally appear for the \cs{subsubection} now appear
+        with subsubsection numbers.
+
+     \item (Version 3.2) Added a \texttt{draft} option: When you take this option,
+        graphic overlays are not allowed.  This is useful when you rely
+        heavily on graphic overlays, but during the development phase,
+        don't need to read and re-read your overlays. The defined
+        background colors will be used instead. Remove this option to
+        build the final version of your document.
+
+     \item (Version 3.2) Defined macros for conveniently
+         setting the color of some of the title page elements:
+         \cs{titleColor}, \cs{authorColor} and \cs{universityColor}.
+        Each takes a single argument, a named color. The defaults are
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\universityColor{blue}
+\titleColor{black}
+\authorColor{black}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+    \item (Version 3.2) Changed optional argument for the template commands
+        \cs{template} and \cs{panel\-template}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\template[<includegraphics\_opts>]{<path\_to\_template>}
+\paneltemplate[<includegraphics\_opts>]{<path\_to\_template>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+        The optional argument \texttt{[<includegraphics\_opts>]} can be used
+        to pass options to the underlying \cs{includegraphics} command. Do
+        not use the \texttt{width} and \texttt{height} keys; probably, it is
+        safest to use only the Boolean keys.  The Boolean key
+        \texttt{hiresbb} is quite useful when stretching a small graphic to
+        fit over a larger area. The one required argument is the path to the
+        graphic file.
+
+    \item (Version 3.2) Added a number of new commands to improve template management. See
+    the \texttt{web.dtx} for documentation.
+     \item (Version 3.2) Added language option \texttt{czech}, the translation due
+         to Robert Marik.
+     \item (Version 3.2) Added language option \texttt{catalan}, the translation due
+         to Ramon Ballester.
+     \item (Version 3.2) Added language option \texttt{brazil}, the translation due to
+         Koichi Sameshima.
+     \item Added language \texttt{finnish} Options. Translation due
+     to Paivi Porras.
+     \item Added a \texttt{\hyperref[forcolorpaper]{forcolorpaper}} option. This is the same as \texttt{forpaper}
+     but the color operators are not turned off.
+     \item Added three new options for creating color backgrounds
+     and overlays, \texttt{usetemplates}. \texttt{rightpanel} and
+     \texttt{leftpanel}, see the section \Nameref{ss:templates}.
+     The various template options requires the \textsf{eso-pic}
+     package by  Rolf Niepraschk and the \textsf{everyshi} package
+     by Martin Schr\"oder. The \textsf{web package} supports graphics overlays
+     for the \texttt{dvipsone}, \texttt{dvips}, \texttt{pdftex} and
+     \texttt{dvipdfm} options.
+     \item Added a command to create navigation icons,
+     \nameref{ss:newnaviicon}, page~\pageref{ss:newnaviicon}.
+     \item Added a \texttt{textures} option, due to Ross Moore.
+    \item Made some minor changes to make \pkg{web} work better
+    with the \texttt{book} document class.
+    \item The introduction of the \textsf{polish} option. This
+    makes a total of nine localizations of \textsf{web/exerquiz}:
+    french, german, norsk, dutch, spanish, italian, russian,
+    dansk and polish.
+    \item  Set an alias between \cs{marginsize} and \cs{margins}.
+    The latter is used by pdfscreen. This will make it easier for
+    people to switch between using web and pdfscreen. The use of
+    \cs{marginsize} is now deprecated.
+\end{questions}
+
+\normalcolor
+
+\subsection{Exerquiz}
+
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+    \item (Version 6.3) Added the option \texttt{useui}, which is passed
+    \textsf{eforms}. If \textsf{eforms} is subsequently loaded,
+    \textsf{eforms} loads the xkeyval package, and key-value pairs are
+    defined for use in the optional argument of form and link commands.
+    See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+    \item (Version 6.3) Added a unicode option. This option is passed to hyperref, if eforms
+    is subsequently loaded, eforms (and exerquiz) will accept {\LaTeX} markup in the optional
+    argument of the form fields. See the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms manual} for details.
+
+    \item (Version 6.3) Added the \texttt{turkish} language option. I extend my appreciation
+    to Mahmut Ko\c{c}ak for this translation.
+
+    \item (Version 6.2d) Added \cs{titleQuiz} and \cs{fancyQuizHeaders},
+    see \hyperref[titleQuiz]{Section~\ref*{titleQuiz}}, page~\pageref*{titleQuiz}
+    and \hyperref[titleQuizSQ]{Section~\ref*{titleQuizSQ}}, page~\pageref*{titleQuizSQ}.
+    \item (Version 6.2c) Added a feature that I have used for years to \textsf{exerquiz}:
+    see the section titled \Nameref{showcreditmarkup}.
+    \item (Version 6.2a) Added a feature for bookmarking exercises and quizzes,
+    see \hyperref[bmExQz]{Section~\ref*{bmExQz}} on page~\pageref*{bmExQz}.
+    \item (Version 6.2) Added the manswers environment for multiple answer
+    questions, that is, multiple choice questions that have several correct
+    answers. Multiple selection is permitted. See the \Nameref{manswersQuiz}.
+    \item (Version 6.1) Added the ability to randomize the multiple
+    choice alternatives, see the two sections \Nameref{ss:allowrandomize} and
+    \Nameref{s:random} for details.
+    \item (Version 6.05f) For inputting math fill-in responses. \texttt{log} now means common log,
+    and as before \texttt{ln} means natural log.  Also,
+    re-engineered things so that math fill-in now accepts, and
+    correctly interprets, scientific notation (using E-notation)
+    $\texttt{<decimal\_number>}\text{E}\texttt{<integer>}$. The
+    capital letter E represents ``times ten raised to the power'',
+    the lower case e is reserved for use as the natural number.
+    \item (Version 6.05d) Added option \texttt{showgrayletters},
+    see \Nameref{showgraylettersOpt}.
+    \item (Version 6.05e) Added \cs{setMClabelsep} and
+        \cs{resetMClabelsep} to adjust the horizontal distance between
+        the label and text for multiple choice questions. See the
+        discussion in \Nameref{BasicUsage}.
+
+    \item (Version 6.05g)  Added \cs{renameSolnAfterTo} for conveniently
+        changing the solution after label, and
+        \cs{resetSolnAfterToDefault} for resetting back to the default.
+        These two commands are available for use in \textsf{exerquiz} or
+        in \textsf{eqexam}. There is a brief discussion of these
+        commands in \Nameref{sss:solutionsafter}.
+
+    \item (Version 6.05c) Added the commands \Com{DeclareQuiz}, \Com{floatQuiz},
+        \Com{startQuizHere}, \Com{endQuizHere}, and \Com{dockQuiz}. to
+        start a quiz in an arbitrary place prior to the beginning of the
+        quiz. See \Nameref{floatQuiz}.
+
+\item[] \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt} Older New Stuff \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt}
+
+\item (Version 6.03) Added the \hyperref[bChoices]{\cs{bChoices}}/\cs{eChoices} command
+    pair, this makes it easy to lay out multiple choice alternatives.
+
+\item (Version 6.0) Improved the \texttt{mathGrp} environment so
+    that it treats grouped question truly as a unit.  Added two
+    optional parameters to the environment. The document author
+    can specify a JavaScript function to grade the grouped
+    questions.  Despite its name, \texttt{mathGrp} environment
+    works for text fill-in as well as math fill-ins (but not for
+    multiple choice).  The \texttt{mathGrp} environment also now
+    works for the \texttt{shortquiz} environment (in addition to
+    the \texttt{quiz} environment). See \Nameref{grouped}.
+
+    \item Separated the \href{eformman.pdf}{eforms} support from
+    the \textsf{exerquiz} package. \textsf{eforms} is now a
+    stand-alone package that can be used by people who may want to
+    use PDF forms outside the context of a document that contains
+    quizzes. See the demo file \texttt{eforms\_tst.tex}.
+
+    \item \textcolor{red}{Important:} There is one required
+    parameter for the \texttt{quiz} environment, a base name used
+    to build the names of the form fields used in the quiz, e.g.,
+    \verb+\begin{quiz}{qzQuiz1}+. Now this base name of the quiz
+    should only contain ascii characters or numbers.  This name is
+    now used to construct a JavaScript object, so it must be a
+    valid JavaScript object name. For example \texttt{qzQuiz1} is
+    correct, but \texttt{qz:Quiz-1} is not.
+
+    \item Created \cs{@PromptButton} a new correct answer button for quizzes. Quiz
+        questions might have a series of parts in which the answer
+        to one part depends on the answer to the previous part.
+        With \cs{@PromptButton}, the answer can be optionally
+        provided while the student is taking the quiz. See the section on the
+        Prompt Button for details.
+
+    \item Created a grouping environment for math fill-in questions.  See the section
+        entitled Grouping Math Fill-in Questions.
+
+    \item Added a \texttt{noquizsolutions} option -- mostly for online quizzing --
+    see page~\pageref{sss:noquizsolutions}.
+    \item Changed the behavior of \cs{CorrButton}: If \hyperref[sss:nocorrections]{\texttt{nocorrections}}
+            is used, the \cs{CorrButton} does not appear. This is reasonable,
+            \cs{CorrButton} is used to display corrections to the quiz.
+    \item Modified the \texttt{questions} environment so that it behaves more like
+            standard {\LaTeX} list environments. You can now nest the \texttt{questions}
+            environment three deep. See \texttt{pc\_test.tex} for examples.
+    \item Added an optional argument to the \cs{Ans} command for multiple-choice questions
+        for assigning \textit{partial credit}. See the demo file \texttt{pc\_test.tex}.
+    \item Modified the behavior of the link-type multiple choice questions  When you select
+            an alternative, a check appears superimposed over the letter. I've removed the
+            alert dialog informing the user that he has change his selection. The file
+            \texttt{pc\_test.tex} illustrates this.
+    \item The \hyperref[paraRespBoxNine]{ninth parameter} of \cs{RespBoxMath} has been modified to take an JS object.
+         This object can have two properties:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+{ [ priorParse: <js function>  | <array of js functions> ],
+  [ comp: <compare function> ] }
+\end{Verbatim}
+        The \texttt{priorParse} property is used to filter the user's answer prior to be fully parsed,
+        while the \texttt{comp} property is used to specify a custom compare function.
+        See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex} for examples.
+    \item Again for the math fill-in (\cs{RespBoxMath}), the way in which you specify variables (the
+        \hyperlink{paraRespBoxThree}{third parameter})
+        has changed: Specify the variables using a comma-delimited list, for example, \texttt{(r:x,i:n,y)}.
+        Typing the variables has been introduced: \texttt{r:x} means that \texttt{x} is a real variable (the default)
+        and \texttt{i:n} means that \texttt{n} is an integer variable. See the demo file \texttt{integer\_tst.tex}.
+
+     \item Added complete support with \textsf{eForms}. Integrated
+         this support into the quiz environments. See the \texttt{\href{eformman.pdf}{eForms Manual}}
+         documentation file for complete details.
+     \item Documented the use of form check boxes with the \texttt{shortquiz}
+     environment and introduced the commands
+ \begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+ \sqTurnOffAlerts,\sqTurnOnAlerts,\sqNoCorrections,\sqNoCorrections
+ \end{Verbatim}
+     to control response feedback.
+     \item Added language \texttt{finnish} Options. Translation due
+         to Paivi Porras.
+    \item Eliminated the need for the \cs{ifforAcroV} switch in the
+    \texttt{*.ins} files. I've written new code that detects whether Acro4 or
+    Acro5 is being used; in the latter case, a \texttt{try/catch} strategy is
+    used to catch exceptions.
+    \item Added a \texttt{textures} option, due to Ross Moore.
+    \item Wrote same JavaScripts and placed them in the \texttt{dljslib} to
+    process questions in which an equation is the expected answer. See the
+    sample file \texttt{jqzequat.tex}.
+    \item Wrote the \texttt{dljslib} Package, this is a library of JavaScript
+    functions that extends the capabilities of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+    \item Extended math fill-in questions to include arbitrary multivariate
+    questions.  See the sample file \texttt{multivar.tex}.
+    \item  Added several macros: \cs{defaultquiztype} and
+    \cs{quiztype}. The first command takes no arguments, the
+    second on takes one: either l or f; e.g. \verb+quiztype{f}+
+    (\verb+quiztype{l}+) causes the quiz environment to ignore the
+    optional `quiztype' parameter (\texttt* or no \texttt*) and to
+    use a form-type (resp.\ link-type).  Placing
+    \cs{defaultquiztype} reverts the quiz environment back to its
+    default behavior (obeying the first optional parameter).
+    \item Added the convenience commands for the \texttt{quiz} environment: \cs{useBeginQuizButton},
+    \cs{use\-EndQuizButton}, \cs{useBeginQuizLink} and \cs{useEndQuizLink}.
+    See \mlNameref{sss:FormButton} for details.\footnote{This link requires Adobe Reader 7.0 or later.}
+    \item Added the \texttt{noHiddensolutions} for \textsf{exerquiz}, and
+    added an `\texttt{H}' option for exercises to hide solutions, see
+    \nameref{sss:hide} and \nameref{sss:noHideopt}, for details.
+    \item Added a method of assigning points to a quiz question. Useful
+    for submitting questions to a CGI for recording in a database.
+    \item Added a \texttt{noPeeking()} JS function and supporting macros.
+    When the \cs{NoPeeking} command is executed, the student cannot
+    see the solutions to the quizzes (not shortquizzes) by browsing
+    through the file. See \Nameref{sss:nopeek}.
+    \item Added new JS functions \texttt{lowThreshold()} and
+    \texttt{highThreshold()}. I modified the end of quiz macros to
+    incorporate the calling of one of these two (or calling a
+    document author defined routine). See \Nameref{threshold}.
+    \item  Added a `\texttt{debug}' option, which gets passed on
+    to \texttt{insdljs} package. This can be used to write some
+    debugging commands within your JS. (\Nameref{sss:debug})
+    \item For math fill-ins, the author does not use the
+    JavaScript syntax; the author can use simplified notation, e.g,
+    \verb+2*x*e^(x^2)+ instead of \texttt{2*x*exp(pow(x,2))}.
+    Author's answer now passes through the ParseInput JS routine.
+    \item Now the document author can define a custom
+    JS function to process an answer. Also, when writing
+    Math fill-in questions, you can also define your
+    own variable (no longer restricted to just `$x$').
+    \item Added in a \texttt{solutions} environment to
+    \texttt{quiz} environment. Added additional optional parameter
+    into the \cs{RespBox}, \cs{RespBoxTxt} macros to indicate the
+    presence of a solution. The solution is viewed by
+    shift-clicking on the ``Ans'' Button (\cs{CorrAnsButton}). A
+    button or checkbox that has a solution has a boundary color of
+    \cs{solutionColor}.
+    \item \texttt{Exerquiz} now uses the package \texttt{insDLSJ} to
+    insert document level JavaScripts; this gives the document author
+    a chance to write custom JavaScripts. I've also modified many macros
+    that enable the document author to ``hook'' into.
+    \item New command \cs{RespBoxEssay} that can be used to pose
+    Essay-type questions. The question is not evaluated by JavaScript
+    within the document; rather, this question should be submitted
+    to a CGI for later review by the instructor.
+    \item \cs{RespBoxMath} has been defined to be the same as
+    \cs{RespBox} to give a little more consistency in naming.
+    \item The use of \cs{RespBoxNT} has been deprecated. Added in
+    feature to customize the comparison of two answers.
+    \item Added a text fill-in question type that can be used in the
+    \texttt{short\-quiz} and \texttt{quiz} environments.
+    (\Nameref{sss:oTxtQ})
+    \item A \texttt{preview} option has been added. When this
+    option is used, the bounding rectangles of all form fields
+    are framed so their positions can be seen in a dvi previewer.
+    See \mlNameref{sss:preview}.\footnote{This link requires Adobe Reader 7.0 or later.}
+ \end{questions}
+
+ \subsection{insdljs}
+
+ The \texttt{insdljs} Package is a general purpose \LaTeX{} package
+ for inserting Acrobat JavaScript into the document level section
+ of a PDF document. The package features the \texttt{insDLJS}
+ environment.  This environment typically goes in the preamble of a
+ \LaTeX{} source file, or in the style files of a \LaTeX{} package.
+ See the documentation contained within the \texttt{insdljs.dtx}
+ file for additional details.  There is a sample file,
+ \texttt{insdljs\_ex.tex} that can be used as a startup test file.
+
+\begin{questions}
+    \item (Version 2.0f) Added a command \cs{previewMiKTeX} which redefines \cs{jsR} and
+    \cs{jsT} that enables, I hope, the \textsf{yap} previewer to preview
+    an \textsf{AeB} document.
+     \item Added the \texttt{defineJS} environment. Use this environment to
+     write JavaScript for buttons and other form fields.
+     \item Added the \texttt{execJS} environment. Use this environment to write
+     ``discardable'' JavaScript that will execute when the newly created document is opened
+     in the Acrobat Viewer.  (The Acrobat Viewer, not the Reader, is required.)
+     See the demo file \texttt{execjstst.tex}.
+\end{questions}
+
+\subsection{dljslib}
+
+The \texttt{dljslib} Package acts as a library of JavaScript
+functions. Due to the increased programmability of
+\texttt{exerquiz} and its new-found flexibility, it is possible to
+write a number of different routines to handle various kinds of
+math fill-in questions. These JavaScript functions can be stored
+in the library and retrieved when needed.  This package requires
+the \texttt{insdljs} package.
+ \begin{questions}
+
+    \item There are some major user-contributed JavaScript routines.
+        The following functions, which are \texttt{ProcResp}-types, were
+        written for an online grading system being developed by Drs.\
+        Bruce Wagner and David Arnold, and Mr. Jacob Miles-Prystowsky.
+        The descriptions given below were provided by the authors.
+        I want to extend my deep thanks for their contribution! See the
+        documentation of \textsf{dljslib.dtx} for extended details.
+    \begin{questions}
+        \item The JS function \texttt{ProcRespSetFormula} grades an
+            unordered list of formulas, such as \texttt{x}, \verb!x^2!, \verb!x^3!.
+        \item \texttt{ProcRespFactors} is for grading polynomial factoring
+            questions. If a polynomial factors as
+            \verb!-5x^2(x-4)(x+2)!, the answer is only unique
+            up to the order of factors and a change of sign on an
+            even number of factors. For example, it could also be
+            written as \verb!-5x^2(x+2)(x-4)! or
+            \verb!5x^2(-x+4)(x+2)! or \verb!-5(x-4)(x+2)x^2!, etc.
+            This script should grade all of these correctly.
+        \item The JS function \texttt{ProcPoint} is almost an exact copy of
+            the JS function \texttt{ProcVec}, but uses parentheses instead of angle brackets as
+            delimiters. This is for questions that have a point $(x,y)$ as the
+            answer.
+        \item  \texttt{ProcRespIntervals} is for grading questions that have an
+                interval or union of intervals as the answer.
+    \end{questions}
+    \item[] The sample file for this contribution is \texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+    \item Added a feature whereby you can create a file
+    \texttt{libcusopt.opt} to declare your own options for this
+    package. These declarations should be a combination of existing options.
+    For example,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\DeclareOption{procrespgrp}{\includeOptions{%
+    vectors,setSupport,equations,intervals,%
+    unordered,point,factors,ImplMulti}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+    creates a new option for \textsf{dljslib} called \texttt{procrespgrp} which bundles
+    together all frequently used JS functions frequently used. The file
+    \texttt{libcusopt.opt} can be placed in the {\LaTeX} search path, but it's perhaps
+    best to put it in your source file, so that the options are local to that folder.
+    The command \cs{includeOptions} is defined in \texttt{dljslit.dtx}.
+
+    \item[] A sample \texttt{libcusopt.opt} is distributed with the
+    {\AEB}, this sample file consists of the example given above,
+    and is used by the sample file \texttt{dljslib\_apw.tex}.
+
+\item[] \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt} Older New Stuff \rule[2pt]{1in}{.4pt}
+
+    \item  Added an option \texttt{limitArith} to the
+    \textsf{dljslib}, which limits the use of arithmetic operations
+    and built-in functions. The demo file is
+    \texttt{limarth.tex}, found in the \texttt{dljslib\_examples}
+    folder. \item  Added \texttt{setSupport} option to
+    \textsf{dljslib}. This gives support to math fill-in questions
+    for processing (1) a set of numerical answers or a comma
+    delimited list of answers; (2) a symbolic set of answers. The
+    demo file is \texttt{set\_test.tex}.
+
+     \item Added \texttt{combinatorics}, \texttt{nodec} and
+     \texttt{noBinFac} to the JavaScript library. These additions
+     are due to Ross Moore and Frances Griffin and were developed
+     for their
+     \href{http://rutherglen.ics.mq.edu.au/~macqtex/}{MacQ{\TeX}}
+     online testing system. Some of the changes listed in the
+     \textsf{exerquiz} section above were to accommodate these new
+     functions (for example, having integer variables).  Many, many
+     thanks for generously sharing their JavaScript with the
+     \TeX/PDF community. The test file for these features is
+     \texttt{integer\_tst.tex}.
+\end{questions}
+% See the documentation contained within the \texttt{dljslib.dtx} document, and
+% see \Nameref{sss:dljslib}.
+
+\section{What's Old}
+
+\paragraph*{History.} The \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages were written in
+preparation for a two-day workshop on \LaTeX/PDF that I gave at
+the \textcolor{red}{College of the Redwoods}, April~30-May~1,
+1999, at the invitation of David Arnold.  The workshop forced me
+to take many of the basic macros that I had developed in plain
+\TeX\ and convert them to \LaTeX.
+
+Significant additions to the \textsf{exerquiz} were made immediately
+following the $\text{20}^{\text{th}}$ Annual Conference of the \TeX\
+User's Group (\textsf{tug}), in August, 1999, Vancouver, British
+Columbia, which I attended.
+
+The \textsf{insdljs} package was written for the $\text{22}^{\text{nd}}$
+Annual Conference of the \TeX\ User's Group (\textsf{tug}), in
+August 2001, at the University of Delaware, Newark, Delaware.
+
+The \texttt{execJS} environment was created as a result of some
+work I did for the Seybold SF Convention, 2002 (see article at
+\href{http://www.planetpdf.com/mainpage.asp?webpageid=2130}{planetPDF});
+the techniques were first presented to the PDF public at this
+convention.  My complete presentation from that conference is
+again available from
+\href{http://www.planetpdf.com/mainpage.asp?webpageid=2310}{planetPDF}.
+
+\paragraph*{Acknowledgements.} Noel Vaillant, \url{www.probability.net}, deserves my thanks for
+his enthusiasm for the \pkg{web} style file and his initial
+work on it inspired me to make a serious effort at writing a
+\LaTeX\ package.
+
+Thanks also goes out to Jean-Michel Sarlat for writing a French
+version of the \pkg{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages. See
+his \href{http://melusine.eu.org/syracuse/}{Syracuse} Web site. He
+urged me to include a language option.  Thanks also goes to
+Michael Wiedmann who suggested a language option many months
+earlier, but I'm afraid it landed on deaf ears at the time.
+These two provided the translations for the \texttt{french} and
+\texttt{german} options. (January 1, 2000)
+
+My thanks  to Heiko Oberdiek, who took a close look at
+\textsf{insdljs}. He made several suggestions, and urged me to
+make some significant improvements to this package.
+
+\medbreak\noindent
+Now, I really must get back to retirement.\enspace\dps
+
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}
+\includeexersolutions
+\includequizsolutions
+
+
+\newpage
+\markright{References}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[1]}\label{references}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}References}
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJS}\hypertarget{references}{}%
+   Acrobat JavaScript Scripting Refernce, Technical Note \#5431, Version~6.0.,
+   Adobe Systems, Inc., 200\\ \url{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/acrobat/docs.jsp}
+
+\bibitem{book:Lamport}
+   Leslie Lamport, \textit{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation}
+   System (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+   1994, ISBN 0-201-52983-1.
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens1}
+   Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
+   Samarin, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Companion}, Addison-Wesley
+   Publishing Company, 1994, ISBN 0-201-54199-8.
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens2}
+   Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank
+   Mittelbach, \textit{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion},
+   Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1997, ISBN
+   0-201-85469-4.
+
+\bibitem{book:Goossens3} Michel Goossens, and Rahtz, Sebastian,
+   with Gurari, Eitan,  Moore, Ross, and Sutor, Robert,
+   \textit{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion},
+   Addison Wesley Longman, Reading, Massachusetts, USA, 1999.
+   ISBN:  0-201-43311-7.
+
+\bibitem{book:Kopka}
+   Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly, \textit{A Guide to
+  \LaTeX2e} (2nd ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Company,
+  1995, ISBN 0-201-43777-X.
+
+\bibitem{book:Knuth}
+  Donald E. Knuth, \textit{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley
+  Publishing Company, 1987, ISBN 0-201-13448-9.
+
+\bibitem{book:Merz}
+  Thomas Merz, \textit{Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF},
+  Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York, 1998,
+ ISBN 3-540-63762-1.
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:Pdfmarks}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Pdfmarks: Links and Forms}, AcroTeX Web
+ Site, 1998,\\\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}
+
+\bibitem{article:Story:LaTeX}
+ D.P. Story, \textit{Using \LaTeX\ to Create Quality PDF Documents for the
+ WWW}, Acro\!\TeX\ Web Site, 1998,\\
+ \url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/acrotex.html}
+
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
+% \printindex
+\end{document}
+
+I copied the file amsfonts.map from texmf/dvips/ams
+to texmf/pdftex/base.  I then edited the file
+pdftex.cfg and included the line
+map  +amsfonts.map.
+map standard.map   % to get dings
+
+output_format 1
+compress_level 9
+decimal_digits 2
+page_width 210mm
+page_height 297mm
+horigin 1in
+vorigin 1in
+map standard.map
+map +cm.map
+map +amsfonts.map
+% map +logo.map
+% map +lucida.map
+% map +misc.map
+% map +cs.map
+% map +cmttf.map
+% map +test.map
+% map +ttftest.map
+% map +mono.map
+
+
+\subsubsection{An Example}\label{sss:quizexample}
+
+
+%\renewcommand\bqlabel{Begin Quiz}
+%\renewcommand\eqlabel{End Quiz}
+
+The following example is used at the Acro\!\TeX\ Web Site in a
+demonstration program on how to use \emph{Adobe's FDF Toolkit} to
+process form data from a pdf file.  (Form data exported from a pdf
+file is in the \emph{Forms Data Format}, or  FDF.)  The url for
+this demonstration program is \url{\bUrl/demo/quiz1_q.pdf}.
+
+
+\symbolchoice{diamond}
+
+\begin{quiz*}{QuizTotal} Answer each of the following. Passing is 100\%.
+
+\begin{questions}
+
+\item Calculate the limit, if it exists, otherwise, state that it does not
+exist (d.n.e.).
+\[
+    \lim_{x\to3}\frac{\sqrt{3x}(x^2-4)^2}{x^2-2x-1}.
+\]
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $75$  &\Ans1 $\dfrac{75}2$ &\Ans0 $25$ &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Calculate the limit, if it exists, otherwise, state that it does not
+exist (d.n.e.).
+\[
+    \lim_{t\to2}\frac{t^2-4}{t-2}.
+\]
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $2$ &\Ans0 $+\infty$ &\Ans1 4 &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Calculate the limit,
+$\displaystyle\lim_{t\to2^-}\frac{t^2}{t-2}$, if it exists, otherwise,
+state that it does not exist (d.n.e.).
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 $-\infty$ &\Ans0 $+\infty$ &\Ans0 $4$ &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Using one-sided limit techniques, determine whether the limit
+$\lim_{x\to2}f(x)$ exists and state its value, where
+\[
+   f(x) = \begin{cases}
+         |x^2-5|  & \text{for }x\le2 \\
+        \dfrac{x-2}{x-2} & \text{for }x>2
+      \end{cases}
+\]
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $-1$& \Ans0 0 &\Ans1 1 &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item Calculate the limit,
+$\displaystyle\lim_{x\to-2}\frac{\sqrt{x+8}-\sqrt6}{x+2}$,
+if it exists, otherwise, state that it does not
+exist (d.n.e.).
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 $\dfrac1{\sqrt6}$ &\Ans1 $\dfrac{\sqrt6}{12}$ &
+  \Ans0 $\dfrac12$ &\Ans0 d.n.e.
+\end{answers}
+
+\item There is some function $f$ and some number $a$ in the domain of
+$f$ such that
+\[
+    f'(a)=\lim_{x\to-2}\frac{\sqrt{x+8}-\sqrt6}{x+2}
+\]
+Name the function $f$ and the number $a$.
+\begin{answers}2
+\Ans1 \strut$f(x)=\sqrt{x+8}$; $a=-2$ &\Ans0 $f(x)=\sqrt{x}$; $a=-2$\\[3pt]
+\Ans0 \strut$f(x)=\sqrt{x+8}$; $a=0$  &\Ans0 $f(x)=\sqrt{x+8}$; $a=2$
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\raisebox{-3pt}
+{\TextField[width=3in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,default=\eqScore]{}}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+The partial code for this quiz looks like this.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\symbolchoice{diamond}  % change to diamond `check'
+\begin{quiz*}{QuizTotal} Answer each of the following....
+\begin{questions}
+.........
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad\raisebox{-3pt}{\TextField[name=QuizTotal,
+   default=\eqScore,bordercolor=0 0 1,width=3in]{}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\begin{quiz*}{qzTeXc} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Thomas Esser maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans1 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Fabrice Popineau maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans1 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\item What \TeX\ System does Christian Schenk maintain?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 MiK\TeX &\Ans0 cs\TeX &\Ans0 te\TeX &\Ans0 fp\TeX
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz*}\quad
+\raisebox{-2pt}{\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{% label, field
+\medskip\noindent#2}%
+\TextField[name=qzTeXc,width=1.25in,align={0 /Ff 1},
+   default=\eqScore]{}\raisebox{3.5pt}{%
+   \CorrButton[\BC{0 0 1}%  blue border color
+   \CA{TeX}%              Button text
+   \RC{Users}%            rollover text
+   \AC{Group}%            pushed text
+   \DA{/TiRo 10 Tf 0 0 1 rg}% times roman, 10 pt, blue text
+%   \W{1}\S{I}%
+   \BS{/W 1 /S /I}%      % border width 1, inset button
+   ]{qzTeXc}}}
+
+
+%\noindent\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+\begin{quiz}*{qzTeX} Answer each of the following. Passing
+is 100\%.
+\begin{questions}
+\item Who created \TeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans1 Knuth &\Ans0 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\item Who originally wrote \LaTeX?
+\begin{answers}4
+\Ans0 Knuth &\Ans1 Lamport &\Ans0 Carlisle &\Ans0 Rahtz
+\end{answers}
+\end{questions}
+\end{quiz}
+
+
+\subsection{Greater Customization with
+  \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{TextField}}
+  {\textbackslash TextField}}\label{ss:modoutputfield}
+
+The \cs{ScoreField} macro is defined as
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand{\ScoreField}[2][width=1.5in]{%
+  \TextField[name=#2,default=\eqScore,align={0 /Ff 1},#1]{}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent You can see the command takes one required argument and one
+optional argument (the required one is label \texttt{\#2} and the
+optional one is \texttt{\#1}).  The required argument becomes the
+\texttt{name} of the field, and the optional parameter is just
+added into the parameter list of \cs{TextField}.  You can also see
+the \texttt{value} of the field is set to \cs{eqScore}, which
+expands to `Score:' in English.
+
+More sophisticated score fields can be obtained by manipulating
+\cs{TextField} directly.
+
+We can modify the appearance of the text field in a couple of
+ways: (1) by changing some of the options in \cs{TextField}; (2)
+changing the macro definition of \cs{LayoutTextField}.
+
+\subsubsection{Admissible key-value pairs of
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{TextField}}
+  {\textbackslash TextField}}\label{sss:modtextfield}
+
+In this section we will outline methods of modifying the
+appearance of \cs{TextField} text box, which is a macro defined in
+the \pkg{hyperref} package.
+
+The following table lists several useful options for
+\cs{TextField}.
+
+%Numerous examples on how to use these options
+%follow the table.
+
+
+\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}lll>{\PBS\raggedright}p{1.5in}}
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Dimension Related} \\ [3pt]
+height      & dimen  &       & height of box \\
+width       & dimen  &       & width of field box \\ [12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Text Related} \\ [3pt] align
+&name &0 & $0=\text{left-aligned}$,\newline
+                 $1=\text{centered}$\newline
+                 $2=\text{right-aligned}$ \\
+charsize    & dimen  & 10pt & Font size of text \\ [12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Color Related} \\ [3pt]
+backgroundcolor & RGB &1 1 1& Color of background color.\\
+bordercolor & RGB & 1 0 0 & Color of the border.\\ [12pt]
+color       & RGB    & 0 0 0 & Color of text within field\\
+borderstyle & name &S& S (solid), B (beveled),
+                      I (insert), U (underlined) \\ [12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Style Related} \\ [3pt]
+borderwidth & number & 1 & Width of the border of the
+                           box (in points)\\[12pt]
+%
+\multicolumn{4}{l}{\large\color{red}$\blacktriangleright$
+\color{blue} \cs{TextField} Options: Field Related} \\ [3pt]
+default     &        &       & default value of the field \\
+name        & name   &       & name of the field\\
+readonly    & Boolean& false & set read-only switch
+\end{longtable}
+%\end{flushleft}
+
+A complete list of options comes with the \pkg{hyperref}
+documentation; or see Michel Goossens \textit{et
+al}~\cite{book:Goossens3}, entitled \textit{The \LaTeX\ Web
+Companion}
+
+We next present several examples that illustrate the use of these
+options.
+
+\subsubsection{Some  Examples of
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{Textfield}}
+  {\textbackslash Textfield}}\label{sss:exampltextfield}
+
+\def\LayoutTextField#1#2{\redpoint\raisebox{-3pt}{#2}}
+
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+    default=\eqScore]{}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,
+   bordercolor=0 0 1,default=\eqScore]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The \texttt{readonly} is an important attribute to have---the
+students cannot modify their score.  Unfortunately,
+\texttt{readonly} \emph{does not work} with \pkg{hyperref}. To
+overcome this ``bug'' in \pkg{hyperref}, you have to be a
+little sneaky.
+
+\TextField[width=2in,name=Example,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+   backgroundcolor=0.98 0.92 0.73,color=1 0 0,align={0  /Ff 1},
+   default=Text Field with Various Options]{}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=2in,name=Example,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+   backgroundcolor=0.98 0.92 0.73,color=1 0 0,
+   align={0  /Ff 1}, % realonly is /Ff 1 in pdf code
+   default=Text Field with Various Options]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The read only key-value (\texttt{/Ff 1}) can ``ride'' into the
+code on the ``back'' of the \texttt{align} parameter.
+(\texttt{align=0} means left-aligned in the text field.)
+
+\TextField[width=2in,name=Example,bordercolor=1 1 1,color=0 0 1,
+   backgroundcolor=.753 .753 .753,borderstyle=B,align={1 /Ff 1},
+   default=Your Score goes here]{}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=1.25in,name=Example,bordercolor=1 1 1,
+   backgroundcolor=.753 .753 .753,color=0 0 1,
+   borderstyle=B,align={1 /Ff 1}, % /Ff 1 = readonly
+   default=Your Score goes here]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Modifying
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{LayoutTextField}} {\textbackslash
+LayoutTextField}}\label{sss:modlayout}
+
+\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{#1 #2}
+
+The macro \cs{LayoutTextField} allows you to design how your text
+box is formated by \TeX.  The default definition for
+\pkg{hyperref} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+   \newcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{#1 #2}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The first argument is the \textsf{label}, the second is the
+textfield.  For example,  above definition yields:\\
+\TextField[width=2.4in,name=Name]{\bfseries Enter your name: }
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+   \TextField[width=2.5in,name=Name]{Enter your name: }
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\medskip
+The \textsf{exerquiz} package redefines this to
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{% label, field
+   \medskip\noindent#2}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Finally, the field examples given earlier had the following
+definition for \cs{LayoutTextField}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\newcommand\redpoint{\par\medskip\noindent
+  \makebox[\parindent][l]{\large\textcolor{red}
+  {$\blacktriangleright$}}}
+\renewcommand\LayoutTextField[2]{\redpoint
+  \raisebox{-3pt}{#2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent I lowered the text field to line up better with the
+\texttt{amssymb} symbol \cs{blacktriangleright}
+($\blacktriangleright$), which is painted red. In this way we
+obtain
+
+\def\LayoutTextField#1#2{\redpoint\raisebox{-3pt}{#2}}
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+    default=\eqScore]{}
+\begin{comment}
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\TextField[width=2in,name=QuizTotal,bordercolor=0 0 1,
+    default=\eqScore]{}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{comment}
+
+\subsubsection{Custom Comparisons}\label{cusComp}
+
+This section is devoted to customizing the method of comparison
+for the math type objective question using \cs{RespBoxMath} command.
+
+When the user enters an answer into the response box, a
+document level JavaScript function, \texttt{ProcResp}, is called.
+As discussed earlier, the value of the expression entered by the
+user is compared the corresponding value of the answer given by
+the document author.  The key word in the last sentence is ``compared''. There
+is a compare function that compares the author's answer with the user's answer.
+
+In general, the \texttt{ProcResp} passes five parameters to a compare function.
+The compare function can be be customized by the document author; there is, however,
+a standard, or default, compare function. It is defined as follows:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+function diffCompare(a,b,c,F,G) {
+    var x;
+    with(Math) {
+    x = c;
+    F = eval(F);
+    G = eval(G);
+    return abs ( F - G );
+    }
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent The meaning of these five parameters of this comparison function are
+
+\begin{description}
+    \item[\ttfamily a:] The left-hand endpoint of the interval.
+    \item[\ttfamily b:] The right-hand endpoint of the interval.
+    \item[\ttfamily c:] The point at which both the user and author answers are to
+    be evaluated.
+    \item[\ttfamily F:] The author's answer, a function in $x$.
+    \item[\ttfamily G:] The user's answer, a function in $x$.
+\end{description}
+
+The function \texttt{diffCompare} evaluates each of the two
+functions \texttt F and \texttt G at \texttt{x = c}, and returns
+the absolute difference in the two. For this simple comparison, the parameters
+\texttt a and \texttt b are not used.
+
+The \texttt{diffCompare} will be sufficient for most, but not
+all  mathematical questions. For example, consider the following question:
+
+\medskip
+\begin{oQuestion}{indefInt1}
+$\displaystyle\int \sin(x)\,dx = $\space
+\RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}01\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{-cos(x)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+There are infinitely many answers, all of them of the form $-\cos(x)+C$. Note that
+the only input that is marked as correct is $-\cos(x)$, the JavaScript does not judge
+$-\cos(x)+1$, to be correct, for example. The problem is, of course, the method of
+comparison, \texttt{diffCompare}, is not appropriate to this particular problem.
+
+The above question needs a specialized method of comparison. Consider
+the compare function:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{insDLJS}[indefCompare]{compare}{Comparisons}
+function indefCompare(a,b,c,F,G) {
+    var C, eqx;
+    with(Math) {
+        eqx = a;
+        C = eval(F)-eval(G);
+        eqx = c;
+        F = eval(F);
+        G = eval(G);
+        return abs( F - G - C );
+    }
+}
+\end{insDLJS}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\noindent This environment was placed in the preamble of this document, and uses the
+\texttt{insdljs} package, which comes with the \texttt{exerquiz} distribution.
+This will add the function \texttt{indefCompare} function to the document level
+JavaScript section of the PDF file when it is created.
+
+\redpoint It is \emph{important} to note that when you are writing your
+own compare functions, the independent variable must be named
+`\texttt{eqx}'. The functions \texttt F and \texttt G have been
+searched and their original independent variable has been replaced with
+`\texttt{eqx}'. To get a correct evaluation, therefore, any compare functions
+must use the `\texttt{eqx}' to evaluate the functions.
+
+Let's try that same question, but with this compare function instead of the
+default compare function
+
+\medskip
+\begin{oQuestion}{indefInt2}
+$\displaystyle\int \sin(x)\,dx = $\space
+\RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}01[indefCompare]\kern1bp\CorrAnsButton{-cos(x)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+
+\medskip\noindent
+Now, if you enter $-\cos(x) + 10$, for example, that answer will be judged as
+correct by \texttt{ProcResp}.
+
+The code for the above response box is
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\begin{oQuestion}{indefInt2}
+$\displaystyle\int \sin(x)\,dx = $\space
+\RespBoxMath{-cos(x)}{4}{.0001}01[indefCompare]\kern1bp
+\CorrAnsButton{-cos(x)}
+\end{oQuestion}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\noindent The optional ninth parameter is present in the
+\cs{\hyperlink{paraRespBox}{RespBoxMath}}. Use this parameter to
+pass the name of the compare function that is to process the
+question. Here, we specify \texttt{indefCompare}, which was
+defined in the preamble of this document using the
+\texttt{insDLJS} environment.
-- 
cgit v1.2.3

